9300 Vector..

efesotomasyon.
com - Lenze
EDSVF9383V
.A>#
Ä.A>#ä
System Manual
9300 vector 110 ... 400 kW
EVF9335 ... EVF9338, EVF9381 ... EVF9383

efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
Contents i
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.2 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−2
1.1.3 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−3
1.2 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2−1
1.3 Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3−1
1.4 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4−1
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . 2.1−1
2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors . . . . . . 2.2−1
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3−1
3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

3.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1−1
3.2 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2−1
3.3 Open and closed−loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.4 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4−1
3.5 Rated data (devices in 400V design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5−1
3.6 Rated data (devices for 400/500V mains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6−1
3.6.1 Rated data for 400 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6−1
3.6.2 Rated data for 500 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6−2
3.7 Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−1
3.7.1 Mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−1
3.7.2 DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−2
3.7.3 Notes for mains and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−3
4 Installation of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1
4.2 Basic devices in the power range 110 ... 200 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.2.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.2.2 Drilling the holes into the mounting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−2
4.2.3 Fasten the mounting rails on the mounting plate . . . . . . . . 4.2−3
4.2.4 Fasten controller on mounting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−4
4.3.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 i
i Contents
5 Wiring of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1

5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1
5.1.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1
5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.1.3 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.1.4 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−4
5.1.5 Interaction with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−4
5.2 Basics for wiring according to EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.2 Mains connection, DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.3 Motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−2
5.2.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−4
5.2.6 Wiring outside the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−5
5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−6
5.3.1 Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system) . . . . . . . . 5.3−1
5.3.2 Mains connection of the controller for 400 V mains voltage 5.3−3
5.3.3 Supply and fan connection of the controller for 400 V/500V
mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−4
5.3.4 Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−7
5.3.5 Wiring of motor temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−8
5.4.2 Master and slave connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−3
mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−8
5.5 Control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−1
5.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−1
5.5.2 Connection terminal of the control card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−3
5.5.3 With function "Safe torque off" active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−4
5.5.4 With function "Safe torque off" deactivated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−7
5.5.5 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−9
5.6 Wiring of the system bus (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6−1
5.7 Wiring of the feedback system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−1
5.7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−1
5.7.2 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−2
5.7.3 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−3
ii EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009
Contents i
5.8 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output . . . . . . . 5.8−1

5.9 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9−1
6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1 Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1−1
6.2 Selection of the correct operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2−1
6.3 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3−1
6.3.1 Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode 6.3−1
6.3.2 Commissioning example in vector control mode . . . . . . . . . . 6.3−5
6.4 Controller inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4−1
6.5 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.2 Free configuration of digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−3
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−4
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−6
6.6 Adjusting the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.6.1 Entry of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.6.2 Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−4
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact 6.6−9
6.6.4 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−11
6.6.5 Current limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−15
6.6.6 Automatic collection of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−16
6.7 Setting the speed feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−1
6.7.2 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−3
6.8 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−1
6.8.1 V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−4
6.8.2 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−8
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−1
6.10 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.1 Speed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.2 Setting acceleration times and deceleration times in
speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−3
6.10.3 Quick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−4
6.10.4 Changing the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−5
6.11 Optimising the operating behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.1 Slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.2 Oscillation damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−3
6.11.3 Boost correction with V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−5
6.11.4 Motor magnetising current with vector control . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−9
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 iii

i Contents
7 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1

7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1−1
7.2.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−1
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−2
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−2
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−4
7.2.5 Loading a parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−6
7.2.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices . . . . . . . 7.2−7
7.2.7 Activating password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−9
7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−10
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−11
8 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8−1
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1−1
8.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.1 Diameter calculator (DCALC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−5
8.2.3 Master frequency output (DFOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−8
8.2.4 Master frequency ramp−function generator (DFRFG) . . . . . . 8.2−13
8.2.5 Master frequency processing (DFSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−18
8.2.6 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control
(MCTRL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−25
8.2.7 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2) . . . . . . 8.2−40
8.3 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−1
8.3.1 Fault responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−1
8.3.2 Monitoring times for process data input objects . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−2
8.3.3 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−3
8.3.4 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−3
8.3.5 Controller current load (I x t monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−4
8.3.6 Motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−5
8.3.7 Heatsink temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−6
8.3.8 DC−bus voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−7
8.3.9 External error (EEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−7
8.4 Overview of monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4−1
8.5 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
iv EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009
Contents i
8.6 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1

8.6.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
8.6.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−3
8.6.3 Selection list 3: Angle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−6
8.6.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−6
8.6.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−7
8.7 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7−1
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9−1

9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−1
9.1.1 Display of operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−1
9.1.2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−2
9.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.1 Status display via LEDs at the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.3 Drive behaviour in the event of faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.4 Fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−1
9.4.1 Drive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−1
9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−2
9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus
(OU message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−3
9.5 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5−1
9.5.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5−1
9.5.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5−5
10 DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10−1

10.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1−1
10.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2−1
10.2.1 Possible combinations of Lenze controllers in a network of
several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2−1
10.3 Mains chokes for DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3−1
10.4.1 Mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4−1
10.4.2 DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4−2
10.5 Basic dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
10.5.1 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
10.5.2 Calculation of the additional DC supply input . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
10.5.3 Dimensioning examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−2
10.6 Distributed supply (several supply points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6−1
10.7 Braking operation in the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 v
i Contents
11 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−1

11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1−1
11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2−1
11.3 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3−1
11.4 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.4.2 Manual safety function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−2
11.4.3 Monitoring the safety function with a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−3
12 Braking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12−1

12.1 Brake operation with external brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1−1
12.1.1 Selection of the brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1−1
12.2 Lenze brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−1
12.2.1 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−1
12.2.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−2
12.2.3 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−2
12.2.4 Connection of external brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−3
12.3 Rated data of the integrated brake transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3−1
12.4.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4−2
13 Accessories (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13−1

13.1 General accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1
13.2 Type−specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2−1
14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14−1
14.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1−1
14.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1−1
14.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2−1
vi EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009
Preface and general information 1

Contents
1 Preface
Contents
1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1

1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1
1.1.2 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−2
1.1.3 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−3
1.2 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2−1
1.3 Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3−1
1.4 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1−1


How to use this System Manual 1.1
Information provided by the System Manual 1.1.1
1.1 How to use this System Manual
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual
Target group This System Manual is intended for all persons who design, install,
commission, and adjust the 9300 vector frequency inverter.
Together with the System Manual (extension), document number
EDSV9383V−EXT and the catalog it forms the basis for project planning for
the manufacturer of plants and machinery.
Contents The System Manual is the basis for the description of the 9300 vector
frequency inverter. Together with the System Manual (extension),
document number EDSVF9383V−EXT, a complete System Manual is
available:
ƒ The features and functions are described in detail.
ƒ Examples describe how to set the parameters for typical applications.
ƒ In case of doubt, the Operating Instructions enclosed with the 9300
vector frequency inverter always apply.
Contents of the System Manual Contents of the System Manual (extension)
1 Preface 1 Preface
2 Safety ˘
3 Technical data ˘
4 Installing the basic device ˘
5 Wiring the basic device ˘
6 Commissioning ˘
7 Parameter setting ˘
8 Configuration 2 Configuration
8.1 Description of the function blocks 2.1 Configuration with Global Drive
Diameter calculator (DCALC) Control
Digital frequency input (DFIN)
Digital frequency output (DFOUT) 2.2 Basic configurations
Digital frequency ramp function
generator (DFRFG) 2.3 How to use function blocks
Digital frequency processing 2.4 Function blocks
(DFSET)
(description of the other function
Internal motor control with V/f blocks)
characteristic control (MCTRL1)
Internal motor control with vector 2.5 Monitoring
control (MCTRL2)
8.2 Code table
8.3 Selection lists
8.4 Table of attributes
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination ˘
10 DC−bus operation ˘
11 Safety engineering ˘
12 Braking operation ˘
˘ 3 Application examples
˘ 4 Signal flow diagrams
13 Accessories ˘
14 Appendix 5 Appendix
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.1−1

1 Preface and general information

1.1.2 Document history
How to find information Use the System Manual as the basis. It contains references to the
corresponding chapters in the System Manual Supplement:
ƒ Each chapter is a complete unit and comprehensively informs about a
subject.
ƒ The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about
a certain topic.
ƒ Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (Drive PLC, Lenze geared
motors, Lenze motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding catalogs,
Operating Instructions and manuals. The required documentation can
be ordered at your Lenze sales partner or downloaded as PDF file from
the Internet.
Tip!
Documentation and software updates for further Lenze products
can be found on the Internet in the "Services & Downloads" area
under
http://www.Lenze.com
1.1.2 Document history
What is new / what has Material number Version Description

changed?
.A># 6.0 12/2009 TD19 Error corrections.
13260707 5.0 08/2008 TD23 Revision for software version 8.0 and error
corrections.
13154762 3.0 09/2006 TD23 Complete revision for software version 7.0.
The System Manual also comprises the
System Manual (extension), document no.
EDSVF9383V−EXT.
00476715 1.0 10/2003 TD23 Documentation for hardware version 1.x
and software version 6.x.
1.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


How to use this System Manual 1.1
Products to which the System Manual applies 1.1.3
1.1.3 Products to which the System Manual applies
This documentation applies to 9300 frequency inverters as of version:

Nameplate
EVF 93xx ˘ E V Vxxx 1x 8x
Controller type
EVF Frequency inverter
Type no. / power

400 V 500 V
9335 110 kW 132 kW
9336 132 kW 160 kW
9337 162 kW 200 kW
9338 200 kW 250 kW
L
H a n s - L e n z e - St r a s s e 1
D-31855 Aerzen
Made in EC
Inverter
Design Id.-No.:

Prod.-No.: Ser.-No.:
E Built−in unit Type:
Input:
Output:
Version 0045042000129567000005
V Vector−controlled frequency inverter 33.9335VE.1A.70

33 . 9335VE . 1A . 70 . V030
Variant Integrated RFI filter A

Integrated brake
transistor
– 400 V – –
V030 400 V · –
V060 400 V – ·
V110 400 V · ·
V210 400 V / 500 V – –
V240 400 V / 500 V · –
V270 400 V / 500 V – ·
V300 400 V / 500 V · ·
Hardware version
Software version
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.1−3


1.1.3 Products to which the System Manual applies
Nameplate
EVF 93xx ˘ E V Vxxx 1x 8x
Product series
EVF Frequency inverter
EVM... EVL...
EVM: Master of EVF
EVL: Slave of EVF
Type no. / power

400 V 500 V
0
1 1
9381 250 kW 315 kW
9382 315 kW 400 kW
9383 400 kW 500 kW 0
L
D-31855 Aerzen

Made in EC
Inverter
Type Type: EVF
Master Slave
E Built−in unit EVM EVL
Input:
Output:
Design
V Vector−controlled frequency inverter 1
X: Slave L
D-31855 Aerzen
Made in EC
Inverter
Id.-No.:
Variant Integrated RFI filter A Prod.-No.:
Type:
Ser.-No.:

Integrated brake Input:
Output:
transistor
0045042000129567000005
33.9335VE.1A.70
33 . 9335VE . 1A . 70 . V030
– 400 V – –
V030 400 V · –
V060 400 V – ·
V110 400 V · ·
V210 400 V / 500 V – –
V240 400 V / 500 V · –
V270 400 V / 500 V – ·
V300 400 V / 500 V · ·
Hardware version
Software version
– Slave (no software version)
1.1−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Legal regulations 1.2
1.2 Legal regulations
Labelling Lenze controllers are unambiguously designated by the contents of the

nameplate.
Manufacturer Lenze Automation GmbH, Grünstraße 36, D−40667 Meerbusch, Germany
CE conformity Conforms to the EC Low−Voltage Directive
Application as directed 9300 vector frequency inverter and accessories

ƒ must only be operated under the conditions prescribed in this System
Manual.
ƒ are components
– for open and closed loop control of variable speed drives with
asynchronous standard motor or asynchronous servo motors
– for installation in a machine
– for assembly with other components to form a machine.
ƒ comply with the requirements of the Low−Voltage Directive.
ƒ are not machines for the purpose of the Machinery Directive.
ƒ are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial
purposes.
Drives with 9300 vector frequency inverters
ƒ comply with the EMC Directive if they are installed according to the
guidelines of CE−typical drive systems.
ƒ can be used
– for operation on public and non−public mains
– for operation in industrial premises and residential areas.
ƒ The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the
EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed as inappropriate!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.2−1


1.2 Legal regulations
Liability The information, data, and notes in this System Manual met the state of the
art at the time of printing. Claims on modifications referring to controllers
and components which have already been supplied cannot be derived from
the information, illustrations, and descriptions.
The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in this System Manual
are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific application.
Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and circuit
proposals.
The specifications in this System Manual describe the product features
without guaranteeing them.
Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference
caused by:
ƒ Disregarding the System Manual
ƒ Unauthorised modifications to the controller
ƒ Operating errors
ƒ Improper working on and with the controller
Warranty See terms of sales and delivery of the Lenze Automation GmbH.
Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the
deficiency or fault.
The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
1.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Conventions used 1.3
1.3 Conventions used
This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between

different types of information:
Type of information Identification Examples/notes
Spelling of numbers
Decimal separator language−depen In each case, the signs typical for
dent the target language are used as
decimal separators.
For example: 1234.56 or 1234,56
Warnings
UL warnings
Are only given in English.
UR warnings
Text
Program name »« PC software
For example: »Engineer«
Icons
Page reference Reference to another page with
additional information
For instance: 16 = see page 16
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.3−1


Notes used 1.4
1.4 Notes used
The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation
to indicate dangers and important information:
Safety instructions Structure of safety instructions:
Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to
prevent dangerous situations)
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous

electrical voltage.
Danger! Reference to an imminent danger that may result in
death or serious personal injury if the corresponding
measures are not taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of

danger.
Danger! Reference to an imminent danger that may result in
death or serious personal injury if the corresponding
measures are not taken.
Danger of property damage.
Reference to a possible danger that may result in
Stop! property damage if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Application notes Pictograph and signal word Meaning
Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation
Tip! Useful tip for simple handling
Reference to another documentation
Special safety instructions Pictograph and signal word Meaning

and application notes for UL
and UR Safety or application note for the operation of a

UL−approved device in UL−approved systems.
Warnings! Possibly the drive system is not operated in
compliance with UL if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Safety or application note for the operation of a

UR−approved device in UL−approved systems.
Warnings! Possibly the drive system is not operated in
compliance with UL if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.4−1

Safety instructions 2
Contents
2 Safety instructions
Contents
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . 2.1−1
2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors . . . . . . 2.2−1
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 2−1

General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers 2.1
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers
(in accordance with Low−Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC)
For your personal safety Disregarding the following safety measures can lead to severe injury to
persons and damage to material:
ƒ Only use the product as directed.
ƒ Never commission the product in the event of visible damage.
ƒ Never commission the product before assembly has been completed.
ƒ Do not carry out any technical changes on the product.
ƒ Only use the accessories approved for the product.
ƒ Only use original spare parts from Lenze.
ƒ Observe all regulations for the prevention of accidents, directives and
laws applicable on site.
ƒ Transport, installation, commissioning and maintenance work must
only be carried out by qualified personnel.
– Observe IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC
report 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and all national regulations for the
prevention of accidents.
– According to the basic safety information, qualified, skilled personnel
are persons who are familiar with the assembly, installation,
commissioning, and operation of the product and who have the
qualifications necessary for their occupation.
ƒ Observe all specifications in this documentation.
– This is the condition for safe and trouble−free operation and the
achievement of the specified product features.
– The procedural notes and circuit details described in this
documentation are only proposals. It is up to the user to check
whether they can be transferred to the particular applications. Lenze
Automation GmbH does not accept any liability for the suitability of
the procedures and circuit proposals described.
ƒ Lenze controllers (frequency inverters, servo inverters, DC speed
controllers) and the accessory components can include live and
rotating parts − depending on their type of protection − during
operation. Surfaces can be hot.
– Non−authorised removal of the required cover, inappropriate use,
incorrect installation or operation create the risk of severe injury to
persons or damage to material assets.
– For more information, please see the documentation.
ƒ High amounts of energy are produced in the controller. Therefore it is
required to wear personal protective equipment (body protection,
headgear, eye protection, ear protection, hand guard).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 2.1−1

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers
Application as directed Controllers are components which are designed for installation in electrical
systems or machines. They are not to be used as domestic appliances, but
only for industrial purposes according to EN 61000−3−2.
When controllers are installed into machines, commissioning (i.e. starting of
the operation as directed) is prohibited until it is proven that the machine
complies with the regulations of the EC Directive 98/37/EC (Machinery
Directive); EN 60204 must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of the operation as directed) is only allowed
when there is compliance with the EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
The controllers meet the requirements of the Low−Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC. The harmonised standard EN 61800−5−1 applies to the
controllers.
The technical data and supply conditions can be obtained from the
nameplate and the documentation. They must be strictly observed.
Warning: Controllers are products which can be installed in drive systems of
category C2 according to EN 61800−3. These products can cause radio
interferences in residential areas. In this case, special measures can be
necessary.
Transport, storage Please observe the notes on transport, storage, and appropriate handling.
Observe the climatic conditions according to the technical data.
Installation The controllers must be installed and cooled according to the instructions
given in the corresponding documentation.
The ambient air must not exceed degree of pollution 2 according to
EN 61800−5−1.
Ensure proper handling and avoid excessive mechanical stress. Do not bend
any components and do not change any insulation distances during
transport or handling. Do not touch any electronic components and
contacts.
Controllers contain electrostatically sensitive devices which can easily be
damaged by inappropriate handling. Do not damage or destroy any
electrical components since this might endanger your health!
2.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers 2.1
Electrical connection When working on live controllers, observe the applicable national
regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4).
The electrical installation must be carried out according to the appropriate
regulations (e.g. cable cross−sections, fuses, PE connection). Additional
information can be obtained from the documentation.
The documentation contains information on the installation according to
EMC (shielding, earthing, arrangement of filters, and installation of the
cables). Also observe this information with regard to drive controllers
labelled with CE marking. The manufacturer of the system or machine is
responsible for the compliance of the limit values required in connection
with EMC legislation. In order to observe the limit values for radio
interference emissions effective at the installation site, you have to mount
the drive controllers into housings (e. g. control cabinets). The housings have
to enable an EMC−compliant structure. Particularly observe that, for
instance, control cabinet doors preferably are metallically connected to the
housing in a circumferential manner. Reduce openings or apertures through
the housing to a minimum.
Lenze controllers can cause a DC current in the PE conductor. If a residual
current device (RCD) is used for the protection in the case of direct or indirect
contact on a three−phase supplied controller, only one residual current
device of type B is permissible on the current supply side of the controller. If
the controller is supplied with one phase, also a residual current device (RCD)
of type A may be used. Apart from the use of a residual current device (RCD)
also other protective measures can be used, like for instance isolation from
the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the
supply system by a transformer.
Operation If necessary, systems including controllers must be equipped with additional
monitoring and protection devices according to the valid safety regulations
(e.g. law on technical equipment, regulations for the prevention of
accidents). The controllers can be adapted to your application. Please
observe the corresponding information given in the documentation.
After the controller has been disconnected from the supply voltage, all live
components and power connections must not be touched immediately
because capacitors can still be charged. Please observe the corresponding
stickers on the controller.
All protection covers and doors must be shut during operation.
Notes for UL−approved systems with integrated controllers: UL warnings are
notes that only apply to UL systems. The documentation contains special UL
notes.
Safety functions Special controller variants support safety functions (e.g. "safe torque off",
formerly "safe standstill") according to the requirements of appendix I
No. 1.2.7 of the EC Directive "Machinery" 98/37/EC, EN 954−1 category 3 and
EN 1037. Strictly observe the notes on the safety functions given in the
documentation on the respective variants.
Maintenance and servicing The controllers do not require any maintenance if the prescribed operating
conditions are observed.
Disposal Recycle metals and plastics. Dispose of printed circuit board assemblies
according to the state of the art.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in these instructions
must be observed!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 2.1−3

General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors 2.2
2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors
(According to: Low−Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC)
General Low−voltage machines have hazardous live and rotating parts and possibly
also hot surfaces.
Synchronous machines induce voltages at open terminals during operation.
All operations concerning transport, connections, commissioning and
maintenance must be carried out by qualified, skilled personnel (EN 50110−1
(VDE 0105−100) and IEC 60364 must be observed). Inappropriate use creates
the risk of severe injury to persons and damage to material assets.
Low−voltage machines may only be operated under the conditions that are
indicated in the section "Application as directed".
The conditions at the place of installation must comply with the data given
on the nameplate and in the documentation.
Application as directed Low−voltage machines are intended for commercial installations. They
comply with the harmonised standards of the series EN60034 (VDE 0530).
Their use in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited unless they are
expressly intended for such use (follow additional instructions).
Low−voltage machines are components for installation into machines as
defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. Commissioning is
prohibited until the conformity of the end product with this directive has
been established (follow i.a. EN 60204−1)
Low−voltage machines with IP23 protection or less are only intended for
outdoor use when applying special protective features.
The integrated brakes must not be used as safety brakes. It cannot be ruled
out that factors which cannot be influenced, such as oil ingress due to a
defective A−side shaft seal, cause a brake torque reduction.
Transport, storage Damages must be reported immediately upon receipt to the forwarder; if
required, commissioning must be excluded. Tighten screwed−in ring bolts
before transport. They are designed for the weight of the low−voltage
machines, do not apply extra loads. If necessary, use suitable and adequately
dimensioned means of transport (e. g. rope guides).
Remove transport locking devices before commissioning. Reuse them for
further transport. When storing low−voltage machines, ensure a dry,
dust−free and low−vibration (veff £ 0.2 mm/s) environment (damages while
being stored).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 2.2−1

2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors
Installation Ensure an even surface, solid foot and flange mounting and exact alignment
if a direct clutch is connected. Avoid resonances with the rotational
frequency and double mains frequency which may be caused by the
assembly. Turn rotor by hand, listen for unusual slipping noises. Check the
direction of rotation when the clutch is not active (observe section "Electrical
connection").
Use appropriate means to mount or remove belt pulleys and clutches
(heating) and cover them with a touch guard. Avoid impermissible belt
tensions.
The machines are half−key balanced. The clutch must be half−key balanced,
too. The visible jutting out part of the key must be removed.
If required, provide pipe connections. Designs with shaft end at bottom must
be protected with a cover which prevents the ingress of foreign particles into
the fan. Free circulation of the cooling air must be ensured. The exhaust air
− also the exhaust air of other machines next to the drive system − must not
be taken in immediately.
Electrical connection All operations must only be carried out by qualified and skilled personnel on
the low−voltage machine at standstill and deenergised and provided with a
safe guard to prevent an unintentional restart.This also applies to auxiliary
circuits (e. g. brake, encoder, blower).
Check safe isolation from supply!
If the tolerances specified in EN 60034−1; IEC 34 (VDE 0530−1) − voltage ±5 %,
frequency ±2 %, waveform, symmetry − are exceeded, more heat will be
generated and the electromagnetic compatibility will be affected.
Observe the data on the nameplate, operating notes, and the connection
diagram in the terminal box.
The connection must ensure a continuous and safe electrical supply (no
loose wire ends); use appropriate cable terminals. The connection to the PE
conductor must be safe. The plug−in connector must be bolt tightly (to stop).
The clearances between blank, live parts and to earth must not fall below
8 mm at Ur £ 550 V, 10 mm at Ur £ 725 V, 14 mm at Ur £ 1000 V.
The terminal box must be free of foreign particles, dirt and moisture. All
unused cable entries and the box itself must be sealed against dust and
water.
2.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors 2.2
Commissioning and operation Before commissioning after longer storage periods, measure the insulation
resistance. In case of values £ 1 kW per volt of rated voltage, dry winding.
For trial run without output elements, lock the featherkey. Do not deactivate
the protective devices, not even in a trial run.
Check the correct operation of the brake before commissioning low−voltage
machines with brakes.
Integrated thermal detectors do not provide full protection for the machine.
If necessary, limit the maximum current. Parameterise the controller so that
the motor will be switched off with I > Ir after a few seconds of operation.
especially at the risk of blocking.
Vibrational severities veff £ 3.5 mm/s (Pr £ 15 kW) or 4.5 mm/s (Pr > 15 kW)
are acceptable if the clutch is activated.
If deviations from normal operation occur, e.g. increased temperatures,
noises, vibrations, find the cause and, if required, contact the manufacturer.
In case of doubt, switch off the low−voltage machine.
If the machine is exposed to dirt, clean the air channels regularly.
Shaft sealing rings and roller bearings have a limited service life.
Regrease bearings with relubricating devices while the low−voltage machine
is running. Only use the grease recommended by the manufacturer. If the
grease drain holes are sealed with a plug, (IP54 drive end; IP23 drive and
non−drive end), remove plug before commissioning. Seal bore holes with
grease. Replace prelubricated bearings (2Z bearing) after approx.
10,000 h − 20,000 h, at the latest however after 3 − 4 years.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in these instructions
must be observed!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 2.2−3

Residual hazards 2.3
2.3 Residual hazards
Protection of persons ƒ Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied to
the power terminals:
– The power terminals U, V, W, +UG, −UG, BR1, BR2 and 101 ... 104
remain live for at least five minutes after disconnecting from the
mains.
– The power terminals L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, +UG, −UG, BR1, BR2 and
101 ... 104 remain live when the motor is stopped.
ƒ The leakage current to earth (PE) is >3.5 mA. EN 50178 requires a fixed
installation.
ƒ The heatsink of the controller has an operating temperature of > 80 °C:
– Direct skin contact causes burns.
ƒ During the parameter set transfer, the control terminals of the
controller can assume undefined states.
– For this reason, the connectors X5 and X6 have to be unplugged
before the transfer is executed. This ensures that the controller is
inhibited and all control terminals are in the defined state LOW".
Device protection ƒ Frequent mains switching (e.g. inching mode via mains contactor) can
overload and destroy the input current limitation of the controller.
– Thus, at least five minutes have to pass between two switch−on
processes.
– In case of frequent, safety−related disconnections use the
"safe torque off" safety function (STO).
Motor protection ƒ Certain drive controller settings can overheat the connected motor:
– E. g. long−time operation of the DC injection brake.
– Long−time operation of self−ventilated motors at low speeds.
Protection of the ƒ Drives can reach dangerous overspeeds (e. g. setting of high output
machine/system
frequencies in connection with motors and machines not suitable for
this purpose):
– The drive controllers do not provide protection against such
operating conditions. For this purpose, use additional components.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 2.3−1

Technical data 3
Contents
3 Technical data
Contents
3.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1−1

3.2 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2−1
3.3 Open and closed−loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3−1
3.4 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4−1
3.5 Rated data (devices in 400V design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5−1
3.6 Rated data (devices for 400/500V mains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6−1
3.6.1 Rated data for 400 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6−1
3.6.2 Rated data for 500 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6−2
3.7.1 Mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−1
3.7.2 DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−2
3.7.3 Notes for mains and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7−3
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3−1

Technical data 3
General data and operating conditions 3.1
3.1 General data and operating conditions
General data Conformity and approval

Conformity
CE 2006/95/EC Low−Voltage Directive
Protection of persons and equipment

Type of protection EN 60529 IP20
NEMA 250 Protection against accidental contact according to
type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA Observe stipulations and
safety instructions!
Insulation of control IEC/EN 61800−5−1 Safe mains isolation by double (reinforced)
circuits insulation for the terminals X1 and X5.
Basic insulation (single isolating distance) for the
terminals X3, X4, X6, X8, X9, X10 and X11.
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II
Protective measures Against short circuit, earth fault (earth−fault
protected during operation, limited earth−fault
protection during mains power−up), overvoltage,
motor stalling, motor overtemperature (input for
PTC or thermal contact)
EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Cable−guided, up to 50 m motor cable length with
RFI filter: Category C2.
Radiation, with RFI filter and installation in control
cabinet: Category C2
Interference IEC/EN 61800−3 Category C3
immunity
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.1−1

3 Technical data
3.1 General data and operating conditions
Operating conditions Ambient conditions

Climatic
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−20 ... +60 °C) < 6 months
1K3 (−25 ... +40 °C) > 6 months
> 2 years: form DC bus
capacitors
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3
EVF9335 3K3 (0 ... +50 °C)
EVF9336 ... 3K3 (0 ... +50 °C)
EVF9338 > +40 °C: reduce the rated output current by
EVF9381 ... 2.5 %/°C.
EVF9383
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Site altitude < 4000 m amsl
> 1000 m amsl: reduce the rated output current by
5 %/ 1000 m.
Internal fan 975 m3/h volume flow
Mechanical
Vibration resistance EN 50178
Electrical
Mains connection
Power system
TT, TN
(with earthed Operation is permitted without restrictions.
neutral)
DC−bus operation Possible for the variants V210, V240, V270, V300
Motor connection
Length of the At rated mains voltage and a switching frequency
motor cable of £ 2 kHz without additional output filter.
For compliance with EMC regulations, the
permissible cable lengths may change.
shielded 100 m
unshielded 200 m
Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertical
Free spaces 4−1
Dimensions
Weights
3.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007

Technical data 3
Weights 3.2
3.2 Weights
9300 Without RFI filter A With integrated RFI filter A

Type [kg] [kg]
EVF9335−EV 160 175
EVF9336−EV 160 175
EVF9337−EV 160 175
EVF9338−EV 200 215
EVF9381−EV 320 350
EVF9382−EV 320 350
EVF9383−EV 400 430
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.2−1

Technical data 3
Open and closed−loop control 3.3
3.3 Open and closed−loop control
Field Values
Control methods V/f characteristic control (linear, square), vector control
Switching frequency 1 kHz, 2 kHz or 4 kHz
Torque behaviour in case of vector
control
Maximum torque 1.5 × Mr for 60 s if rated motor power = rated 9300 vector power
Setting range to 1:10 in the range of 6 ... 100 % fr
(1 : 20 with feedback)
Speed control without feedback
Min. mechanical motor frequency 1 % fr Torque 0 ... MN
Setting range 1 : 100 relating to fr and Mr
Accuracy ± 0.5 % fN in the range of 6 ... 100 % fN
Speed control without feedback
Min. mechanical motor frequency 0.1 % fN Torque 0 ... MN
Setting range 1 : 1000 relating to fr and Mr
Accuracy ± 0.1 % of fr
Output frequency
Field − 300 Hz ... + 300 Hz
Absolute resolution 0.06 Hz
Standardised resolution Parameter data: 0.01 %,
Process data: 0.006 % (= 214)
Digital setpoint selection
Accuracy ± 0.005 Hz (= ± 100 ppm)
Analog setpoint selection
Linearity ± 0.15 % signal level: 5 V or 10 V
Temperature sensitivity ± 0.1 % 0 ... 50 Nm
Offset ± 0.1 %
Analog inputs/outputs l 2 inputs (bipolar)
l 2 outputs (bipolar)
Digital inputs/outputs l 6 inputs (freely assignable)
l 1 input for controller inhibit
l 4 outputs freely assignable)
l 1 incremental encoder input (500 kHz, TTL level); Design: 9−pole Sub−D socket
l 1 digital frequency input (500 kHz, TTL level or 200 kHz, HTL level); type: 9−pole Sub−D
socket; can be alternatively used as incremental encoder input (200 kHz, HTL level)
l 1 master frequency output (500 kHz, TTL level); Design: 9−pole Sub−D socket
Cycle times
Digital inputs 1 ms
Digital outputs 1 ms
Analog inputs 1 ms
Analog outputs 1 ms (smoothing time: tt = 2 ms)
Operation in generator mode Integrated brake transistor (optional)
fr rated motor frequency
Mr rated motor torque
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.3−1

Technical data 3
Safety relay KSR 3.4
3.4 Safety relay KSR
Terminal Description Field Values

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Coil voltage at +20 °C DC 24 V (20 ... 30 V)
X11/K31 1st disconnecting path Coil resistance at +20 °C 823 W ±10 %
X11/33
X11/34 Rated coil power Approx. 700 mW
Max. switching voltage AC 250 V, DC 250 V (0.45 A)
Max. AC switching capacity 1500 VA
Max. switching current (ohmic load) AC 6 A (250 V), DC 6 A (50 V)
Recommended minimum load > 50 mW
Max. switching rate 6 switchings per minute
Mechanical service life 107 switching cycles
Electrical service life
at 250 V AC 105 switching cycles at 6 A
(ohmic load) 106 switching cycles at 1 A
107 switching cycles at 0.25 A
at 24 V DC 6 × 103 switching cycles at 6 A
1.5 × 106 switching cycles at 1 A
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.4−1

Technical data 3
Rated data (devices in 400V design) 3.5
3.5 Rated data (devices in 400V design)
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE AC 400 V [UN] 340 V − 0 % ... 456 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
DC (alternatively) [UDC] Not possible
Output voltage [UOUT] 3 ~ 0 ... UN 0 ... 300 Hz
9300 Mains current 1) Typical motor power Power loss

ASM (4−pole)
Type Ir [A] PN [kW] PN [hp] PV [kW]
EVF9335−EV 150 2.8
200 110
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2)
EVF9336−EV 238 132 200 3.3
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2)
EVF9337−EV 285 160 250 4.0
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2)
EVF9338−EV 356 200 300 5.0
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2)
EVF9381−EV
475 250 350 6.6
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2)
EVF9382−EV
570 315 450 8.0
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2)
EVF9383−EV
713 400 550 10.0
EVF9384−EVVxxx 2)
The currents for EVF9381 ... EVF9383 are to be considered as total currents of master and slave
1) For a controller switching frequency of 2 kHz
2) Device in variant V030, V060 or V110
9300 Output currents

Rated current Maximum current 2)
1 kHz 1) 2 kHz 1) 4 kHz 1) 1 kHz 1) 2 kHz 1) 4 kHz 1)
Type IN1 [A] IN2 [A] IN4 [A] IM1 [A] IM2 [A] IM4 [A]
EVF9335−EV
210 210 210 315 315 315
EVF9335−EVVxxx 3)
EVF9336−EV
250 250 250 375 375 375
EVF9336−EVVxxx 3)
EVF9337−EV
300 300 270 450 450 405
EVF9337−EVVxxx 3)
EVF9338−EV
375 375 330 560 560 495
EVF9338−EVVxxx 3)
EVF9381−EV
500 500 500 750 750 750
EVF9381−EVVxxx 3)
EVF9382−EV
600 600 540 900 900 810
EVF9382−EVVxxx 3)
EVF9383−EV
750 750 660 1125 1125 990
EVF9384−EVVxxx 3)
Bold print = Lenze setting
1) Switching frequency of the inverter
2) The currents apply to a periodic load change with an overcurrent time of 1 minute at a maximum
and a base load time of 2 minutes with maximally 75 % INx
3) Device in variant V030, V060 or V110
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.5−1

Technical data 3
Rated data (devices for 400/500V mains) 3.6
Rated data for 400 V mains voltage 3.6.1
3.6 Rated data (devices for 400/500V mains)
Note!
Types EVF9335 ... EVF9383 for 400 V/500 V mains voltage are
suitable for DC supply or DC−bus operation together with
controllers of the 9300 series.
3.6.1 Rated data for 400 V mains voltage
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE AC 400 V [UN] 340 V − 0 % ... 577 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
DC 565 V (alternatively) [UDC] DC 480 V − 0 % ... 800 V + 0 % ˘

ASM (4−pole)
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2) 200 110 150 2.8
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2) 238 132 200 3.3
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2) 285 160 250 4.0
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2) 356 200 300 5.0
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2) 475 250 350 6.6
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2) 570 315 450 8.0
EVF9384−EVVxxx 2) 713 400 550 10.0
2) Device in variant V210, V240, V270 or V300

EVF9335−EVVxxx 3) 210 210 210 315 315 315
EVF9336−EVVxxx 3) 250 250 250 375 375 375
EVF9337−EVVxxx 3) 300 300 270 450 450 405
EVF9338−EVVxxx 3) 375 375 330 560 560 495
EVF9381−EVVxxx 3) 500 500 500 750 750 750
EVF9382−EVVxxx 3) 600 600 540 900 900 810
EVF9384−EVVxxx 3) 750 750 660 1125 1125 990
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.6−1

3 Technical data
3.6 Rated data (devices for 400/500V mains)
Basis of the data

Voltage Frequency
Supply
3/PE AC 500 V [UN] 340 V − 0 % ... 577 V + 0 % 45 Hz − 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
DC 705 V (alternatively) [UDC] DC 480 V − 0 % ... 800 V + 0 % ˘

ASM (4−pole)
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2) 200 132 200 3.0
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2) 238 160 250 3.5
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2) 285 200 300 4.3
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2) 356 250 350 5.3
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2) 475 315 450 7.0
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2) 570 400 550 8.6
EVF9383−EVVxxx 2) 713 500 ??? 700 ??? 10.6

EVF9335−EVVxxx 3) 210 210 210 315 315 315
EVF9336−EVVxxx 3) 250 250 250 375 375 375
EVF9337−EVVxxx 3) 300 300 270 450 450 405
EVF9338−EVVxxx 3) 375 375 330 560 560 495
EVF9381−EVVxxx 3) 500 500 500 750 750 750
EVF9382−EVVxxx 3) 600 600 540 900 900 810
EVF9384−EVVxxx 3) 750 750 660 1125 1125 990
3.6−2 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007

Technical data 3
Fuses and cable cross−sections 3.7
Mains supply 3.7.1
3.7 Fuses and cable cross−sections
Information about fuses and Field Description

cable cross−sections
Fuses and cable cross−sections All information given in this chapter are recommendations.
They refer to
l controllers installed in control cabinets.
l cables with a distance to the wall which is at least as wide
as the cable cross−section.
l a max. ambient temperature of +40 °C.
Selection of the cable Consider the voltage drop under load (£ 3 % acc. to
cross−section DIN 18015 part 1) for the selection.
Protection of the cables on the On the AC side, the cables are protected by means of common
AC side (L1, L2, L3) fuses.
Fuses in UL−conform plant must have UL approval.
Protection of the cables on the It is not necessary to fuse the motor cable.
motor side (U, V, W)
Further information In the chapter "Wiring the basic device" ® "Important notes"
® "Device protection"
Standards and regulations The user is responsible for the compliance with national and
regional standards and regulations (e.g. VDE 0113, VDE 0298,
EN 60204).
3.7.1 Mains supply
For fusing the mains supply you can use the following fuses (gRL) and cable
cross−sections:
9300 vector Installation in accordance with EN 60204−1
Fuse Cable cross−sections
L1, L2, L3 PE
Type [A] [mm2] [mm2]
EVF9335−EV 150
250 95
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9336−EV 150
315 95
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9337−EV 150
315 95
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9338−EV 240
400 150
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1)
Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave
EVF9381−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9383−EV 240 240
400 400 150 150
EVF9383−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
1) Multiple conductor; both conductors must have the same cross−section
Note!
We recommend to use semiconductor fuses (gRL).
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.7−1

3 Technical data
3.7.2 DC supply
3.7.2 DC supply
A DC supply is only possible for the variants V210, V240, V270, V300.
Stop!
ƒ Only use semiconductor fuses (gRL).
ƒ On principle, fuse DC cables as 2−pole (+UG, −UG).

+UG, −UG PE
EVF9335−EVV2xx 150
315 95
EVF9335−EVV300 2 × 50 1)
350 95
EVF9336−EVV300 2 × 50 1)
400 95
EVF9337−EVV300 2 × 95 1)
500 150
EVF9338−EVV300 2 × 95 1)
EVF9381−EVV2xx 150 150
350 350 95 95
EVF9381−EVV300 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EVV2xx 240 240
400 400 95 95
EVF9382−EVV300 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
EVF9383−EVV2xx 240 240
500 500 150 150
EVF9383−EVV300 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
3.7−2 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007

Technical data 3
Notes for mains and motor cables 3.7.3
3.7.3 Notes for mains and motor cables
Danger!
Observe all national and regional regulations for the cables.
You can use single and multi−core cables. If a cable consists of several cores
per phase, it can be necessary to connect the controller by means of common
cable glands.
Maximum cable cross−section for power connections (screw terminals):
9300 vector Maximum cable cross−section
L1, L2, L3 +UG, −UG PE
U, V, W, BR1, BR2
Type [mm2] [mm2] [mm2]
EVF9335−EV 150 150
95
EVF9335−EVxxx (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 50) 1)
EVF9336−EV 150 150
95
EVF9336−EVxxx (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 50) 1)
EVF9337−EV 150 240
95
EVF9337−EVxxx (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 95) 1)
EVF9338−EV 240 240
150
EVF9338−EVxxx (2 × 95) 1) (2 × 95) 1)
EVF9381−EV 150 150 150 150
95 95
EVF9381−EVxxx (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 50) 1)
EVF9382−EV 150 150 240 240
95 95
EVF9382−EVxxx (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 50) 1) (2 × 95) 1) (2 × 95) 1)
EVF9383−EV 240 240 240 240
150 150
EVF9383−EVxxx (2 × 95) 1) (2 × 95) 1) (2 × 95) 1) (2 × 95) 1)
The effectively required cable cross−section depends e.g. on the application

and environmental conditions and the cable type used. It is not required that
mains and motor cable have the same cable cross−section.
Mains cable, DC cable It is not necessary to shield the mains cable. In DC−bus operation or with DC
supply we recommend shielded cables.
Motor cable It is not necessary to fuse the motor cable. For EMC reasons we recommend
shielded motor cables. You can use common metal clamps to connect the
shield.
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−11/2007 3.7−3

Installing of the standard device 4

Contents
4 Installation of the standard device
Contents
4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1−1

4.2.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2−1
4.3.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 4−1


Important notes 4.1
4.1 Important notes
Transport ƒ Manual lifting is only permitted up to the following weight limitations:

– max. 30 kg [max. 66 lbs] for men
– max. 10 kg [max. 22 lbs] for women
– max. 5 kg [max. 11 lbs] for pregnant women
Above these limits, use appropriate hoists or conveyors! Weights of the
devices: ( 3.2−1)
ƒ For transport with hoists, observe the following basic rules:
– The payload of the hoists and load handling devices at least has to
correspond to the weight of the device. Weight of the devices:
( 3.2−1)
– Secure the device so that it cannot topple over or fall down.
– Stay out from suspended loads!
– Avoid heavy impacts during transport.
ƒ The devices are equipped with an eye bolt. The load hook can be
attached directly to the eye bolt.
ƒ Alternatively the devices can be transported with lifting straps.
– Attach the lifting straps so that the device is balanced and cannot slip
from the lifting straps.
Mounting ƒ Controller must only be used as built−in unit.
ƒ Possible mounting position: Vertically at the rear panel of the control
cabinet.
ƒ Observe free mounting spaces.
ƒ Do not exceed the permissible operating and ambient temperatures:
– Please ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air.
– If the cooling air contains pollutants (dust, lint, grease, aggressive
gases), which may impair the function of the controller take
measures against it, such as separate air flow, filters, regular
cleaning, etc..
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 4.1−1


Basic devices in the power range 110 ... 200 kW 4.2
Dimensions 4.2.1
4.2 Basic devices in the power range 110 ... 200 kW
Tip!
ƒ Lenze recommends to install an air lock. It serves to dissipate
the heated cooling air directly from the control cabinet.
– Order no. E93ZWL
ƒ A drilling jig for marking the bore holes is available as dxf−file
on the Internet in the "Download" area under www.Lenze.de.
4.2.1 Dimensions
a
a1
a2 c
0 0
b2 d
b b1
9300VEC002
Fig. 4.2−1 Dimensions

Eyebolts
Type a a1 a2 b b1 b2 c d
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
EVF9335−EV
EVF9335−EVVxxx
EVF9336−EV
EVF9336−EVVxxx 9
500 450 225 1145 1005 15 436
EVF9337−EV (8×)
EVF9337−EVVxxx
EVF9338−EV
EVF9338−EVVxxx
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 4.2−1

4 Installing of the standard device

4.2.2 Drilling the holes into the mounting plate
Assembly space Minimum clearance

Left/right of other controllers 30 mm
Left/right of a non−heat−conducting wall 100 mm
Top/bottom 200 mm
Comply with the clearances given to ensure a sufficient cooling of the

controller. When using an air lock, different clearances apply (see Mounting
Instructions for the air lock).
a1
a2
a3
a2
a1
93vec048
Fig. 4.2−2 Bore holes in the mounting plate for fixing the controller
a1 a2 a3 b d
450 mm 340 mm 225 mm 1005 mm 9 mm (12x)
1. Mark the bore holes on the mounting plate according to the figure.
2. Drill the holes into the mounting plate.
4.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Fasten the mounting rails on the mounting plate 4.2.3
4.2.3 Fasten the mounting rails on the mounting plate
2
3
0
0
3
2
93vec071
Fig. 4.2−3 Fastening the mounting rails on the mounting plate

Mounting rail
Mounting plate
Hexagon socket screw M8 × 25 mm
Spring washer M8
1. Hold the mounting rails behind the mounting plate.

2. Fasten the mounting rails exactly at the illustrated points using 2
hexagon socket screws and spring washers on each side.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 4.2−3


4.2.4 Fasten controller on mounting plate
Danger!
Risk of injury due to the high weight of the controller.
The controller has to be carried using the eyebolts and an
adequate lifting tool.
0 3
4
1
4
3
2
9300vec070
Fig. 4.2−4 Fastening the controller on mounting plate

Eye bolts 8 hexagon socket screws M8 × 25 mm
Controller 8 spring washers M8
Mounting plate
1. Put the controller on the mounting plate.

2. Fasten the controller exactly at the illustrated points using 5 hexagon
socket screws and spring washers at the top and 3 hexagon socket
screws and spring washers at the bottom.
4.2−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Dimensions 4.3.1
Tip!
ƒ Lenze recommends to install an air lock. The air lock serves to
dissipate the heated cooling air directly from the control
cabinet.
– Order no. E93ZWL2
ƒ A drilling jig for marking the bore holes is available as dxf−file
in the Internet in the "Download" area under www.Lenze.de.
4.3.1 Dimensions
a
a1
a2 a3 c
0 0 0
b2 d
b b1
9300VEC039
Fig. 4.3−1 Dimensions

Eyebolts
Type a a1 a2 a3 b b1 b2 c d
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
EVF9381−EV
EVF9381−EVVxxx
EVF9382−EV 9
1050 450 225 50 1145 1005 15 436
EVF9382−EVVxxx (16×)
EVF9383−EV
EVF9383−EVVxxx
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 4.3−1


Assembly space Minimum clearance

Left/right of other controllers 30 mm
Left/right of a non−heat−conducting wall 100 mm
Top/bottom 200 mm
Comply with the clearances given to ensure a sufficient cooling of the

controller. When using an air lock, different clearances apply (see Mounting
Instructions for the air lock).
a
a1 a1
a2 a2
a3 a3
a2 a2
a1 a1
93vec079
Fig. 4.3−2 Bore holes in the mounting plate for fixing the controller
a a1 a2 a3 b d
550 mm 450 mm 340 mm 225 mm 1005 mm 9 mm (24x)
1. Mark the bore holes on the mounting plate according to the figure.
2. Drill the holes into the mounting plate.
4.3−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Fasten the mounting rails on the mounting plate 4.3.3
4.3.3 Fasten the mounting rails on the mounting plate
2 2
0
3 3
0
3 3
2 2
9300vec080
Fig. 4.3−3 Fastening the mounting rails on the mounting plate

Mounting rail
Mounting plate
Hexagon socket screw M8 × 25 mm
Spring washer M8
1. Hold the mounting rails behind the mounting plate.

2. Fasten the mounting rails exactly at the illustrated points using 2
hexagon socket screws and spring washers on each side.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 4.3−3


Danger!
Risk of injury due to the high weight of the controller.
The controller has to be carried using the eyebolts and an
adequate lifting tool.
0 0 4
5
1 2
3
5
4
9300vec081
Fig. 4.3−4 Fastening the controller on mounting plate

Eyebolts Mounting plate
Master 16 hexagon socket screws M8 × 25 mm
Slave 16 spring washers M8
1. Put master and slave on the mounting plate.

2. Fasten the master and slave each with five hexagon socket screws and
spring washers at the top and 3 hexagon socket screws and spring
washers at the bottom exactly at the marked point.
4.3−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Wiring of the standard device 5

Contents
5 Wiring of the standard device
Contents
5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1

5.1.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−1
5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.1.3 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−3
5.1.4 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−4
5.1.5 Interaction with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1−4
5.2 Basics for wiring according to EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.2 Mains connection, DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−1
5.2.3 Motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−2
5.2.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−3
5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−4
5.2.6 Wiring outside the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−5
5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2−6
mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3−4
5.4.2 Master and slave connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−3
mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4−8
5.5 Control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−1
5.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−1
5.5.2 Connection terminal of the control card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−3
5.5.3 With function "Safe torque off" active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−4
5.5.4 With function "Safe torque off" deactivated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−7
5.5.5 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5−9
5.6 Wiring of the system bus (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5−1


Contents
5.7 Wiring of the feedback system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−1

5.7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−1
5.7.3 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7−3
5.8 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output . . . . . . . 5.8−1
5.9 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9−1
5−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Important notes 5.1
Protection of persons 5.1.1
5.1 Important notes
Stop!
The drive controller contains electrostatically sensitive
components.
The personnel must be free of electrostatic charge when carrying
out assembly and service operations.
5.1.1 Protection of persons
Danger!
Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied
to the power terminals:
ƒ The power terminals U, V, W, +UG, −UG, BR1, BR2 and
101 ... 104 remain live for at least five minutes after
disconnecting the mains.
ƒ The power terminals L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, +UG, −UG, BR1, BR2 and
101 ... 104 remain live when the motor is stopped.
Pluggable terminal strips All pluggable terminals must only be connected or disconnected when no
voltage is applied!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.1−1


5.1 Important notes
5.1.1 Protection of persons
Electrical isolation The terminals X1 and X5 have a double (reinforced) insulation in accordance
with EN 61800−5−1. The protection against accidental contact is ensured
without any further measures.
Danger!
ƒ Terminals X3, X4, X6, X8, X9, X10, X11 have a single basic
insulation (single isolating distance).
ƒ Protection against accidental contact in case of a defective
isolating distance is only guaranteed through external
measures, e.g. double insulation.
ƒ If an external DC 24 V voltage source is used, the insulation
level of the controller depends on the insulation level of the
voltage source.
L1
24 VDC
N
101 59 39 A1…A4 E1…E5, ST1, ST2 28 X5 X1
102
103
104
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
BR1
BR2
PE
W X3 X4 X6 X8 X9 X10 X11
9300VEC009
Fig. 5.1−1 Electrical isolation between power terminals, control terminals and housing
Double (reinforced) insulation
Basic insulation
Replacing defective fuses Only replace defective fuses in the deenergised state to the type specified.
Disconnecting the controller Only carry out the safety−related disconnection of the controller from the
from the mains mains via a contactor on the input side or a manually operated toggle switch.
5.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Important notes 5.1
Device protection 5.1.2
5.1.2 Device protection
ƒ In the event of condensation, connect the controller to the mains

voltage only after the humidity has evaporated.
ƒ The controller is protected by external fuses.
ƒ Length of the screws for connecting the shield sheet for the control
cables: 12 mm.
ƒ Cyclic connection and disconnection of the supply voltage can overload
and destroy the input current limitation of the controller. In case of
cyclic mains switching over a longer period of time, the controller must
not be switched on more frequently than every 5 minutes!
ƒ Switching on the motor side of the controller is only permitted for
emergency switch−off.
ƒ Provide unused control inputs and outputs with terminal strips. Cover
unused Sub−D sockets with protective covers included in the scope of
supply.
5.1.3 Motor protection
ƒ Extensive protection against overload:

– By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring.
– We recommend the use of PTC thermistors or thermostats to monitor
the motor temperature.
– PTC thermistors or thermostats can be connected to the controller.
– For monitoring the motor, we recommend the use of the I2xt
monitoring.
ƒ Only use motors with an insulation suitable for the inverter operation:
– Insulation resistance: min. û = 1.5 kV, min. du/dt = 5 kV/ms
– When using motors with an unknown insulation resistance, please
contact your motor supplier.
Note!
To avoid bearing currents, Lenze recommends to use motors
with insulated non−drive end bearings. Optionally, motor chokes
can be used to reduce bearing currents.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.1−3


5.1 Important notes
5.1.4 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions
5.1.4 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions
Please observe the restrictions of each mains type!

Mains Controller operation Notes
With insulated No restrictions Comply with controller ratings.
neutral point l Effective mains current: See
(TT/TN systems) chapter "Technical data"
With insulated Possible if the controller is protected Safe operation cannot be
neutral point in the event of an earth fault in the guaranteed in the event of an earth
(IT systems) mains supply fault at the inverter output.
l by means of suitable equipment
for detecting an earth fault and
l the controller is disconnected
directly from the mains
DC−supply via Permitted if the DC voltage is The controller will be destroyed
+UG/−UG symmetrical to PE when grounding +UG conductor or
−UG conductor.
5.1.5 Interaction with compensation equipment
ƒ Controllers only consume very little reactive power of the fundamental

wave from the AC supply mains. Therefore, a compensation is not
required.
ƒ If the controllers are connected to a supply system with compensation
equipment, this equipment must comprise chokes.
– For this, contact the supplier of the compensation equipment.
5.1−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Basics for wiring according to EMC 5.2
Shielding 5.2.1
5.2 Basics for wiring according to EMC
5.2.1 Shielding
The shielding quality is determined by a good shield connection:

ƒ Connect the shield with a surface as large as possible.
ƒ Use a conductive clamp to connect the shield to the conductive and
grounded mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.
ƒ Unshielded cable ends must always be as short as possible.
5.2.2 Mains connection, DC supply
ƒ You can use unshielded single cores or unshielded cables to connect

the controller and the mains choke to the mains.
ƒ For DC−bus operation or DC supply, use shielded cables.
ƒ The cable cross−section must be dimensioned for the assigned fuse
protection (national and regional regulations).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.2−1


5.2.3 Motor cables
5.2.3 Motor cables
ƒ Use only shielded motor cables with braid made of tinned or

nickel−plated copper. Shields made of steel braid are not suitable.
– The overlap rate of the braid must be at least 70 % with an overlap
angle of 90 °.
ƒ The cables used must meet the requirements of the application (e.g.
EN 60204−1).
ƒ The cable for the motor temperature monitoring (PTC or thermal
contact) must be shielded and separated from the motor cable.
– With Lenze system cables, the cable for the motor temperature
monitoring is integrated into the motor cable.
ƒ Always place the shield of the motor cable at both sides − at the drive
controller and at the motor.
– Always connect the shields to the conductive and grounded
mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.
ƒ The motor cable is perfectly installed if
– it is routed separately of mains cables and control cables,
– crosses mains cables and control cables only at a right angle,
– is not interrupted.
ƒ If it is inevitable to have an interruption (e.g. through chokes,
contactors or terminals):
– The unshielded cable must not be longer than 100 mm (depending
on the cable cross−section).
– Chokes, contactors, terminals, etc. must be separated from other
components (min. distance = 100 mm).
– The motor cable shield must be connected to the mounting plate
with a surface as large as possible directly before and after the point
of interruption.
ƒ Connect the shield in the motor terminal box or at the motor housing
to PE with a surface as large as possible.
– Metal cable glands at the motor terminal box ensure that the shield
is connected to the motor housing with a surface as large as possible.
5.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Control cables 5.2.4
5.2.4 Control cables
ƒ Control cables must be shielded to minimise interference injections.

ƒ For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but twisted
cables may be used.
ƒ Connect the shield correctly:
– The shield connections of the control cables must be at a distance of
at least 50 mm from the shield connections of the motor cables and
DC cables.
– Connect the shield of digital input and output cables at both ends.
– Connect the shield of analog input and output cables at one end (at
the drive controller).
ƒ To achieve an optimum shielding effect (in case of very long cables,
with high interference) one shield end of analog input and output
cables can be connected to PE potential via a capacitor (e.g.
10 nF/250 V) (see sketch).
9300vec043
Fig. 5.2−1 Shielding of long, analog control cables
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.2−3


5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet
5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet
Mounting plate requirements ƒ Only use mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc−coated or
V2A−steel).
ƒ Painted mounting plates are not suitable even if the paint is removed
from the contact surfaces.
ƒ If several mounting plates are used, ensure a large−surface connection
between the mounting plates (e.g. by using earthing strips).
Mounting of the components ƒ Connect the controller and the chokes to the grounded mounting plate
with a surface as large as possible.
Optimum cable routing ƒ The motor cable is optimally installed if
– it is separated from mains cables and control cables,
– it crosses mains cables and control cables at right angles.
ƒ Always install cables close to the mounting plate (reference potential),
as freely suspended cables act like aerials.
ƒ Lead the cables to the terminals in a straight line (avoid tangles of
cables).
ƒ Use separated cable channels for motor cables and control cables. Do
not mix up different cable types in one cable channel.
ƒ Minimise coupling capacities and coupling inductances by avoiding
unnecessary cable lengths and reserve loops.
ƒ Short−circuit unused cores to the reference potential.
ƒ Install the positive and negative wires for DC 24 V close to each other
over the entire length to avoid loops.
Earth connections ƒ Connect all components (controller, chokes) to a central earthing point
(PE rail).
ƒ Set up a star−shape earthing system.
ƒ Comply with the corresponding minimum cable cross−sections.
5.2−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Wiring outside the control cabinet 5.2.6
5.2.6 Wiring outside the control cabinet
Notes for cable routing outside the control cabinet:

ƒ The longer the cables the greater the space between the cables must
be.
ƒ If cables for different signal types are routed in parallel, the
interferences can be minimized by means of a metal barrier or
separated cable ducts.
Cover
Barrier without
opening
Signal cables Power cables
EMVallg001
Fig. 5.2−2 Cable routing in the cable duct with barrier
Cover
Communication cables
Cable duct
Measuring cables
Analog cables
Control cables
Power cables
EMVallg002
Fig. 5.2−3 Cable routing in separated cable ducts
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.2−5


5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences
5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences
Fault Cause Remedy

Interferences of Unshielded motor cable Use shielded motor cable
analog setpoints of Shield contact is not extensive Carry out optimal shielding as
your own or other enough specified
devices and
measuring systems Shield of the motor cable is l Separate components from
interrupted by terminal strips, other component part with a
switched, etc. minimum distance of 100 mm
l Use motor choke/motor filter
Install additional unshielded Install and shield additional cables
cables inside the motor cable (e.g. separately
for motor temperature
monitoring)
Too long and unshielded cable Shorten unshielded cable ends to
ends of the motor cable maximally 40 mm
Conducted Terminal strips for the motor Spatially separate the terminal
interference level is cable are directly located next to strips for the motor cable from
exceeded on the the mains terminals main terminals and other control
supply side terminals with a minimum
distance of 100 mm
Mounting plate varnished Optimise PE connection:
l Remove varnish
l Use zinc−coated mounting
plate
HF short circuit Check cable routing
5.2−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system) 5.3.1
5.3.1 Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system)
The drives comply with the EC Directive on "Electromagnetic Compatibility"

if they are installed in accordance with the specifications for the CE−typical
drive system. The user is responsible for the compliance of the machine
application with the EC Directive.
Note!
Observe the notes given in chapter "Basics for wiring according
to EMC"!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.3−1


L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3 S2
K10 S1 K10
101 102 103 104 PE L1 L2 L3

IN1 PES PES X11
IN2 K31
Z1
IN3 K32
33
IN4
34
PES PES X5
28
E1
E2
E3
EVF9335-EV …
E4
E5
EVF9338-EV X6 PES
+ ST1 63
DC 24 V
ST2 7
–
39 62
PE
A1 7
A2 4
A3 3
A4 2
PES PES 59 1
PES
T1 T2 PE U V W BR1BR2+UG -UG K10
PE
PES PES PES PES
PES PES
PE PE RB1 RB2 T1 T2
X8/8
X8/5
RB
PES PES JRB
Z2
KTY
J>
PES
PE M PE M
3~ 3~
9300VEC007
Fig. 5.3−1 Example for wiring in accordance with EMC regulations

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z1 Programmable logic controller (PLC)
Z2 Brake resistor
S1 Mains contactor on
S2 Mains contactor off
+UG, −UG DC−bus connection
PES HF shield termination through large−surface connection to PE
5.3−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Mains connection of the controller for 400 V mains voltage 5.3.2
5.3.2 Mains connection of the controller for 400 V mains voltage
Stop!
The user is responsible for sufficient strain relief!
L1 L2 L3 PE BR1 BR2 PE U V W
M8 40 mm
L1, L2, 25-30 Nm
L3 221-264 lb-in
M6
PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in
9300VEC003
Fig. 5.3−2 Mains connection example

BR1, BR2 Brake resistors can only be operated with variants V060 and
V110
Fuses and cable cross−sections 9300 vector Installation in accordance with EN 60204−1
for the mains connection
Fuse 2) Cable cross−sections
L1, L2, L3 PE
EVF9335−EV 150
250 95
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9336−EV 150
315 95
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9337−EV 150
315 95
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9338−EV 240
400 150
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1)
2) Lenze recommends to use fuses of the gRL utilisation category
Observe the national and regional legislation
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.3−3


5.3.3 Supply and fan connection of the controller for 400 V/500V mains voltage
Stop!
Mains connection
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG BR1 BR2 PE U V W

101
102
103
104
M8 40 mm
L1, L2, 25-30 Nm
L3 221-264 lb-in
M6
PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in
9300VEC032

V300
L1, L2, L3 PE
EVF9335−EV 150
250 95
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9336−EV 150
315 95
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9337−EV 150
315 95
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9338−EV 240
400 150
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1)
5.3−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Supply and fan connection of the controller for 400 V/500V mains voltage 5.3.3
Connection to the DC bus ƒ For compliance with EMC requirements, Lenze recommends to use
(+UG, −UG)
shielded DC−bus cables.
ƒ Shield clamps are not included in the scope of supply.
101 L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG BR1 BR2 PE U V W

102
103
104
0 max.
300 mm
M6
PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in
+U G
M8
25-30 Nm
1
-U G 221-264 lb-in
40 mm
9300VEC074
Fig. 5.3−4 Connection example to +UG and −UG

BR1, BR2 Brake resistors can only be operated with variants V270 and V300
Connect the DC−bus cable shield to the conductive control cabinet
mounting plate with a contact surface as large as possible by using
the shield clamps.
Conductive surface
Ensure to have the poles right!
for DC−bus connection
+UG, −UG PE
315 95
EVF9335−EVV300 2 × 50 1)
350 95
EVF9336−EVV300 2 × 50 1)
400 95
EVF9337−EVV300 2 × 95 1)
500 150
EVF9338−EVV300 2 × 95 1)
2) Only use fuses of the gRL utilisation category
Fan connection when Lay a bridge between the terminals when a controller is operated on a mains.
controller is supplied with
mains voltage AC 340 ... 440 V AC 440 ... 577 V
(when being delivered)
L1 L2 L1 L2
101
102
103
101
102
103
104
104
9300vec044 9300vec045
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.3−5


Fan connection when

controller is supplied via the
DC bus Danger!
When the fan is externally supplied with voltage, the terminal L2
carries dangerous mains voltage!
When the controller is supplied via the DC bus, the fan must be separately
supplied with mains voltage (see ). In this case, the bridge between the
terminals 102 and 103 must be removed (see ).
Remove bridge Mains connection for the operation of the fan on
AC 340 ... 440 V AC 440 ... 577 V
0 1 1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
101
102
103
101
102
103
101
102
103
104
104
104
}
AC 340 … 440 V AC 440 … 577 V
9300vec160 9300vec046 9300vec047
Exchange defect fuse In case of an external voltage supply the fan is protected by a fuse integrated
in terminal 104.
0
1
L1 L2
101
102
103
104
9300vec161
Fig. 5.3−5 Fusing of the fan

Open the fuse holder.
Remove the defect fuse from the support and replace it by the following
type:
Type: 500V SA 2A 6.32
Ref. no.: P098131
Manufacturer: Ferraz Shawmut
5.3−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Motor connection 5.3.4
5.3.4 Motor connection
ƒ To comply with the EMC regulations, Lenze recommends to use

shielded motor cables.
Stop!
BR1 BR2 PE U V W
40 mm max.
300 mm
0
1
M8
U, V, W 25-30 Nm
M6 221-264 lb-in
PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in
9300VEC005
Fig. 5.3−6 Motor connection example

BR1, BR2 Brake resistors can only be operated with variants V060, V110, V270
and V300
Connect the motor cable shield with a surface as large as possible to
the control cabinet mounting plate by using the clamps.
Conductive surface
Do not exceed the maximum motor cable length!
Cable cross−sections 9300 vector Installation in accordance with EN 60204−1

U, V, W PE
Type [mm2] [mm2]
EVF9335−EV 150
95
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9336−EV 150
95
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9337−EV 150
95
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9338−EV 240
150
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.3−7


5.3.5 Wiring of motor temperature monitoring
The drive controller features 2 connections for motor temperature

monitoring:
ƒ Terminals T1, T2 for connecting a PTC thermistor or thermal contact
(NC contact).
ƒ Pin X8/5 and X8/8 of the incremental encoder input (X8) for
connecting a KTY thermal sensor.
5.3−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Wiring of motor temperature monitoring 5.3.5
Motor with PTC thermistor or Wire T1, T2 only if the motor is equipped with a PTC thermistor or thermal
thermal contact (NC contact) contact (NC contact).
ƒ An "open" cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults on the drive
controller.
Danger!
ƒ All control terminals only have basic insulation (single
isolating distance) after connecting a PTC thermistor or a
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
T1 T2 PE U V W +UG -UG
PES PES T1 T2
PES PES

PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139 9300std328
Fig. 5.3−7 Connection of PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC contact) at T1, T2
Characteristics of the connection for motor temperature monitoring:

Terminals T1, T2
Connection l PTC thermistor
– PTC thermistor with defined tripping temperature (acc. to
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l Thermal contact (NC contact)
– Thermostat as NC contact
Tripping point l Fixed (depending on the PTC/thermal contact)
l PTC: RJ > 1600 W
l Configurable as warning or error (TRIP)
Notes l Monitoring is not active in the Lenze setting.
l If you do not use a Lenze motor, we recommend the use of a PTC
thermistor up to 150°C.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.3−9


Motor with KTY thermal

sensor
Note!
ƒ We recommend to use Lenze system cables for wiring.
ƒ For self−made cables only use cables with shielded cores
twisted in pairs.
X8 X8/8
X8/5
PES
X9
X10
PES
PES PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec121
Fig. 5.3−8 Connection of KTY thermal sensor at incremental encoder input X8

Pins X8/5, X8/8 of incremental encoder input (X8)
Connection Linear KTY thermal sensor
Tripping point l Warning: Adjustable
l Error (TRIP): Fixed at 150 °C
l The KTY thermal sensor is monitored with regard to interruption
and short circuit.
5.3−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Wiring according to EMC (CE−typical drive system) 5.4.1
The drives comply with the EC Directive on "Electromagnetic Compatibility"

if they are installed in accordance with the specifications for the CE−typical
drive system. The user is responsible for the compliance of the machine
application with the EC Directive.
Note!
Observe the notes given in chapter "Basics for wiring according
to EMC"!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−1


L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3 F4 … F6 S2
K10 K10 S1 K10
101 102 103 104 PE L1 L2 L3 101 102 103 104 PE L1 L2 L3

IN1 PES PES X11
IN2 K31
Z5
IN3 K32
33
IN4
34
DC+
DC–
PES PES X5
28
E1
E2
E3
EVM9381-EV … EVL9381-EV …
E4
E5
EVM9383-EV X6 PES
EVL9383-EV
+ ST1 63
DC 24 V
ST2 7
–
39 62
PE
A1 7
A2 4
A3 3
A4 2
PES PES 59 1
PES
T1 T2 PE U V W BR1 BR2 +UG -UG PE U V W BR1 BR2 +UG -UG K10

PE
PE
PE PE PES PES PES
Z1 Z2
PES PES
PES PES PES

PE PE RB1 RB2 T1 T2
X8/8
X8/5 RB
JRB
PES PES PES
Z3
KTY PES
J>
PES PE PE RB1 RB2 T1 T2
PE M PE M
3~ 3~
RB
JRB
Z4
9300VEC082
Fig. 5.4−1 Example for wiring in accordance with EMC regulations

F1 ... F3, Fuses
F4 ... F6
K10 Mains contactor
Z1, Z2 Motor choke
Z3, Z4 Brake resistor
S1 Mains contactor on
S2 Mains contactor off
+UG, −UG DC−bus connection
PES HF shield termination through large−surface connection to PE
5.4−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Master and slave connection 5.4.2
5.4.2 Master and slave connection
Important notes
Danger!
Danger of personal injury! Destruction of the controller!
Damaged control cables in the controller (master and slave) may
cause a faulty control of the output stage.
Possible consequences:
ƒ When switching on the mains voltage, high energies may
discharge like an explosion.
ƒ Explosive noises may damage your hearing. A shock by an
unexpected and loud explosion may cause distress.
ƒ The controller will be destroyed.
Protective measures:
ƒ When working with the DC busbars, make sure that you do
not damage any internal connectors and cables.
ƒ Before attaching the cover again:
– Check all plugs selected in Fig. 5.4−5 for damage and correct
fit.
– Check all cables involved for damages.
– If the plugs do not fit correctly, or the plugs or cables are
damaged, commissioning is prohibited. Contact the Lenze
service.
Preliminary work
0 1
9300vec164
Fig. 5.4−2 Fastening the covers to the master and slave
ƒ Remove the upper cover from the master and the slave to access
the power sections. Each cover is fastened with 4 screws.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−3


Installation of the DC busbars
0
0
1
1
2
2
3 3
DC+
DC-
4
8 4
4
5 4
5 5
6 5
6 6
6
7 7
8
9300VEC024
Fig. 5.4−3 Mounting of +DC/−DC busbars
How to mount the DC busbars 1. Mount +DC busbar :

– Remove hexagon socket screws M8 .
– Position the DC busbar in the master and the slave.
– Fasten the DC busbar in the master and the slave with 1 hexagon
socket screw M8 × 45 mm , 1 plain washer and 1 distance
sleeve each.
– Tighten the hexagon socket screws (tightening torque: 10.9 Nm).
2. Mount −DC busbar :
– Remove hexagon socket screws M8 .
– Put both connecting cables aside.
– Position the DC busbar in the master and the slave.
– Insert 2 hexagon socket screws M8 × 45 mm each with plain
washers into the bore holes of the DC busbar, finally passing them
through the distance sleeves .
– Screw the hexagon socket screws into the threaded holes in the
master and slave.
– Lay the connecting cable in the master and slave with cable lug
between the busbar and plain washer .
– Tighten the hexagon socket screws (tightening torque: 10.9 Nm).
5.4−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Master and slave connection 5.4.2
Connection of the control cables between master and slave
0 1 0
1
DC+
0 1
4 DC-
5 3
9300VEC028
Fig. 5.4−4 Connection of the control cables between master and slave
How to connect the control 1. Installation and connection of the ribbon cable :
cables
By default the ribbon cable is inside the master. The plug is already
attached to the Drive Board.
– Route the ribbon cable from the master to the Drive Board
connection in the slave, inserting the ribbon cable into the cable
ducts .
– Plug the ribbon cable plug into the socket at the Drive Board.
2. Laying and connecting 2−core cables with plugs :
By default the cable is inside the master. The corresponding cable with
socket is in the slave.
– Lay the two−core cable from the master to the socket in the slave.
– Connect the 2−pole plug with the 2−pole socket in the slave.
3. Laying and connecting 10−core cables with plugs :
By default the cable is inside the master. The corresponding cable with
socket is in the slave.
– Lay the two−core cable from the master to the socket in the slave.
– Connect the 10−pole plug with the 10−pole socket in the slave.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−5


Final works
9300vec163
Fig. 5.4−5 Control cables in the master and slave
1. Check the control cables (plugs and cables) for correct fit and possible
damages. ()
– If the plugs do not fit correctly, or the plugs or cables are damaged,
commissioning is prohibited. Contact the Lenze service.
0 1
9300vec164
Fig. 5.4−6 Fastening the covers to the master and slave

2. Close the housings using the covers . Fasten the covers with
4 screws each.
5.4−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Mains connection of the controller for 400 V mains voltage 5.4.3
5.4.3 Mains connection of the controller for 400 V mains voltage
Stop!
ƒ Both, the master and the slave must be supplied!
0 1
L1 L2 L3 PE BR1 BR2 PE U V W L1 L2 L3 PE BR1 BR2 PE U V W
M8 40 mm M8 40 mm
L1, L2, 25-30 Nm L1, L2, 25-30 Nm
L3 221-264 lb-in L3 221-264 lb-in
M6 M6
PE 15-20 Nm PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in 133-176 lb-in
9300VEC013

V110
Master terminals
Slave terminals
L1, L2, L3 PE
EVF9381−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9383−EV 240 240
400 400 150 150
EVF9383−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−7


Stop!
Mains connection ƒ Both, the master and the slave must be supplied!
0 1
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG BR1 BR2 PE U V W L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG BR1 BR2 PE U V W

101
102
103
101
102
103
104
104
M8 40 mm M8 40 mm
L1, L2, 25-30 Nm L1, L2, 25-30 Nm
L3 221-264 lb-in L3 221-264 lb-in
M6 M6
PE 15-20 Nm PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in 133-176 lb-in
9300VEC035

V300
Master terminals
Slave terminals
L1, L2, L3 PE
EVF9381−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9383−EV 240 240
400 400 150 150
EVF9383−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
5.4−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Connection to the DC bus ƒ For compliance with EMC requirements, Lenze recommends to use
(+UG, −UG)
shielded DC−bus cables.
ƒ Both, the master and the slave must be supplied!
0 1
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG BR1 BR2 PE U V W L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG BR1 BR2 PE U V W

101
102
103
101
102
103
104
104
2 max.
300 mm 2 max.
300 mm
M6 M6
PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in
+U G
M8
25-30 Nm
3 PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in
+U G
M8
25-30 Nm
3
-U G 221-264 lb-in -U G 221-264 lb-in
40 mm 40 mm
9300VEC083
Fig. 5.4−9 Connection example to +UG and −UG

BR1, BR2 Brake resistors can only be operated with variants V270 and V300
Master terminals
Slave terminals
Connect the DC−bus cable shield to the conductive control cabinet
mounting plate with a contact surface as large as possible by using
the shield clamps.
Conductive surface
for DC−bus connection
+UG, −UG PE
EVF9381−EVV2xx 150 150
350 350 95 95
EVF9381−EVV300 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EVV2xx 240 240
400 400 95 95
EVF9382−EVV300 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
EVF9383−EVV2xx 240 240
500 500 150 150
EVF9383−EVV300 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
2) Only use fuses of the gRL utilisation category
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−9


Fan connection
Note!
Connect the fan to the master and the slave.
Fan connection when Lay a bridge between the terminals when a controller is operated on a mains.
controller is supplied with
mains voltage AC 340 ... 440 V AC 440 ... 577 V
(when being delivered)
L1 L2 L1 L2
101
102
103
101
102
103
104
104
9300vec044 9300vec045
Fan connection when

controller is supplied via the
DC bus Danger!
When the fan is externally supplied with voltage, the terminal L2
carries dangerous mains voltage!
When the controller is supplied via the DC bus, the fan must be separately
supplied with mains voltage (see ). In this case, the bridge between the
terminals 102 and 103 must be removed (see ).
Remove bridge Mains connection for the operation of the fan on
AC 340 ... 440 V AC 440 ... 577 V
0 1 1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
101
102
103
101
102
103
101
102
103
104
104
104
}
AC 340 … 440 V AC 440 … 577 V
9300vec160 9300vec046 9300vec047
5.4−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Exchange defect fuse In case of an external voltage supply the fan is protected by a fuse integrated
in terminal 104.
0
1
L1 L2
101
102
103
104
9300vec161
Fig. 5.4−10 Fusing of the fan

Open the fuse holder.
Remove the defect fuse from the support and replace it by the following
type:
Type: 500V SA 2A 6.32
Ref. no.: P098131
Manufacturer: Ferraz Shawmut
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−11


ƒ To comply with the EMC regulations, Lenze recommends to use

shielded motor cables.
Stop!
Parallel connection of master In order to connect the motor cables of master and slave to the motor, the
and slave (motor side)
outputs must be connected in parallel.
It is important for the parallel connection of the inverter outputs that the
outputs are decoupled by means of an inductance between master and
slave. The length of the motor cables determine whether the inductance of
the cables is sufficient for a decoupling.
2 motor connections ensure sufficient decoupling.
ƒ Decoupling via motor chokes
If the single motor cable length is £ 10 m, master and slave must be
connected in parallel via chokes on the motor side to achieve a sufficient
decoupling between master and slave.
ƒ Decoupling via motor cables
If the single motor cable length is > 10 m, the motor cables of master and
slave can be connected in parallel at the motor to achieve a sufficient
decoupling between master and slave.
Decoupling via motor chokes Decoupling via motor cables
PE U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE U V W
PE PE PE
Z1 Z2
PE PE
£10 m
>10 m
M M
PE
3~ PE 3~
9300VEC026 9300VEC008
Fig. 5.4−11 Variants for parallel connection of master and slave (motor side)
Z1, Z2 Motor choke for controller
ELM3−0003H275 EVF9381
ELM3−0002H320 EVF9382
ELM3−0002H410 EVF9383
5.4−12 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Motor connection 5.4.5
Motor connection
0 1
BR1 BR2 PE U V W BR1 BR2 PE U V W
40 mm max. 40 mm max.
300 mm 300 mm
2 2
M6
U, V, W
M8
25-30 Nm 3 M6
U, V, W
M8
25-30 Nm 3
221-264 lb-in 221-264 lb-in
PE 15-20 Nm PE 15-20 Nm
133-176 lb-in 133-176 lb-in
9300VEC036
Fig. 5.4−12 Motor connection example

BR1, BR2 Brake resistors can only be operated with variants V060, V110, V270
and V300
Master terminals
Slave terminals
Connect the motor cable shield with a surface as large as possible to
the control cabinet mounting plate by using the clamps.
Conductive surface
Do not exceed the maximum motor cable length!
Cable cross−sections 9300 vector Installation in accordance with EN 60204−1

U, V, W PE
Type [mm2] [mm2]
Master Slave Master Slave
EVF9381−EV 150 150
95 95
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EV 150 150
95 95
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9383−EV 240 240
150 150
EVF9383−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−13


The drive controller features 2 connections for motor temperature

monitoring:
ƒ Terminals T1, T2 for connecting a PTC thermistor or thermal contact
(NC contact).
ƒ Pin X8/5 and X8/8 of the incremental encoder input (X8) for
connecting a KTY thermal sensor.
5.4−14 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Wiring of motor temperature monitoring 5.4.6
Motor with PTC thermistor or Wire T1, T2 only if the motor is equipped with a PTC thermistor or thermal
thermal contact (NC contact) contact (NC contact).
ƒ An "open" cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults on the drive
controller.
Danger!
ƒ All control terminals only have basic insulation (single
isolating distance) after connecting a PTC thermistor or a
thermal contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES T1 T2
PES PES

PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139 9300std328
Fig. 5.4−13 Connection of PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC contact) at T1, T2

Terminals T1, T2
Connection l PTC thermistor
– PTC thermistor with defined tripping temperature (acc. to
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
l Thermal contact (NC contact)
– Thermostat as NC contact
Tripping point l Fixed (depending on the PTC/thermal contact)
l PTC: RJ > 1600 W
l Configurable as warning or error (TRIP)
l If you do not use a Lenze motor, we recommend the use of a PTC
thermistor up to 150°C.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.4−15


Motor with KTY thermal

sensor
Note!
twisted in pairs.
X8 X8/8
X8/5
PES
X9
X10
PES
PES PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec121
Fig. 5.4−14 Connection of KTY thermal sensor at incremental encoder input X8

Pins X8/5, X8/8 of incremental encoder input (X8)
Connection Linear KTY thermal sensor
Tripping point l Warning: Adjustable
l Error (TRIP): Fixed at 150 °C
l The KTY thermal sensor is monitored with regard to interruption
and short circuit.
5.4−16 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Control terminals 5.5
Important notes 5.5.1
5.5 Control terminals
5.5.1 Important notes
Stop!
The control card will be damaged if
ƒ the voltage between X5/39 and PE or X6/7 and PE is greater
than 50 V,
ƒ the voltage between voltage source and X6/7 exceeds 10 V
(common mode) in case of supply via external voltage source.
Limit the voltage before switching on the drive controller:
ƒ Connect X5/39, X6/2, X6/4 and X6/7 directly to PE or
ƒ use voltage−limiting components.
ƒ For trouble−free operation, the control cables must be shielded:

– Connect the shield of digital input and output cables at both ends.
– Connect the shield of analog input and output cables at one end (at
the drive controller).
– For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but
twisted cables may be used.
How to connect the shield
0 1
3
9300vec063
Fig. 5.5−1 Connection of the cable shield with shield clip and strain relief with cable binder
Shield sheet
Fasten shield sheet with two screws M4 × 12 mm at the bottom of the
control card
Connect cable shield with shield clip to the shield sheet
Provide a strain relief of the control cable at the shield sheet by means of a
cable binder
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.5−1


Terminal data
Stop!
ƒ Connect or disconnect the terminal strips only if the controller
is disconnected from the mains!
ƒ Wire the terminal strips before connecting them!
ƒ Unused terminal strips must also be plugged on to protect the
contacts.
Cable type Wire end ferrule Maximum cable Tightening Stripping

cross−section torque length
Rigid — 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Without wire end
Flexible 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
ferrule
Wire end ferrule 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
5 mm
Flexible without plastic 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
sleeve
Wire end ferrule
Flexible 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
with plastic sleeve
5.5−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Connection terminal of the control card 5.5.2
5.5.2 Connection terminal of the control card
X1
X3
59 ST2 ST1 A4 A3 A2 A1 GND LO HI

X4
39 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 28
X5
1
X6
2
4
62 7
63 7
X11
K31 K32 33 34
1
X8
1
X9
5
X10
9300VEC001
Fig. 5.5−2 Connection terminal of the control card

2 light−emitting diodes (red, green) for status display
X1 Automation interface (AIF)
Slot for communication modules (e.g. keypad XT)
X3 Preselection of signal type with jumper for input signal at X6/1, X6/2
X4 Connection for system bus (CAN), terminal strip
X5 Connection for digital inputs and outputs, terminal strips
X6 Connection for analog inputs and outputs, terminal strips
X8 Connection for incremental encoder
connector: male, 9−pole, Sub−D
X9 Connection for digital frequency input signal
connector: male, 9−pole, Sub−D
X10 Connection for digital frequency output signal
connector: female, 9−pole, Sub−D
X11 Connection for safety relay KSR, terminal strip
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.5−3


5.5.3 With function "Safe torque off" active
Safety instructions for the ƒ The installation and commissioning of the Safe torque off" function
installation of the "Safe
torque off" function
must be carried out by skilled personnel only.
ƒ All safety−relevant cables (e.g. control cable for the safety relay,
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, for
instance by a cable duct. Short circuits between the single cables must
be ruled out!
ƒ Wiring of the safety relay KSR with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid
cables is absolutely vital.
ƒ The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR must be
connected with the protective conductor system (DIN EN 60204−1
paragraph 9.4.3). Only this measure guarantees that the operation is
protected against earth faults.
Tip!
A complete description can be found in the chapter "Safe torque
off".
5.5−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


With function "Safe torque off" active 5.5.3
Supply via internal voltage ƒ If a freely assignable digital output (e.g. X5/A1) is assigned
source
permanently to HIGH level, it serves as an internal voltage source. Every
output has a maximum load capacity of 50 mA.
– The relay KSR and two digital inputs (X5/28 and e.g. X5/E1) can be
supplied with voltage via a digital output.
– Two digital outputs must be connected in parallel and assigned
permanently to HIGH level in order to obtain the maximum wiring
(relays KSR and X5/E1 ... X5/E5, X5/ST1).
ƒ For the supply of the analog inputs (X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4) you
have to set a freely assignable analog output (e. g. X6/63) permanently
to HIGH level.
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
X11 K31 K32 33 34 X5 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1ST2 59 X6 1 2 3 4 7 62 63 7

DIGOUT4
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1 S2
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
10k 10k
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300vec135
Fig. 5.5−3 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with active "Safe torque off" function
and internal voltage source
S1 Deactivate pulse inhibit (1st disconnecting path)
S2 Enable controller (2nd disconnecting path)
The PLC monitors the ˜Safe torque off˜ function
X5/A4 Feedback via a digital output (e. g. DIGOUT4)
NO contact or NC contact
ZLoad
Minimum wiring required for operation
Terminal assignment in the Lenze setting: 5.5−9
Note!
If you load a basic configuration C0005 = xx1x (e.g. 1010 for
speed control with control via terminals), the following terminals
are switched to a fixed signal level:
ƒ Terminal X5/A1 to FIXED1 (corresponds to DC 24 V).
ƒ Terminal X6/63 to FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 V).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.5−5


Supply via external voltage source
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1 S2
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
DIGOUT4
– + 10k 10k
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300vec136
Fig. 5.5−4 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with active "Safe torque off" function
and external voltage source
S1 Deactivate pulse inhibit (1st disconnecting path)
S2 Enable controller (2nd disconnecting path)
The PLC monitors the ˜Safe torque off˜ function
X5/A4 Feedback via a digital output (e. g. DIGOUT4)
ZLoad
Note!
Supplying the digital inputs via an external voltage source
enables a backup operation in the case of mains failure. After
switching off the mains voltage, all actual values are continued
to be detected and processed.
ƒ Connect the positive pole of the external voltage source with
X5/59 to establish the backup operation in the event of mains
failure.
ƒ The external voltage source must be able to supply a current
³ 1 A.
ƒ The starting current of the external voltage source is not
limited by the controller. Lenze recommends the use of
voltage sources with current limitation or with an internal
impedance of Z > 1 W.
5.5−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


With function "Safe torque off" deactivated 5.5.4
5.5.4 With function "Safe torque off" deactivated
Note!
If the function "Safe torque off" is not made use of, the safety
relay KSR must be energised permanently to ensure the tension
supply of the power output stage.
Supply via internal voltage ƒ If a freely assignable digital output (e.g. X5/A1) is assigned
source
permanently to HIGH level, it serves as an internal voltage source. Every
output has a maximum load capacity of 50 mA.
– The relay KSR and two digital inputs (X5/28 and e.g. X5/E1) can be
supplied with voltage via a digital output.
– Two digital outputs must be connected in parallel and assigned
permanently to HIGH level in order to obtain the maximum wiring
(relays KSR and X5/E1 ... X5/E5, X5/ST1).
ƒ For the supply of the analog inputs (X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4) you
have to set a freely assignable analog output (e. g. X6/63) permanently
to HIGH level.
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
+ 3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
10k 10k
9300vec0137
Fig. 5.5−5 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with function "Safe torque off"
deactivated, given an internal voltage source
S1 Controller enable
Z Load
Note!
If you load a basic configuration C0005 = xx1x (e.g. 1010 for
speed control with control via terminals), the following terminals
are switched to a fixed signal level:
ƒ Terminal X5/A1 to FIXED1 (corresponds to DC 24 V).
ƒ Terminal X6/63 to FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 V).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.5−7


5.5.4 With function "Safe torque off" deactivated
Supply via external voltage source
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
+ 3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
AOUT2
AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1
S1
1 2 3 4 7 AOUTx
– + 10k 10k
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
9300vec138
Fig. 5.5−6 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with function "Safe torque off"
deactivated, given an external voltage source
S1 Controller enable
Z Load
Note!
Supplying the digital inputs via an external voltage source
enables a backup operation in the case of mains failure. After
switching off the mains voltage, all actual values are continued
to be detected and processed.
ƒ Connect the positive pole of the external voltage source with
X5/59 to establish the backup operation in the event of mains
failure.
ƒ The external voltage source must be able to supply a current
³ 1 A.
ƒ The starting current of the external voltage source is not
limited by the controller. Lenze recommends the use of
voltage sources with current limitation or with an internal
impedance of Z > 1 W.
5.5−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Terminal assignment 5.5.5
5.5.5 Terminal assignment
Terminal Function Level / state Technical data

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Feedback − pulse inhibit Open contact: Pulse inhibit is See chapter "Technical
X11/K31 1st inactive (operation) data"
disconnecting Closed contact: Pulse inhibit is
path active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying any
current: Active pulse inhibit
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying current:
Inactive pulse inhibit
(operation)
X5/28 Controller inhibit Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller inhibited LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: Controller enabled HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd
disconnecting Input current at +24 V:
path 8 mA per input
X5/E1 Digital inputs Deactivate CW rotation / quick stop HIGH
(freely Reading and processing
X5/E2 Deactivate CCW rotation / quick stop HIGH
assignable) the input signals − 1/ms
X5/E3 Activate fixed frequency 1 (JOG1) HIGH (mean value)
X5/E4 Set error message (TRIP SET) LOW
X5/E5 Reset error message (TRIP RESET) LOW−HIGH edge
X5/ST1 Additional digital input (E6) HIGH
X5/ST2
X5/A1 Digital outputs Error message present LOW LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(freely HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
X5/A2 assignable) Switching threshold QMIN: LOW
Actual speed < setpoint speed in C0017 Load capacity:
Max. 50 mA per output
X5/A3 Ready for operation (DCTRL−RDY) HIGH (load resistance at least
480 W at +24 V)
X5/A4 Maximum current reached HIGH
(DCTRL−IMAX) Update of the output
signals − 1/ms
X5/39 – GND2, reference potential for digital – Isolated against GND1
signals
X5/59 – Connection of external voltage source DC 24 V (+18 ... +30 V) Current consumption:
for backup operation of the drive Max. 1 A at 24 V
controller in case of mains failure
X6/1 Analog input 1 Voltage input −10 V ... +10 V Resolution:
X6/2 range 6 5 5 mV (11 bits + sign)
4 3
Main setpoint 2 1
Jumper X3
Current input −20 mA ... +20 mA Resolution: 20 mA
range 6 5 (10 bits + sign)
4 3
2 1
Jumper X3
X6/3 Analog input 2 Voltage input Jumper X3 has no −10 V ... +10 V Resolution: 5 mV
X6/4 range effect (11 bits + sign)
Not active
X6/62 Analog output 1 Monitor 1 −10 V ... +10 V Resolution: 20 mV
Actual speed value max. 2 mA (9 bits + sign)
X6/63 Analog output 2 Monitor 2 −10 V ... +10 V Resolution: 20 mV
Actual motor current value max. 2 mA (9 bits + sign)
X6/7 – GND1, reference potential for analog – –
signals
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.5−9


Wiring of the system bus (CAN) 5.6
5.6 Wiring of the system bus (CAN)
Wiring
A1 A2 A3 An
93XX 93XX 93XX
X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE HI LO GND PE
120 120
9300VEC054
Fig. 5.6−1 System bus (CAN) wiring

A1 Bus device 1 (controller)
An Bus device n (e. g. PLC), n = max. 63
X4/GND CAN−GND: System bus reference potential
X4/LO CAN−LOW: System bus LOW (data line)
X4/HI CAN−HIGH: System bus HIGH (data line)
Stop!
Connect a 120 W terminating resistor to the first and last bus
device.
We recommend the use of CAN cables according to ISO 11898−2:
CAN cable according to ISO 11898−2
Cable type Twisted pair with shielding
Impedance 120 W (95 ... 140 W)
Cable resistance
Cable length £ 300 m £ 70 mW/m
Cable length £ 1000 m £ 40 mW/m
Signal propagation delay £ 5 ns/m
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.6−1


Wiring of the feedback system 5.7
5.7 Wiring of the feedback system
ƒ An incremental encoder can be connected to input X8 or input X9:

– Incremental encoders with TTL level are connected to X8.
– Incremental encoders with HTL level are connected to X9.
ƒ The incremental encoder signal can be output for slave drives at the
digital frequency output X10.
Note!
twisted in pairs.
Installation material required from the scope of supply:
Description Use Quantity
Protective cover Protection for unused Sub−D connections 4
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.7−1


5.7 Wiring of the feedback system
5.7.2 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8
Technical data Field Values

Connection at drive controller Connector: Pin, 9−pole, Sub−D
Connectable incremental Incremental encoder with TTL level
encoder l Encoder with two 5V complementary signals electrically
offset by 90°
l Connection of zero track is possible (optional)
Input frequency 0 ... 500 Nm
Current consumption 6 mA per channel
Internal voltage source 5 V DC / max. 200 mA
(X8/4, X8/5)
Wiring
< 50 m
B X8
B
1
A
2
A
3
VCC
4
GND A
5
Z A
6
Z B
KTY 7 B
+KTY
8 Z
-KTY
9 Z
9300VEC018
Fig. 5.7−1 Connection of incremental encoder with TTL level (RS−422)

Signals for CW rotation
Cores twisted in pairs
X8 − Incremental encoder with TTL level

Connector: Pin, 9−pole, Sub−D
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A VCC GND Z Z +KTY B
(−KTY)
0.14 mm2 (AWG 26) 1 mm2 (AWG 18) 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
5.7−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Wiring of the feedback system 5.7
Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 5.7.3
5.7.3 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9
Technical data Field Values

Connection at drive controller Connector: Pin, 9−pole, Sub−D
Connectable incremental Incremental encoder with HTL−level
encoder l Two−track with inverse signals and zero track
l Two−track without inverse signals and zero track
Input frequency 0 ... 200 kHz
Current consumption 5 mA per channel
Supply of incremental encoder External voltage source
Internal voltage source 5 V DC / max. 200 mA
(X9/4, X9/5) Total current at X9/4, X9/5 and X10/4, X10/5: max. 200 mA
Wiring
< 50 m
B X9
B
1
A
2
A
3
4
GND A
5
Z A
6
Z B
7 B
+ 8
Z
9 Z
–
9300VEC020
Fig. 5.7−2 Connection of incremental encoder with HTL level

Signals for CW rotation
External voltage source for the incremental encoder
Cores twisted in pairs
X9 − Incremental encoder with HTL level

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z − B
0.14 mm2 (AWG 26) 1 mm2 (AWG 18) 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
Note!
Connecting the two−track incremental encoder without inverse
signals (at HTL level):
ƒ Set signal A on pin X9/2 (A) and signal B on pin X9/9 (B).
ƒ Wire pin X9/3 (A) and X9/1) (B) with the positive pole of the
external voltage source for the incremental encoder.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.7−3


Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output 5.8
5.8 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output
Installation material required from the scope of supply:

Description Use Quantity
Protective cover Protection for unused Sub−D connections 4
Technical data Field Digital frequency output X10

Connection at drive controller Connector: female, 9−pole, Sub−D
Pin assignment Dependent on the selected basic configuration
Output frequency 0 ... 500 kHz
Signal Two−track with inverse 5 V signals (RS422) and zero track
Load capacity Max. 20 mA per channel
(up to 3 slave drives can be connected)
Special features The "Enable" output signal at X10/8 switches to LOW if the
drive controller is not ready for operation (e.g. disconnected
from mains). This may trip SD3 monitoring on the slave drive.
Internal voltage source DC 5 V / max. 50 mA
(X10/4, X10/5) Total current at X9/4, X9/5 and X10/4, X10/5: max. 200 mA
Field Digital frequency input X9

Connection at drive controller Connector: male, 9−pole, Sub−D
Input frequency TTL level: 0 ... 500 kHz
HTL level: 0 ... 200 kHz
Signal Two−track with inverse signals and zero track
Two−track without inverse signals and zero track (only for HTL
level)
Signal evaluation Via code C0427
Current consumption Max. 5 mA
Special features With activated SD3 monitoring, TRIP or warning is tripped if
the "Lamp Control" input signal at X9/8 switches to LOW.
Due to this the drive controller may respond if the master
drive is not ready for operation.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.8−1


5.8 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output
Wiring
Note!
twisted in pairs.
< 50 m
X10 X9
B
B
1 1
A
2 2
A
3 3
4 4
5
GND
5
Z A
6 6 A
Z
7 7
B
Lamp
Enable (EN) 8 8 control (LC) B
9 9 Z
Z
9300VEC019
Fig. 5.8−1 Connection of digital frequency input (X9) / digital frequency output (X10)
X9 Slave drive Signals for CW rotation
X10 Master drive Cores twisted in pairs
X9 − Digital frequency input

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z LC B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
(AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26)
X10 − Digital frequency output

Connector: Socket, 9−pole, Sub−D
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z EN B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
(AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26)
Adjustment Evaluation of the input signals at X9

Code Function
CW rotation Track A leads track B by 90 ° (positive value at DFIN−OUT)

C0427 = 0
CCW rotation Track A lags track B by 90 ° (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed
Track B = LOW (positive value at DFIN−OUT)
C0427 = 1
CCW rotation Track A transmits the speed
Track B = HIGH (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
CW rotation Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive
value at DFIN−OUT)
Track B = LOW
C0427 = 2
CCW rotation Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative
value at DFIN−OUT)
Track A = LOW
5.8−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Communication modules 5.9
5.9 Communication modules
Further information ....

on wiring and application of communication modules can be
found in the corresponding Mounting Instructions and
Communication Manuals.
Possible communication Communication module Type/order number

modules
Keypad XT EMZ9371BC
LECOM−A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBV001
LECOM−B (RS485) EMF2102IBV002
LECOM−LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBV003
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS Loop EMF2112IB
PROFIBUS−DP EMF2133IB
DeviceNet/CANopen EMF2175IB
Handling Plug the communication module onto the AIF interface (X1) or pull it off from
the interface. The communication module can also be
connected/disconnected during operation.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 5.9−1

Commissioning 6
Contents
6 Commissioning
Contents
6.1 Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1−1

6.2 Selection of the correct operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2−1
6.3.1 Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode 6.3−1
6.3.2 Commissioning example in vector control mode . . . . . . . . . 6.3−5
6.4 Controller inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4−1
6.5 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−1
6.5.2 Free configuration of digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−3
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−4
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5−6
6.6 Adjusting the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.6.1 Entry of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−1
6.6.2 Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−4
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact 6.6−8
6.6.4 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−10
6.6.5 Current limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−14
6.6.6 Automatic collection of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6−15
6.7 Setting the speed feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−1
6.7.2 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7−2
6.8 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−1
6.8.1 V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−4
6.8.2 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8−8
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9−1
6.10 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.1 Speed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−1
6.10.2 Setting acceleration times and deceleration times in speed
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−3
6.10.3 Quick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−4
6.10.4 Changing the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10−5
6.11 Optimising the operating behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.1 Slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−1
6.11.2 Oscillation damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−3
6.11.3 Boost correction with V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−5
6.11.4 Motor magnetising current with vector control . . . . . . . . . . 6.11−9
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6−1

Commissioning 6
Before switching on 6.1
6.1 Before switching on
Note!
ƒ Observe the corresponding switch−on sequence.
ƒ In the event of faults or errors during commissioning, see
chapter "Troubleshooting and fault elimination".
To avoid injury to persons and damage to material, check ...
... before connecting the mains voltage:
ƒ Wiring for completeness, short−circuit, and earth fault
ƒ The supply of the internal fan in case of the variants V210, V240, V270
and V300.
– The bridge position depends on the mains voltage applied
ƒ The function "emergency−off" of the total system.
ƒ The motor circuit configuration (star/delta) must be adapted to the
output voltage of the controller.
– E. g. the in−phase connection of the motor.
ƒ The direction of rotation of the incremental encoder
... the setting of the main drive parameters before enabling the controller:
Stop!
Only the variants V210, V240, V270, V300:
ƒ Adapt the DC bus voltage threshold to the mains voltage via
C0173.
– The Lenze setting of C0173 = 1 (OU = 770 V) is only
permissible for controller operation with a mains voltage of
400 V.
ƒ Only the variants V210, V240, V270, V300:
Adapt the brake transistor threshold to the mains voltage via C0174. The
Lenze setting of code C0174 = 3 (UBr = 885 V) is valid for operating the
controller on a 500 V mains voltage.
ƒ Is the V/f rated frequency adapted to the motor connection?
ƒ Are the drive parameters relevant for your application set correctly?
ƒ Is the configuration of the analog and digital inputs and outputs
adapted to the wiring?
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.1−1

Commissioning 6
Selection of the correct operating mode 6.2
6.2 Selection of the correct operating mode
Description The control mode of the controller can be selected via the operating mode.
You can select between the following modes:
ƒ V/f characteristic control
ƒ Vector control
Selection of the correct The V/f characteristic control is the classic operating mode for standard
operating mode applications.
When using the vector control you will achieve improved drive features
compared to the V/f characteristic control due to:
ƒ Higher torque via the complete speed range
ƒ Higher speed accuracy and higher concentricity factor
ƒ Higher efficiency
M

MN
nN n
8200vec524
Fig. 6.2−1 Comparison of V/f characteristic control and vector control

V/f characteristic control
Vector control
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.2−1

6 Commissioning
6.2 Selection of the correct operating mode
Recommended operating The frequency inverter is mainly designed for the applications listed in the
modes below table.
The table helps you to select the correct operating mode for your application:
ƒ C0006 = 5: V/f characteristic control with constant Vmin boost
ƒ C0006 = 1: Vector control
Power range 110 ... 400 kW Selection of the operating mode in C0006
Motor cable Motor cable
shielded £ 100 m shielded > 100 m
unshielded £ 200 m unshielded > 200 m
Applications with asynchronous recommended alternatively recommended alternatively
motors
Single drives
Drives with constant load 5 1 5 −
Drives with heavy start 1 5 5 −
conditions
Travelling drives, conveyor belts 5 1 5 −
Pump drives, fan drives 1) 5 − 5 −
Extruder drives 5 1 5 −
Drives for wire drawing 5 1 5 −
machines
Drives for rolling machines 5 1 5 −
Drives for rewinders with 1 5 − −
dancer
(speed−controlled)
Group drives 5 − 5 −
(the resulting motor cable
length is decisive Ires)
l res + Ǹ(i @ (l 1 ) l 2 ) AAA ) l i))
1) A square voltage characteristic (C0014 = 1) is recommended for this application
6.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad 6.3
Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode 6.3.1
6.3 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
6.3.1 Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode
The example describes how to commission a speed control for the controller
with power−related three−phase asynchronous motor.
Switch−on sequence Note
1. Insert the keypad
2. Ensure that the controller is inhibited after
switching on the mains } 59
X5
28
Terminal X5/28 = LOW
(see chapter "Commissioning"
misc008
®"controller inhibit")
3. Ensure that no external error is active Terminal X5/E4 = HIGH
4. Switch on
A The control card is supplied via an external voltage:
Switch on the external DC 24 V supply voltage ON
B The control card is supplied via the internal voltage:
misc002
Switch on the mains. The controller provides the
DC 24 V supply.
5. After approx. 2 s the controller is initialised and the
keypad is in the operating level and displays the dcbBA
current speed (C0051) 0050 00
0.00 Hz
0 %
9371BC004
6. Change to the "Terminal I/O" menu and configure Use C0002 = 0 to restore the Lenze
the function of the control terminals to adapt them setting
to your application. (see chapter "Commissioning"
Lenze setting: C0005 = 1000 (basic configuration ®"Change assignment of the control
"speed control") terminal X5 and X6")
7. For quick commissioning select the menu "Short The submenu "Setup V/f" contains the
setup" dcbBA codes that are required for
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
4 2 commissioning a standard application.
Quick start The digital inputs are configured in the
A Use to change to the menu level Lenze setting:
V/f quick
9371BC007 X5/E1: Deactivate CW rotation/quick
B Use to change to the menu "Short setup" stop
and then to the submenu "Setup V/f" X5/E2: Deactivate CCW rotation/quick
stop
C Use to change to the code level to parameterise X5/E3: Activate fixed setpoint 1 (JOG1)
S T
U V
z dcbBA
X5/E4: Set error message (TRIP SET)
your drive Y Z
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0034 00
y 0
X5/E5: Reset error message (TRIP
AIN1 range
9371BC008 RESET)
(see chapter "Parameter setting")
8. Adapt the controller to the mains (C0173)
Lenze setting: 1 (400 V mains voltage)
9. Only for the variants V060, V110, V270, V300 in the See code table
power range of 110 ... 400 kW:
Adapt the brake transistor threshold (C0174)
Lenze setting: 3 (500 V mains voltage, 885 V brake
voltage)
10. Enter the motor data See motor nameplate and chapter
"Commissioning" ® "Adapt motor
data"
A If you use a Lenze motor: The data of the Lenze motors are saved
Select the motor type connected under C0086. under C0086.
B If you do not use a Lenze motor:
Enter the data of the motor nameplate
l Rated motor power (C0081)
– Lenze setting: device−dependent
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.3−1

6 Commissioning

l Rated motor speed (C0087)
l Rated motor current (C0088) Enter value for the selected motor
– Lenze setting: device−dependent connection method (star/delta)!
l Rated motor frequency (C0089)
l Rated motor voltage (C0090) Enter value for the selected motor
l Motor cosj (C0091)
Uout
11. If required, set a base frequency which differs from Changes in C0086 and C0089 overwrite
100%
the rated motor frequency (C0015) the setting in C0015
Lenze setting: C0015 = C0089 (see chapter "Commissioning"
®"Operating mode" ® "V/f
Umin
characteristic control")
0
0 C0015 f
12. If required, adapt the slip compensation (C0021) Due to changes in C0086, C0087, C0089
Lenze setting: Rated slip in [%] with regard to Nmax the rated slip is recalculated and
in C0011. The value is calculated from the data of automatically entered into C0021
the nameplate and is thus suitable for the majority (see chapter "Commissioning" ®"Slip
of applications. compensation")
13. For protecting the motor, set the current limit Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW:
values "Imax current" (C0022, C0023) For dissipating the regenerative energy,
Guide value £ 2−fold rated motor current use a brake chopper or feedback
module, if necessary
A In motor mode and generator mode (C0022) Power range 110 ... 400 kW:
For dissipating regenerative energy, use
a brake resistor, if necessary
B Additional limitation in generator mode (C0023) (see chapter "Commissioning" ®
Condition: C0023 < C0022 "Motor adjustment" ® "Current limit
values")
14. Set the operating mode "V/f" (C0006) (see chapter "Commissioning"
Lenze setting: 5 (V/f characteristic control) ®"Operating mode" ® "V/f
15. Set the V/f characteristic (C0014) characteristic control")
Lenze setting: 0 (linear characteristic)
A Linear characteristic (C0014 = 0) Uout
C0089
100 %
C0090
Umin
0
0 1 n
nN
B Square−law characteristic (C0014 = 1) Uout

C0089 For applications with e. g. pumps or
100 %
C0090 fans
Umin
0
0 1 n
nN
16. If required, set Umin boost (C0016) C0016 = 1 % corresponds to a boost of

Lenze setting: 0 % 1 % of the rated voltage "Mot voltage"
(C0090)
®"Operating mode" ® "V/f
characteristic control")
17. Set the switching frequency "fchop" (C0018) See chapter "Commissioning" ®
Lenze setting: "Switching frequency of the inverter"
Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW: 6 (8/2 kHz sin)
Power range 110 ... 400 kW: 6 (4/2 kHz sin)
6.3−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode 6.3.1

18. Set your type of the speed feedback system See chapter "Commissioning" ®
"Feedback type" (C0025) "Setting of speed feedback"
Lenze setting: 1 (no feedback)
A When using a TTL encoder:
Select the encoder used under C0025
B When using a TTL encoder with a number of
increments which cannot be set under C0025:
Set C0025 = 100
Enter the number of increments under C0420
C If required, compensate a voltage drop in the
incremental encoder cable. Use C0421 to adjust the
supply voltage for the TTL encoder.
D When using a HTL encoder:
Set C0025 = 101
[n]
19. Set the maximum speed (C0011) C0011
See chapter "Commissioning" ®
Lenze setting: 3000 rpm "Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
stopping"
C0010
0% 100%
20. Set the acceleration time Tir (C0012) C0011

T + t @
ir ir f * f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s 2 1
(see chapter "Commissioning" ®
"Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
f [H z ]
stopping")
C 0 0 1 1
f2
21. Set the deceleration time Tif (C0013) C0011
T + t @
f1 if if f * f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s 0
2 1
t
t ir t if
T ir T if

stopping")
22. If required, set the quick stop deceleration ramp See chapter "Commissioning" ®
(C0105) "Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
Lenze setting: 5.00 s stopping"
23. If required, adapt the fixed setpoints JOG. See code table
A JOG 1 (C0039/1) Activation:
Lenze setting: 1500 rpm X5/E3 = HIGH
B Further fixed setpoints:
JOG 2 (C0039/2) ... JOG 15 (C0039/15)
24. Ensure a powerfail−proof saving of the settings in Code C0003 is the first code in the
one of the four parameter sets (C0003) menu "Setup V/f".
Use C0003 = 1 to save the settings in parameter After switching on the DC 24 V supply
set 1. or mains connection, parameter set 1 is
automatically activated.
25. Switch on the mains if the external DC 24 V supply
voltage is switched on only.
}
26. Enable controller X5 Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
59 28 (see chapter "Commissioning"
misc009 ®"controller inhibit")
27. Enter the setpoint Analog setpoint
selection:
−10 ... +10 V via
potentiometer at X6/1
and X6/2
Fixed speed: JOG 1 is parameterised in C0039/1
Activate JOG 1 with
X5/E3 = HIGH
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.3−3

6 Commissioning

28. The drive is running now CW rotation:
X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = LOW
CCW rotation:
X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = HIGH
If the drive does not start, press in
addition
stopping")
Note!
In the "Diagnostic" menu you can monitor the most important
drive parameters
6.3−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Commissioning example in vector control mode 6.3.2
6.3.2 Commissioning example in vector control mode
The example describes how to commission a speed control for the controller
with power−related three−phase asynchronous motor.
1. Insert the keypad
2. Ensure that the controller is inhibited after
switching on the mains } 59
X5
28
misc008
®"controller inhibit")
3. Ensure that no external error is active Terminal X5/E4 = HIGH
4. Switch on
A The control card is supplied via an external voltage:
Switch on the external DC 24 V supply voltage ON
B The control card is supplied via the internal voltage:
misc002
Switch on the mains. The controller provides the
DC 24 V supply.
5. After approx. 2 s the controller is initialised and the
keypad is in the operating level and displays the dcbBA
current speed (C0051) 0050 00
0.00 Hz
0 %
9371BC004
6. Change to the "Terminal I/O" menu and configure Use C0002 = 0 to restore the Lenze
the function of the control terminals to adapt them setting
to your application. (see chapter "Commissioning"
Lenze setting: C0005 = 1000 (basic configuration ®"Change assignment of the control
"speed control") terminal X5 and X6")
7. For quick commissioning select the menu "Short The submenu "Setup vector" contains
setup" dcbBA the codes that are required for
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
4 2 commissioning a standard application.
Quick start The digital inputs are configured in the
A Use to change to the menu level Lenze setting:
V/f quick
9371BC007 X5/E1: Deactivate CW rotation/quick
B Use to change to the menu "Short setup" stop
and then to the submenu "Setup vector" X5/E2: Deactivate CCW rotation/quick
stop
C Use to change to the code level to parameterise X5/E3: Activate fixed setpoint 1 (JOG1)
S T
U V
z dcbBA
X5/E4: Set error message (TRIP SET)
your drive Y Z
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0034 00
y 0
X5/E5: Reset error message (TRIP
AIN1 range
9371BC008 RESET)
8. Adapt the controller to the mains (C0173)
Lenze setting: 1 (400 V mains voltage)
9. Only for the variants V060, V110, V270, V300 in the See code table
power range of 110 ... 400 kW:
Adapt the brake transistor threshold (C0174)
Lenze setting: 3 (500 V mains voltage, 885 V brake
voltage)
10. Enter the motor data See motor nameplate and chapter
"Commissioning" ® "Adapt motor
data"
A If you use a Lenze motor: The data of the Lenze motors are saved
Select the motor type connected under C0086. under C0086.
B If you do not use a Lenze motor:
Enter the data of the motor nameplate
l Rated motor power (C0081)
l Rated motor speed (C0087)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.3−5

6 Commissioning

l Rated motor current (C0088) Enter value for the selected motor
l Rated motor frequency (C0089)
l Rated motor voltage (C0090) Enter value for the selected motor
l Motor cosj (C0091)
11. For protecting the motor, set the current limit Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW:
values "Imax current" (C0022, C0023) For dissipating the regenerative energy,
Guide value £ 2−fold rated motor current use a brake chopper or feedback
module, if necessary
A In motor mode and generator mode (C0022) Power range 110 ... 400 kW:
For dissipating regenerative energy, use
a brake resistor, if necessary
B Additional limitation in generator mode (C0023) (see chapter "Commissioning" ®
Condition: C0023 < C0022 "Motor adjustment" ® "Current limit
values")
12. If the motor temperature is monitored with a A temperature feedback with KTY has a
thermal sensor KTY: positive effect on the vector control,
Activate the temperature feedback with C0594 since the motor data identification
(fault SD6) considers the temperature influence in
Lenze setting: 3 (switched off) the motor model.
"Motor adjustment")
13. Start the motor data identification "ident run" (see chapter "Commissioning"
(C0148) ®"Adjusting the motor")
A Ensure that the controller inhibit is active
} 59
X5
28
misc008
B Switch on the mains

C Set C0148 = 1
}
D Enable controller X5 Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
59 28 The identification starts:
misc009 l The segment goes off
l "WRK run" is displayed
l The motor is energised and
"whistles"
l The motor does not rotate
E If after approx. 1 ... 2 min the segment is active
again, inhibit the controller } 59
X5
28
The identification is completed. The
misc008
following values have been detected
and entered into the codes:
l Inverter error characteristic
(C1753/xx)
l Rotor resistance "Mot Rr" (C0082)
l Stator resistance "Mot Rs" (C0084)
l Leakage inductance "Mot Lss"
(C0085)
l Stator inductance "Mot Ls" (C0092)
14. Set the operating mode "vector ctrl" (C0006) (see chapter "Commissioning" ®
Lenze setting: 5 (V/f characteristic control) "Operating mode" ® "Vector control")
15. Set the switching frequency "fchop" (C0018) See chapter "Commissioning" ®
Lenze setting: "Switching frequency of the inverter"
Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW: 6 (8/2 kHz sin)
Power range 110 ... 400 kW: 6 (4/2 kHz sin)
16. Set your type of the speed feedback system See chapter "Commissioning" ®
"Feedback type" (C0025) "Setting of speed feedback"
Lenze setting: 1 (no feedback)
A When using a TTL encoder:
Select the encoder used under C0025
6.3−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Commissioning example in vector control mode 6.3.2

B When using a TTL encoder with a number of
increments which cannot be set under C0025:
Set C0025 = 100
C If required, compensate a voltage drop in the
incremental encoder cable. Use C0421 to adjust the
supply voltage for the TTL encoder.
D When using a HTL encoder:
Set C0025 = 101
[n]
17. Set the maximum speed (C0011) C0011
See chapter "Commissioning" ®
Lenze setting: 3000 rpm "Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
stopping"
C0010
0% 100%
18. Set the acceleration time Tir (C0012) C0011

T + t @
ir ir f * f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s 2 1
f [H z ]
stopping")
C 0 0 1 1
f2
19. Set the deceleration time Tif (C0013) C0011
T + t @
f1 if if f * f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s 0
2 1
t
t ir t if
T ir T if

stopping")
20. If required, set the quick stop deceleration ramp See chapter "Commissioning" ®
(C0105) "Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
Lenze setting: 5.00 s stopping"
21. If required, adapt the fixed setpoints JOG. See code table
A JOG 1 (C0039/1) Activation:
Lenze setting: 1500 rpm X5/E3 = HIGH
B Further fixed setpoints:
JOG 2 (C0039/2) ... JOG 15 (C0039/15)
22. Ensure a powerfail−proof saving of the settings in Code C0003 is the first code in the
one of the four parameter sets (C0003) menu "Setup V/f".
Use C0003 = 1 to save the settings in parameter After switching on the DC 24 V supply
set 1. or mains connection, parameter set 1 is
automatically activated.
23. Switch on the mains if the external DC 24 V supply
voltage is switched on only.
}
24. Enable controller X5 Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
59 28 (see chapter "Commissioning"
misc009 ®"controller inhibit")
25. Enter the setpoint Analog setpoint
selection:
−10 ... +10 V via
potentiometer at X6/1
and X6/2
Fixed speed: JOG 1 is parameterised in C0039/1
Activate JOG 1 with
X5/E3 = HIGH
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.3−7

6 Commissioning

26. The drive is running now CW rotation:
X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = LOW
CCW rotation:
X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = HIGH
If the drive does not start, press in
addition
stopping")
Note!
In the "Diagnostic" menu you can monitor the most important
drive parameters
6.3−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Controller inhibit 6.4
6.4 Controller inhibit
Description If the controller inhibit is active, the power outputs are inhibited.
ƒ The drive coasts in zero−torque mode.
ƒ Status display of keypad: Pulse inhibit
ƒ Status display at the controller: The green LED is blinking.
Danger!
Do not use the "controller inhibit" function (DCTRL1−CINH) for
emergency−off. The controller inhibit only inhibits the power
outputs and does not disconnect the controller from the mains!
The drive could start again any time.
Codes for parameter setting
Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0040 Ctrl enable 0 Controller enable
l Controller can only be enabled 6.4−1
if X5/28 = HIGH
0 Ctrl inhibit Controller inhibited
1 Ctrl enable Controller enabled
Activation Via terminal X5/28:

ƒ A LOW level at the terminal inhibits the controller (cannot be inverted)
ƒ A HIGH level re−enables the controller
Via the keys of the keypad (if C0469 = 1):
ƒ inhibits the controller
ƒ re−enables the controller
Via code C0040:
ƒ C0040 = 0 inhibits the controller
ƒ C0040 = 1 re−enables the controller
Note!
ƒ The sources for controller inhibit are ANDed, i.e. the drive only
restarts if the controller inhibit signals of all signal sources
have been eliminated.
ƒ The restart starts with zero speed. If centrifugal masses are
still rotating, this can lead to an overcurrent.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.4−1

Commissioning 6
Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 6.5
Free configuration of digital input signals 6.5.1
6.5 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6
Danger!
If you select a configuration in C0005, the signal assignment of
the inputs and outputs will be overwritten with the
corresponding basic assignment!
ƒ Adapt the signal assignment to your wiring!
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals
Description ƒ Internal digital signals can be freely linked with external digital signal
sources. This serves to establish a freely configurable control of the
drive controller.
– Digital inputs X5/E1 ... X5/E5
ƒ A signal source can be linked with several targets. Ensure reasonable
linkages for not activating functions that are mutually exclusive (e. g.
linking a digital input with quick stop and DC injection braking at the
same time).

C0114 0 High active HIGH level is Inversion of digital input signals at
active X5, function block DIGIN 6.5−1
See System
1 LOW active LOW level is active Manual
1 DIGIN1 pol 0 Terminal X5/E1 (extension)
2 DIGIN2 pol 0 Terminal X5/E2

5 DIGIN6 (ST) pol 0 Terminal X5/ST
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.5−1

6 Commissioning
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals
Linking signals The internal digital signal can be linked with an external signal source by
entering the selection figure of the external signal into the configuration
code of the internal digital signal.
Example
ƒ C0787/2 =53 ð signal source for JOG2 is terminal X5/E3
NSET
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28 NSET-N
X5 C0780
DIGIN-CINH
28 1 C0046
DIGIN1
E1 DMUX
C0114/1...6 DIGIN2 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
E2 NSET-JOG *2 JOG1...15
0 DIGIN3 C0787/2 0
NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
E3 1 DIGIN4 NSET-JOG *8 3 15
1 C0787/4
E4 DIGIN5
DIGIN6
E5
C0443
ST
9300vec105
Fig. 6.5−1 Connecting digital signal JOG2 with terminal X5/E3
Tip!
ƒ A list with all selection figures is included in the chapter
"Configuration" ® "Selection lists".
ƒ For signal linkage we recommend the function block editor in
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/E1 ... X5/E5):

– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
ƒ Response times: 1 ms
Inverting the signal level In C0114 you can define the active signal level (HIGH level active or LOW level
active) for the terminals X5/E1 ... X5/E5.
Example
ƒ C0114/3 =1 ð LOW level at X5/E3 activates JOG2
6.5−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of digital outputs 6.5.2
6.5.2 Free configuration of digital outputs
Description ƒ The digital outputs X5/A1 ... X5/A4 can be freely linked with internal
digital signals.
ƒ One signal source can be linked with several targets.

C0117 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital inputs
signals, function block DIGOUT 6.5−3
A change of the basic See System
Manual
configuration in C0005 changes (extension)
the signal assignment!
1 CFG: DIGOUT1 15000 DCTRL−TRIP Terminal X5/A1
2 CFG: DIGOUT2 10650 CMP1−OUT Terminal X5/A2
3 CFG: DIGOUT3 500 DCTRL−RDY Terminal X5/A3
4 CFG: DIGOUT4 5003 MCTRL−MMAX Terminal X5/A4
C0118 0 High active HIGH level is Inversion of digital output signals,
active function block DIGOUT
1 LOW active LOW level is active
1 DIGOUT1 pol 1 Terminal X5/A1
Linking signals The digital outputs can be linked with internal digital signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into corresponding subcode of C0117.
Example
ƒ C0117/2 = 505 ð signal source for X5/A2 is the status message
"direction of rotation" (DCTRL−CW/CCW)
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/A1 ... X5/A4):
– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
ƒ Response times: 1 ms
Inverting the signal level In C0118 you can define the active signal level (HIGH level active or LOW level
active) for the terminals X5/A1 ... X5/A4.
Example
ƒ C0118/2 =1 ð With LOW level at X5/A2 the motor rotates in CW
direction (with in−phase motor connection)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.5−3

6 Commissioning
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals
Description ƒ Internal analog signals can be freely linked with external analog signal
sources:
– Analog inputs X3/1, X3/2 and X3/3, X3/4

C0026 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 26/1 and
FCODE26/2 6.5−4
See System
1 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN1 (X6/1, X6/2) Manual
2 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN2 (X6/3, X6/4) (extension)
C0027 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 27/1 and
FCODE27/2
1 FCODE (gain) 100.00 Gain AIN1 (X6/1, X6/2)
l 100 % = gain 1
l 100 % = gain 1
C0034 Mst current 0 0 −10 V ... +10 V Voltage / current range for analog 5.5−9
1 4 mA ... 20 mA signals at input X6/1, X6/2
l Observe jumper position of X3 6.5−4
2 −20 mA ... +20 mA
Linking signals The internal analog signals can be linked with an external signal source by
entering the selection figure of the external signal into the configuration
code of the internal analog signal.
Example
ƒ C0780 = 50 ð signal source for the main setpoint (NSET−N) is terminal
X6/1, X6/2
C0034 AIN1
X6 NSET
1 + + AIN1-OUT NSET-N
C0780
2 + +
AIN1-OFFSET C0046
C0402 C0400
C0010 DMUX
C0404/1 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
AIN1-GAIN NSET-JOG *2
C0787/2 0
C0403 NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
NSET-JOG *8 3 15
C0404/2 C0787/4
9300vec106
Fig. 6.5−2 Linking analog signal NSET−N with terminal X6/1, X6/2
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
6.5−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of analog input signals 6.5.3
Adjustment Gain and offset

Set gain (C0027) and offset (C0026) to adapt the input signal to the
application.
Input range of X6/1, X6/2
Input range C0034 Position of jumper at X3
−10 V ... +10 V C0034 = 0 6 5
4 3
2 1
+4 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 1 6 5
4 3
−20 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 2 2 1
Note!
Different settings in C0034 and of X3 result in a wrong input
signal.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.5−5

6 Commissioning
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs
Description ƒ The analog outputs (X6/62, X6/63) can be freely linked with internal
analog process or monitoring signals. The controller outputs a voltage
proportional to the internal signal at the analog outputs.

C0108 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE108/1
and FCODE108/2 6.5−6
See System
1 FCODE (gain) 100.00 Gain of analog output signal Manual
AOUT1 (X6/62) (extension)
l 100 % = gain 1
2 FCODE (gain) 100.00 Gain of analog output signal
AOUT2 (X6/63)
l 100 % = gain 1
and FCODE109/2
1 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of analog output signal
AOUT1 (X6/62)
AOUT2 (X6/63)
Linking signals Analog outputs can be linked with internal analog signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into the code of C0431 (AOUT1, X6/62)
or C0436 (AOUT2, X6/63).
Example
ƒ C0436 = 5006 ð signal source for X6/63 is the actual motor voltage
Tip!
GDC (ESP−GDC2).
Adjustment Set gain (C0108) and offset (C0109) to adapt the output signal to the
application.
With an internal signal of 100 % and a gain of 1, a voltage of 10 V is output
at the terminal.
6.5−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Adjusting the motor 6.6
Entry of motor data 6.6.1
6.6 Adjusting the motor
6.6.1 Entry of motor data
Description The vector control mode requires considerably more motor data than the V/f
characteristic control mode.
Basically all motor data should be entered independent of the operating
mode. This enables the controller to detect further data as e.g. slip
compensation (C0021), maximum torque (C0057), number of motor pole
pairs (C0059) always conclusively and enter them into the corresponding
codes.

C0081 Mot power à 0.01 {0.01 kW} 500.00 Rated motor power
à Change of C0086 resets value
to factory setting
l Change of C0081 sets C0086 =
0
C0086 Mot type à Motor selection list Motor type selection
à depending on the controller 6.6−1
used
l Motor selection in C0086 sets
the corresponding parameters
in C0021, C0022, C0081,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091
C0087 Mot speed à 50 {1 rpm} 36000 Rated motor speed
à depending on C0086 6.6−1
l Motor selection in C0086 set
the corresponding rated motor
speed in C0087
l Change of C0087 sets
C0086 = 0
C0088 Mot current à 0.5 {0.1 A} 1000.0 Rated motor current
current in C0088
0
C0089 Mot frequency à 10 {1 Hz} 5000 Rated motor frequency
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−1

6 Commissioning
6.6.1 Entry of motor data

C0090 Mot voltage à 0 {1 V} 1000 Rated motor voltage
voltage in C0090
0
C0091 Mot cos phi à 0.50 {0.01 } 1.00 Motor cos j
the corresponding motor cos j
in C0091
C0086 = 0
Sequence of the motor data

entry Start entry motor data
no
Does C0086 contain
the motor?
yes
Choose similar motor
in C0086 according to the
criteria circuit configuration
and rated motor power
Operating mode "87 Hz no

delta connection”?
yes
Choose motor in C0086 Enter motor nameplate data:

Enter motor nameplate data:
C0081 = Ö3 x Pr C0081, C0087, C0088, C0089,
C0087 = (Ö3 - 1) n0 + nr C0090, C0091
C0088 = IrD
C0089 = 87 Hz
C0090 = UrD
C0091 = cos j
Entry motor data completed
9300vec096
Fig. 6.6−1 Sequence diagram for motor data entry

PN Rated motor power
n0 Synchronous speed
nN Rated motor speed
IND Rated motor current for delta connection
UND Rated motor voltage for delta connection
6.6−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Entry of motor data 6.6.1
Lenze motor which is included By selecting the motor in C0086 all required motor data are automatically
in C0086
entered into the following codes.
Code Description Code Description
C0022 Limit current for operation in motor mode C0087 Rated motor speed
C0023 Limit current for operation in generator C0088 Rated motor current
mode
C0081 Rated motor power C0089 Rated motor frequency
C0082 Motor rotor resistance C0090 Rated motor voltage
C0084 Motor stator resistance C0091 Power factor cos j
C0085 Motor leakage inductance C0092 Motor stator inductance
Motor of another 1. Select a similar motor in C0086.

manufacturer or a Lenze
motor which is not included in – Selection criteria: Connection method, rated motor power, rated
C0086 motor frequency
2. Enter the motor data of the motor nameplate or data sheet into C0081,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090 and C0091.
Operating mode "87 Hz delta By changing from star to delta connection and changing the base frequency
connection"
(fbase = 87 Hz), the induction machine (fN = 50 Hz) develops Ǡthree times the
power with a frequency of 87 Hz. In the total range the machine runs with
a Ǡ3 times higher delta current, which must be provided by the controller.
Example
A motor with the following data is to be connected in delta connection:
ƒ DSM 50 Hz; D/Y 230/400 V; 18.5 kW; 62/35 A, 1450 min−1, cos j = 0.88
Sequence Note
1. Enter C0086 = 263 Select a motor in C0086, which has a Ǡ3 times
(DXRAXX 180−12−87; 32.4 kW; higher rated motor power with delta connection.
87 Hz)
2. Enter C0087 = 2548 min−1 Consider the slip speed. With a rated motor torque
the slip speed of an asynchronous motor is nearly
constant over the total speed range.
Calculation of the rated motor speed:
C0087 + (Ǹ3 * 1) @ n 0 ) n N
C0087 + (Ǹ3 * 1) @ 1500 min *1 ) 1450 min *1
n0 = synchronous speed
nN = rated motor speed at 50 Hz
3. Enter C0088 = 62 A Rated motor current for delta connection
4. Enter C0090 = 400 V Rated motor voltage for star connection
5. Enter C0089 = 87 Hz Rated motor frequency
6. Enter C0091 = 0.88 Power factor cos j
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−3

6 Commissioning
6.6.2 Motor selection list
Three−phase asynchronous The following table contains all asynchronous motors, which can be selected
motors
via C0086.
The "reference list of asynchronous motors" contains the asynchronous
motors, the data of which must be entered manually. ( 6.6−6)
0 1
9300VEC058
Fig. 6.6−2 Nameplate of a Lenze motor
Lenze type C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Temperature sensor
PN nN Ir [A] fN [Hz] UN [V]
[kW] [rpm]
9 DSGA56−22−100 SDSGA056−22−100 0.24 2790 0.8 100 390 Asynchronous KTY
inverter − motor
(Star connection)
10 MDSKA56−140 MDSKAXX056−22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
11 MDFKA71−120 MDFKAXX071−22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
12 MDSKA71−140 MDSKAXX071−22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
13 MDFKA80−60 MDFKAXX080−22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
14 MDSKA80−70 MDSKAXX080−22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
15 MDFKA80−120 MDFKAXX080−22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
16 MDSKA80−140 MDSKAXX080−22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
17 MDFKA90−60 MDFKAXX090−22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
18 MDSKA90−80 MDSKAXX090−22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
19 MDFKA90−120 MDFKAXX090−22 6.90 3480 15.8 120
20 MDSKA90−140 MDSKAXX090−22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
21 MDFKA100−60 MDFKAXX100−22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
22 MDSKA100−80 MDSKAXX100−22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
23 MDFKA100−120 MDFKAXX100−22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
24 MDSKA100−140 MDSKAXX100−22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330 Asynchronous servo
KTY
motor
25 MDFKA112−60 MDFKAXX112−22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
26 MDSKA112−85 MDSKAXX112−22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
27 MDFKA112−120 MDFKAXX112−22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
28 MDSKA112−140 MDSKAXX112−22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
30 DFQA100−50 MDFQAXX100−22 10.60 1420 26.5 50
31 DFQA100−100 MDFQAXX100−22 20.30 2930 46.9 100
32 DFQA112−28 MDFQAXX112−22 11.50 760 27.2 28
33 DFQA112−58 MDFQAXX112−22 22.70 1670 49.1 58
34 DFQA132−20 MDFQAXX132−32 17.00 555 45.2 20 360
35 DFQA132−42 MDFQAXX132−32 35.40 1200 88.8 42
40 DFQA112−50 MDFQAXX112−22 20.10 1425 43.7 50
41 DFQA112−100 MDFQAXX112−22 38.40 2935 81.9 100
42 DFQA132−36 MDFQAXX132−32 31.10 1035 77.4 36
43 DFQA132−76 MDFQAXX132−32 60.10 2235 144.8 76 340
6.6−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor selection list 6.6.2
[kW] [rpm]
210 DXRAXX071−12−50 DXRAXX071−12 0.25 1410 0.9
211 DXRAXX071−22−50 DXRAXX071−22 0.37 1398 1.2
212 DXRAXX080−12−50 DXRAXX080−12 0.55 1400 1.7
213 DXRAXX080−22−50 DXRAXX080−22 0.75 1410 2.3
214 DXRAXX090−12−50 DXRAXX090−12 1.10 1420 2.7
215 DXRAXX090−32−50 DXRAXX090−32 1.50 1415 3.6
216 DXRAXX100−22−50 DXRAXX100−22 2.20 1425 4.8
Asynchronous
217 DXRAXX100−32−50 DXRAXX100−32 3.00 1415 6.6 50 400 inverter − motor Thermal contact
218 DXRAXX112−12−50 DXRAXX112−12 4.00 1435 8.3 (Star connection)
219 DXRAXX132−12−50 DXRAXX132−12 5.50 1450 11.0

220 DXRAXX132−22−50 DXRAXX132−22 7.50 1450 14.6
221 DXRAXX160−12−50 DXRAXX160−12 11.00 1460 21.0
222 DXRAXX160−22−50 DXRAXX160−22 15.00 1460 27.8
223 DXRAXX180−12−50 DXRAXX180−12 18.50 1470 32.8
224 DXRAXX180−22−50 DXRAXX180−22 22.00 1456 38.8
225 30kW−ASM−50 ˘ 30.00 1470 52.0
226 37kW−ASM−50 ˘ 37.00 1470 66.0
227 45kW−ASM−50 ˘ 45.00 1480 82.0 Asynchronous
50 400 inverter − motor ˘
228 55kW−ASM−50 ˘ 55.00 1480 93.0 (Star connection)
229 75kW−ASM−50 ˘ 75.00 1480 132.0
230 75kW−ASM−50 ˘ 90.00 1480 132.0
250 DXRAXX071−12−87 DXRAXX071−12 0.43 2525 1.5
251 DXRAXX071−22−87 DXRAXX071−22 0.64 2515 2.0
252 DXRAXX080−12−87 DXRAXX080−12 0.95 2515 2.9
253 DXRAXX080−22−87 DXRAXX080−22 1.3 2525 4.0
254 DXRAXX090−12−87 DXRAXX090−12 2.0 2535 4.7
255 DXRAXX090−32−87 DXRAXX090−32 2.7 2530 6.2
256 DXRAXX100−22−87 DXRAXX100−22 3.9 2535 8.3
Asynchronous
257 DXRAXX100−32−87 DXRAXX100−32 5.35 2530 11.4 87 400 inverter − motor Thermal contact
258 DXRAXX112−12−87 DXRAXX112−12 7.10 2545 14.3 (Delta connection)
259 DXRAXX132−12−87 DXRAXX132−12 9.7 2555 19.1

260 DXRAXX132−22−87 DXRAXX132−22 13.2 2555 25.4
261 DXRAXX160−12−87 DXRAXX160−12 19.3 2565 36.5
262 DXRAXX160−22−87 DXRAXX160−22 26.4 2565 48.4
263 DXRAXX180−12−87 DXRAXX180−12 32.4 2575 57.8
264 DXRAXX180−22−87 DXRAXX180−22 38.7 2560 67.4
265 30kW−ASM−87 ˘ 52.00 2546 90.0
266 37kW−ASM−87 ˘ 64.00 2546 114.0
267 45kW−ASM−87 ˘ 78.00 2563 142.0 Asynchronous
87 400 inverter − motor ˘
268 55kW−ASM−87 ˘ 95.00 2563 161.0 (Delta connection)
269 75kW−ASM−87 ˘ 130.00 2563 228.0
270 90kW−ASM−87 ˘ 156.00 2590 277.0
410 MDXMAXM−071−12−50 MDXMAXM−071−12 0.25 1400 0.82 50 400
411 MDXMAXM−071−32−50 MDXMAXM−071−32 0.37 1400 1.20 50 400
412 MDXMAXM−080−12−50 MDXMAXM−080−12 0.55 1400 1.60 50 400
413 MDXMAXM−080−32−50 MDXMAXM−080−32 0.75 1380 2.00 50 400
Asynchronous
414 MDXMAXM−090−12−50 MDXMAXM−090−12 1.10 1410 2.60 50 400 inverter − motor Thermal contact
415 MDXMAXM−090−32−50 MDXMAXM−090−32 1.50 1420 3.50 50 400 (Star connection)
416 MDXMAXM−100−12−50 MDXMAXM−100−12 2.20 1400 5.60 50 400

417 MDXMAXM−100−32−50 MDXMAXM−100−32 3.00 1400 7.30 50 400
418 MDXMAXM−112−22−50 MDXMAXM−112−22 4.00 1430 8.50 50 400
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−5

6 Commissioning
[kW] [rpm]
440 MDXMAXM−071−12−87 MDXMAXM−071−12 0.43 2510 1.40 87 400
441 MDXMAXM−071−32−87 MDXMAXM−071−32 0.64 2510 2.10 87 400
442 MDXMAXM−080−12−87 MDXMAXM−080−12 0.95 2510 2.80 87 400
443 MDXMAXM−080−32−87 MDXMAXM−080−32 1.30 2490 3.50 87 400
444 MDXMAXM−090−12−87 MDXMAXM−090−12 2.00 2520 4.50 87 400
445 MDXMAXM−090−32−87 MDXMAXM−090−32 2.70 2530 6.10 87 400 Asynchronous
inverter − motor Thermal contact
446 MDXMAXM−100−12−87 MDXMAXM−100−12 3.90 2510 9.70 87 400 (Delta connection)
447 MDXMAXM−100−32−87 MDXMAXM−100−32 5.40 2510 12.70 87 400
448 MDXMAXM−112−22−87 MDXMAXM−112−22 7.10 2540 14.80 87 400
449 MDXMAXM−112−32−50 MDXMAXM−112−32 5.50 1440 12.50 50 400
450 MDXMAXM−132−22−50 MDXMAXM−132−22 7.50 1460 16.80 50 400
451 MDXMAXM−132−32−50 MDXMAXM−132−32 9.20 1450 19.50 50 400
Reference list of The motors listed under "motor nameplate" are not available in
asynchronous motors
Global Drive Control (GDC) and the device software.
1. Enter the corresponding value listed under C0086 into the code C0086.
2. Compare the codes for the motor data with the values in the table.
– If necessary, adapt the values in the controller to the values in the
table.
3. If necessary, optimise the dynamic behaviour of your machine via the
codes C0070 and C0071.
Information on the motor Motor data
nameplate
Field C0086 C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
C86 Type Imax Pr Rs Ls nN IN fr Ur cos j Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1006 MDXMAxx−071−12 210 1.28 0.25 39.90 157.20 1355 0.85 50 400 0.70 6 300 3.6 2
1007 MDXMAxx−071−12 250 2.25 0.47 39.90 157.20 2475 1.50 87 400 0.66 6 300 2 2
1008 MDXMAxx−071−32 211 1.73 0.37 25.03 122.60 1345 1.15 50 400 0.74 6 300 3.4 2
1009 MDXMAxx−071−32 251 3.00 0.67 25.03 122.60 2470 2.00 87 400 0.70 6 300 2.5 2
1010 MDXMAxx−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1370 1.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 3.2 2
1011 MDXMAxx−080−12 252 3.90 1.00 20.69 89.00 2480 2.60 87 400 0.73 6 300 1.6 2
1012 MDXMAxx−080−32 213 2.85 0.75 11.69 65.20 1390 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 3.5 2
1013 MDXMAxx−080−32 253 4.95 1.35 11.69 65.20 2510 3.30 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.9 3
1014 MDXMAxx−090−12 214 3.90 1.10 10.01 40.20 1405 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 2.5 2
1015 MDXMAxx−090−12 254 6.75 2.00 10.01 40.20 2520 4.50 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1016 MDXMAxx−090−32 215 5.25 1.50 5.85 28.80 1410 3.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 2 2
1017 MDXMAxx−090−32 255 9.15 2.70 5.85 28.80 2525 6.10 87 400 0.76 6 300 1 2
1018 MDXMAxx−100−12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1019 MDXMAxx−100−12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.76 6 300 0.8 1.5
1020 MDXMAxx−100−32 217 9.75 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.50 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1021 MDXMAxx−100−32 257 17.10 5.40 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.4 1.8
1022 MDXMAxx−112−22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1023 MDXMAxx−112−22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.83 6 300 1 2
1024 MDXMAxx−132−12 219 16.50 5.50 0.86 13.00 1450 11.00 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 2
1025 MDXMAxx−132−12 259 28.65 9.70 0.86 13.00 2555 19.10 87 400 0.83 6 300 1.3 2
1026 MDXMAxx−132−22 220 21.90 7.50 0.80 11.00 1450 14.60 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 2
1027 MDXMAxx−132−22 260 38.10 13.20 0.80 11.00 2555 25.40 87 400 0.84 6 300 0.95 1.8
1028 MDXMAxx−160−22 221 31.50 11.00 0.50 7.00 1460 21.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.9 2.2
1029 MDXMAxx−160−22 261 54.75 19.30 0.50 7.00 2565 36.50 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1030 MDXMAxx−160−32 222 41.70 15.00 0.40 5.50 1460 27.80 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.7 2.5
1031 MDXMAxx−160−32 262 72.60 26.40 0.40 5.50 2565 48.40 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 1.8
6.6−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor selection list 6.6.2

nameplate
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1032 MDXMAxx−180−12 223 49.20 18.50 0.40 4.00 1470 32.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1.4 1.7
1033 MDXMAxx−180−12 263 86.70 32.40 0.40 4.00 2575 57.80 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.7
1034 MDXMAxx−180−22 224 58.20 22.00 0.20 3.80 1456 38.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1 1.5
1035 MDXMAxx−180−22 264 101.1 38.70 0.20 3.80 2560 67.40 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.5
1036 MDXMAXM−63−12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1037 MDXMAXM−63−12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1038 MDXMAXM−63−32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1039 MDXMAXM−63−32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1040 MDXMAXM−112−32 219 18.75 5.50 0.86 7.20 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1041 MDXMAXM−112−32 259 32.55 9.60 0.86 7.20 2550 21.70 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1042 MDXMAXM−132−22 220 25.20 7.50 0.54 4.80 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1043 MDXMAXM−132−22 260 43.80 13.10 0.54 4.80 2570 29.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1044 MDXMAXM−132−32 221 29.25 9.20 0.46 4.70 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1045 MDXMAXM−132−32 261 50.70 16.00 0.46 4.70 2560 33.80 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1046 MDXMAXM−160−22 260 31.50 11.00 1.27 18.97 1466 21.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1047 MDXMAXM−160−32 260 42.30 15.00 0.87 14.28 1466 28.20 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1048 MDXMAXM−180−22 260 54.60 18.50 0.40 4.00 1440 36.40 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1049 MDXMAXM−180−32 260 66.15 22.00 0.20 3.80 1465 44.10 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1050 MDXMAXM−200−32 260 90.00 30.00 0.17 3.50 1455 60.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1051 MDXMAXM−225−12 260 108.0 37.00 0.15 2.00 1460 72.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1052 MDXMAXM−225−22 260 128.25 45.00 0.15 2.00 1475 85.50 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1053 MDXMAXM−063−11 210 1.43 0.18 51.00 273.7 2760 0.95 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1054 MDXMAXM−063−31 210 1.65 0.25 33.00 93.4 2760 1.10 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1055 MDXMAXM−071−11 211 1.50 0.37 22.50 90.2 2840 1.00 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1056 MDXMAXM−071−31 212 2.25 0.55 16.90 62.9 2840 1.50 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1057 MDXMAXM−080−11 213 2.85 0.75 11.36 47.4 2850 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1058 MDXMAXM−080−31 214 4.20 1.10 6.86 33.4 2810 2.80 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1059 MDXMAXM−090−11 215 4.80 1.50 5.10 22.2 2840 3.20 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1060 MDXMAXM−090−31 216 7.20 2.20 3.20 14.5 2840 4.80 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1061 MDXMAXM−100−31 217 9.30 3.00 1.81 10.7 2850 6.20 50 400 0.88 6 300 1.5 10
1062 MDXMAXM−100−41 218 12.75 4.00 1.45 8.6 2830 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1063 MDXMAXM−112−31 250 18.30 5.50 3.10 17 2890 12.20 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1064 MDXMAXM−112−41 250 23.25 7.50 1.96 12 2900 15.50 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1065 MDXMAXM−132−21 250 28.05 9.00 1.41 11.292 2925 18.70 50 400 0.89 6 300 1.5 10
1066 MDXMAXM−071−13 210 1.13 0.18 58.93 342 870 0.75 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1067 MDXMAXM−071−13 250 1.95 0.31 58.93 342 1610 1.30 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1068 MDXMAXM−071−33 210 1.50 0.25 37.90 116.8 920 1.00 50 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1069 MDXMAXM−071−33 250 2.55 0.43 37.90 116.8 1660 1.70 87 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1070 MDXMAXM−080−13 211 2.10 0.37 28.00 112.7 900 1.40 50 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1071 MDXMAXM−080−13 251 3.60 0.64 28.00 112.7 1640 2.40 87 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1072 MDXMAXM−080−33 212 2.85 0.55 16.60 78.6 900 1.90 50 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1073 MDXMAXM−080−33 252 4.95 0.95 16.60 78.6 1640 3.30 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1078 MDFMAxx−250−22 224 147.75 55.00 0.04 1.92 1475 98.50 50 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1079 MDFMAxx−250−22 264 255.90 95.00 0.04 1.92 2585 170.60 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1080 MDEBAXM−063−12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1081 MDEBAXM−063−12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1082 MDEBAXM−063−32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1083 MDEBAXM−063−32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1084 MDEBAXM−071−12 210 1.35 0.25 39.90 157.20 1390 0.90 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.6 2
1085 MDEBAXM−071−12 250 2.34 0.43 39.90 157.20 2500 1.56 87 400 0.64 6 300 2 2
1086 MDEBAXM−071−32 211 1.95 0.37 25.03 122.60 1380 1.30 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.4 2
1087 MDEBAXM−071−32 251 3.38 0.64 25.03 122.60 2490 2.25 87 400 0.64 6 300 2.5 2
1088 MDEBAXM−080−12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1400 1.60 50 400 0.68 6 300 3.2 2
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−7

6 Commissioning

nameplate
[A] [kW] [W] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1089 MDEBAXM−080−12 252 4.16 0.95 20.69 89.00 2510 2.77 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.6 2
1090 MDEBAXM−080−32 213 3.00 0.75 11.69 65.20 1400 2.00 50 400 0.72 6 300 3.5 2
1091 MDEBAXM−080−32 253 5.20 1.30 11.69 65.20 2510 3.46 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.9 3
1092 MDEBAXM−090−12 214 4.05 1.10 6.40 37.00 1420 2.70 50 400 0.77 6 300 2.5 2
1093 MDEBAXM−090−12 254 7.05 2.00 6.40 37.00 2535 4.70 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1094 MDEBAXM−090−32 215 5.40 1.50 4.80 26.00 1415 3.60 50 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1095 MDEBAXM−090−32 255 9.30 2.70 4.80 26.00 2530 6.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1 2
1096 MDEBAXM−100−12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1097 MDEBAXM−100−12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.80 6 300 0.8 1.5
1098 MDEBAXM−100−32 217 9.90 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.60 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1099 MDEBAXM−100−32 257 17.10 5.35 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.4 1.8
1100 MDEBAXM−112−22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1101 MDEBAXM−112−22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.82 6 300 1 2
1102 MDEBAXM−112−32 219 17.85 5.50 2.71 21.40 1425 11.90 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1114 MDFMAxx−200−32 224 83.25 30.00 ˘ ˘ 1465 55.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1115 MDFMAxx−200−32 264 145.50 52.00 ˘ ˘ 2575 97.00 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
6.6−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact 6.6.3
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact
Description PTC resistors according to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082 can be connected via
the terminal inputs T1 and T2. The motor temperature is measured and
integrated into the drive monitoring.
A thermal contact (NC contact) can also be connected to T1 and T2. Lenze
three−phase AC motors provide thermal contacts as default.
When using motors equipped with PTC resistors or thermostats, we
recommend to always activate the PTC input. This prevents the motor from
being destroyed by overheating.
Stop!
ƒ The motor temperature monitoring may only be connected to
T1, T2 if the cable is terminated with a PTC or thermal contact
(NC contact) on the motor side.
– An "open" cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults on
the drive controller.
– Input signals at T1, T2 are processed with a delay of 2 s.
ƒ The drive controller can only evaluate one PTC resistor! Do not
connect several PTC resistors in series or in parallel:
– The motor temperature would be measured incorrectly.
– The motors could be destroyed by overheating.
ƒ If you operated several motors on a drive controller, use
thermal contacts (NC contacts) for motor temperature
monitoring and connect these in series.
ƒ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation must be installed.

C0585 MONIT OH8 3 0 TRIP Configuration of motor
temperature monitoring 6.6−9
2 Warning l Temperature monitoring via See System
Manual
3 Off PTC input (T1, T2) (extension)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−9

6 Commissioning
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact
Activation
Note!
ƒ In the Lenze setting the motor temperature monitoring is
switched off!
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, the monitoring must
be activated separately in each parameter set!
1. Connect the monitoring circuit of the motor to T1 and T2.
– With 1.6kW < R < 4kW, the monitoring responds.
2. Set the controller reaction:
– C0585 = 3: Temperature monitoring of the motor is switched off.
– C0585 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: OH8 )
– C0585 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: OH8 !)
Function test Connect the PTC input with a fixed resistor:
ƒ R>4kW: The fault message OH8 must be activated.
ƒ R<1kW: Fault message must not be activated.
6.6−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor temperature monitoring with KTY 6.6.4
6.6.4 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY
Description Via the incremental encoder connection X8 a KTY resistor can be connected
to pin X8/5 and X8/8. The motor temperature is detected and integrated in
the drive monitoring.
The KTY resistor is monitored with regard to interruption and short circuit.
We recommend to always activate the KTY input when using motors which
are equipped with KTY resistors. This serves to prevent the motor from being
destroyed by overheating.
Stop!
ƒ The controller can only evaluate one KTY resistor! Do not
connect several KTY resistors in series or parallel:
– The motor temperature would be measured incorrectly.
– The motors could be destroyed by overheating.
ƒ If several motors are operated on one controller, use thermal
contacts (NC contacts) connected in series for motor
temperature monitoring.
ƒ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation must be installed.

C0121 OH7 limit 150 45 {1 °C} 150 Setting of the operating
temperature for monitoring OH7 6.6−11
l Only for KTY at X8 See System
Manual
l Monitoring OH7 is configured (extension)
in C0584
temperature monitoring with 6.6−11
fixed operating temperature See System
2 Warning Manual
l Only for KTY at X8
(extension)
l The operating temperature is
3 Off fixed at 150 °C
C0584 MONIT OH7 3 2 Warning Configuration of monitoring

motor temperature with variable 6.6−11
operating temperature See System
Manual
3 Off (extension)
l When reaching the
temperature set in C0121 the
warning OH7 is activated
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−11

6 Commissioning

C0594 MONIT SD6 3 0 TRIP Activation of the motor
temperature monitoring with KTY 6.6−11
at X8 See System
Manual
l Use C0594 = 0 or 2 to activate
(extension)
monitoring
l In case of a short circuit or
2 Warning
interruption at X8/5 and X8/8
the fault message SD6 is
activated
l Configuration of the response
when exceeding the motor
3 Off temperature
– Fixed operating temperature
in C0583
– Variable operating
temperature in C0584
C1190 Motor PTC 0 Temperature characteristic for PTC
selection thermistors 6.6−11
l Selection of the characteristic
for PTC thermistors at X7 or X8
for detecting the motor
temperature
0 Standard Characteristic for PTC thermistors
in Lenze motors
1 Characteristic Characteristic for
application−specific PTC
thermistors
C1191 Temperature 0 {1 °C} 255 Temperature range for PTC
characteristic thermistors
l Define temperature points on
the characteristic for PTC
thermistors
1 Temperature 1 100 Temperature point 1
C1192 Resistance 0 {1 W} 3000 Resistance characteristic for PTC
l Define resistance points on the
characteristic for PTC
thermistors
1 Resistance 1 1670 Resistance point 1
6.6−12 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor temperature monitoring with KTY 6.6.4
Activation
Note!
ƒ In the Lenze setting, the motor temperature monitoring is
switched off!
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, the monitoring must
be activated separately in each parameter set!
Use C0594 = 0 or C0594 = 2 to activate the motor temperature monitoring
via X8. In addition, the connection is monitored for short circuit and
interruption.
1. Connecting the monitoring circuit of the motor to X8/5 and X8/8.
2. Setting controller reaction to short circuit or interruption of the
connection:
– C0594 = 3: Monitoring is switched off.
– C0594 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: Sd6 )
– C0594 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: Sd6 !)
Adjustment Monitoring with a fixed operating temperature (150 °C)
1. Set response of the controller:
– C0583 = 3: temperature monitoring of the motor switched off.
– C0583 = 0: TRIP error message (keypad display: OH3 )
– C0583 = 2: warning signal (keypad display: OH3 !)
Monitoring with a variable operating temperature (45...150 °C)
1. Set the operating temperature in C0121.
2. Set response of the controller:
– C0584 = 3: temperature monitoring of the motor switched off.
– C0584 = 2: warning signal (keypad display: OH7 !)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−13

6 Commissioning
Adjustment of KTY operating The temperature and resistance range can be adapted to the KTY used.
range
ƒ C1190 = 0: Fixed operating range for KTY in Lenze motors (Lenze
setting)
ƒ C1190 = 1: Adjustable operating range
R [O h m ]
a
R 2
(C 1 1 9 2 /2 )
R 1
(C 1 1 9 2 /1 )
T 1 T 2 T [° C ]
(C 1 1 9 1 /1 ) (C 1 1 9 1 /2 )
Fig. 6.6−3 Setting of the operating range for the KTY (C1190 = 1)
The operating range is specified by means of limit values and is in the almost
linear section of the graph (a). The operating values are determined by
interpolation.
C1191/1 Setting of the lower and upper temperature value (T1, T2)
C1191/2 corresponding to the KTY used.
C1192/1 Setting of the lower and upper resistance value corresponding to
C1192/2 the KTY used.
6.6−14 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Current limits 6.6.5
6.6.5 Current limits
Description The controllers are provided with a current limit value control which
determines the dynamic behaviour under load. The resulting utilisation is
compared to the current limit value set under C0022 for motor load and
under C0023 for generator load. If the current limit values are exceeded, the
controller changes its dynamic behaviour.
Controller performance when Motor overload during acceleration:

a limit value is reached
The controller extends the acceleration ramp.
Generator overload during deceleration:
The controller extends the deceleration ramp.
With increasing load and constant speed:
ƒ When the current limit of the motor mode is reached:
– The controller reduces the speed up to 0min−1 .
– The controller cancels the change of the speed if the load falls below
the limit value again.
ƒ When the current limit in the generator mode is reached:
– The controller increases the speed up to the maximum speed
(C0011).
ƒ If a sudden load is built up at the motor shaft (e. g. the drive is blocked),
the overcurrent disconnection can respond (fault message OCx).

C0022 Imax current à 0 {0.1 A} − Imax limit in motor mode
C0023 Imax gen. à 0 {0.1 A} − Imax limit in generator mode
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−15

6 Commissioning
6.6.6 Automatic collection of motor data
Adjustment ƒ Set the acceleration and deceleration times so that the drive can follow
the speed profile without reaching Imax of the controller.
ƒ A correct current control during operation in generator mode is only
possible with an external brake resistor.
ƒ Drive behaviour with motor or generator overload (C0054 > C0022 or
C0023):
– The controller reduces the speed up to 0min−1 .
ƒ When operating with switching frequency > 2 kHz, C0022 and C0023
must be adapted to the permissible output currents (derating).
ƒ A correct current control (C0075, C0076) in generator mode is only
possible with a connected brake resistor or in DC bus connection with
energy exchange.
Description The motor data identification serves to detect the required motor data and
influences of the motor cable.
Before executing the identification you must manually enter the motor data
from the motor nameplate into the corresponding codes.
Vector control (C0006 = 1)
In the vector control mode the motor data identification must be executed
before initial commissioning.
ƒ In case of vector control without temperature feedback, the heating of
the motor in the motor model is not taken into consideration.
ƒ In case of vector control with thermal sensor KTY a motor temperature
of 20 °C in the motor model is considered.
Important: The temperature feedback must be activated (C0594 = 0 or
C0594 = 2) before you execute the motor data identification.
V/f characteristic control (C0006 = 5)
In the Lenze setting, the controllers are defined for a power−adapted motor
with 10m of motor cable. Therefore the motor data identification is not
essential.
ƒ The identification of the motor data also influences the smooth
running behaviour. When identifying the motor data for this operating
mode, you can optimise the smooth running behaviour at low speeds.
6.6−16 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Automatic collection of motor data 6.6.6

C0084 Mot Rs à 0.00 {0.01 mW} 100000. Motor stator resistance
00 à Value is determined by motor 6.6−1
parameter identification
(C0148, C0149) 6.6−16
C0087 Mot speed à 50 {1 rpm} 36000 Rated motor speed
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
C0088 Mot current à 0.5 {0.1 A} 1000.0 Rated motor current
current in C0088
0
C0089 Mot frequency à 10 {1 Hz} 5000 Rated motor frequency
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
C0090 Mot voltage à 0 {1 V} 1000 Rated motor voltage
voltage in C0090
0
C0091 Mot cos phi à 0.50 {0.01 } 1.00 Motor cos j
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0092 Mot Ls à 0.00 {0.01 mH} 6553.50 Motor stator inductance
à Value is determined by motor 6.6−1
parameter identification from
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
à Motor selection in C0086 sets
corresponding stator
inductance value in C0092
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−17

6 Commissioning

C0148 ident run 0 0 WRK Ready Motor data identification
stop 1. Inhibit controller, wait until 6.6−16
drive has stopped
2. Enter the correct values of the
motor nameplate into C0087,
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
3. Set C0148 = 1, confirm with
"
4. Enable controller
1 WRK run Start identification The identification
– starts, goes off. The
motor "whistles" but does
not rotate!
– lasts approx. 1 ... 2 min
– is completed when is lit
again
5. Inhibit controller:
C0149 Auto ident 0 0 Id Automatic identification is Automatic motor data
inactive inactive identification 6.6−16
1. Inhibit controller, wait until
drive has stopped
1 Id active Automatic identification is motor nameplate into C0087,
active C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
l The identification starts 3. Set C0149 = 1, confirm with
automatically after "
controller enable 4. Enable controller
l After a faulty The identification
identification, the process – starts, goes off. The
is restarted after TRIP motor "whistles" but does
RESET or mains switching not rotate!
and subsequent – lasts approx. 1 ... 2 min
controller enable – is completed when is lit
again
6.6−18 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Automatic collection of motor data 6.6.6
Adjustment The identification is only executed for the parameter set which is activated
at the moment:
ƒ If you want to identify the motor data for another parameter set, you
must switch to this parameter set and restart the identification.
Note!
ƒ During the identification the motor is supplied with current.
The motor does not rotate.
ƒ The load machine can remain to be connected. Existing
holding brakes can be kept in the braking position.
ƒ If the motor is idling, a small phase offset may occur at the
motor shaft.
1. Enter C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090 and C0091 of your motor (see
nameplate):
– It is vital to enter the correct values since these entries influence
important parameters such as slip compensation and no−load
current.
– Enter the values according to the connection method (star or delta)
for the rated motor current (C0088) and rated motor voltage (C0090).
Manual motor data 1. Inhibit the controller. Wait until drive stands still.
identification (C0148)
2. Select C0148 = 1, confirm with ".
3. Enable the controller. The identification starts.
– The green LED at the controller is blinking very fast.
– "WRK run" is displayed at the keypad.
– The rotor resistance is calculated and saved in C0082.
– The motor stator resistance is detected and saved in C0084.
– The motor leakage inductance is measured and saved in C0085.
– The inverter compensation characteristic is calculated from the
measured motor stator resistance and saved in C1751/1 ... C1751/17.
– The motor stator inductance is calculated from the entered data and
saved in C0092.
– The identification takes approx. 1 ... 2 min (dependent on the rated
motor power).
– The identification is completed when the green LED at the controller
is lit (keypad, GDC: is active).
4. Inhibit the controller.
If the motor data identification has been completed incorrectly
If the identification is incorrect, the fault ID1 or ID2 is displayed.
ƒ If the motor data identification is incorrect, the process must be
repeated from step 2.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.6−19

6 Commissioning
Automatic motor data The automatic motor data identification is suitable for standard and
identification (C0149)
replacement devices which are pre−parameterised in the workshop and
commissioned on site:
ƒ Enter the motor data of the motor nameplate, set C0149 = 1 and save
the settings.
ƒ The motor data identification is started with the first controller enable.
After a successful identification the settings are automatically saved in
the parameter set 1.
1. Inhibit controller (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Switch on the mains.
3. Select a Lenze motor under C0086 or enter motor data of the
nameplate.
4. If required, select C0149 = 1 and confirm with ".
5. Enable the controller. The identification starts.
– The green LED at the controller is blinking very fast.
– "WRK run" is displayed at the keypad.
– The rotor resistance is calculated and saved in C0082.
– The motor stator resistance is detected and saved in C0084.
– The motor leakage inductance is measured and saved in C0085.
– The inverter compensation characteristic is calculated from the
measured motor stator resistance and saved in C1751/1 ... C1751/17.
– The motor stator inductance is calculated from the entered data and
saved in C0092.
– The identification takes approx. 1 ... 2 min (dependent on the rated
motor power).
– The identification is completed when the green LED at the controller
is lit (keypad, GDC: is active).
– Controller is inhibited.
– If required, select C0149 = 0 and confirm with ". The automatic
motor data identification is deactivated.
6. Inhibit the controller.
If the motor data identification has been completed incorrectly
If the identification is incorrect, the fault ID or ID is displayed.
1. Acknowledge fault with TRIP RESET or switch the mains.
2. Enable the controller. The identification restarts.
6.6−20 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Setting the speed feedback 6.7
6.7 Setting the speed feedback
Description For speed monitoring, the feedback signal via incremental encoder can
either be supplied via input X8 or X9.
ƒ At input X8 you can only attach an incremental encoder with
TTL−levels.
ƒ Incremental encoders with HTL−level can only be connected to input
X9.
The incremental encoder signal can be output for slaves at the digital
frequency output X10.
The master frequency input (DFIN) and master frequency output (DFOUT)
are described in the chapter "Function library".
Note!
You can use maximally two of the three interfaces X8, X9, X10 at
the same time. This may lead to the fact that the incremental
encoder input cannot be activated or the master frequency input
or master frequency output does not work.
ƒ This does not apply if the input signal at X8 or X9 is directly
output to master frequency output X10 (C0540 = 4 or 5).
ƒ To deactivate the master frequency input, the internal signal
connection of function block DFIN to the following function
block must be removed. Remove the function block DFIN from
the processing table.

C0025 Feedback type 1 Speed feedback
1 no feedback No feedback 6.7−1
100 IT (C420) − X8 Input of the Incremental encoder at X8
number of l Incremental encoders with TTL
increments in level can only be connected to
C0420 X8.
number of l Connect incremental encoders
increments in with HTL−level on X9 only
C0420
Number of Incremental encoder at X8
increments: l Incremental encoders with TTL
110 IT512−5V 512 inc level can only be connected to
X8.
111 IT1024−5V 1024 inc
112 IT2048−5V 2048 inc
113 IT4096−5V 4096 inc
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.7−1

6 Commissioning
6.7 Setting the speed feedback

C0420 Encoder const 512 1 {1 inc/rev} 8192 Number of increments for
incremental encoder at X8 or X9 6.7−1
l Connect incremental encoders
with HTL−level on X9 only
C0421 Enc voltage 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Supply voltage for the incremental
encoder at X8
CAUTION! A wrong entry can
destroy the incremental encoder!
On X8, only incremental encoders with TTL level can be operated. Wiring
diagram and pin assignment of X8 are described in chapter "Wiring of the
standard device" ® "Wiring of the feedback system".
Activation ƒ C0025 = 100. In addition, you have to set the number of increments in
C0420.
ƒ C0025 = 110, 111, 112 or 113. The number of increments (512, 1024,
2048 or 4096) is automatically set.
Adjustment The incremental encoder is supplied with voltage by the drive controller.
Stop!
If the supply voltage is too high, it may destroy the incremental
encoder.
Under C0421 you can adjust the supply voltage VCC (5 V) of the incremental
encoder in order to compensate for the voltage drop along the incremental
encoder cable (if required).
Calculation of the voltage drop
R[W] l Length of the incremental encoder cable
DU [ l[m] @ @ I Inc[A]
[m]
R Resistance of the incremental encoder cable
IInc Current consumption of the incremental
encoder
6.7−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Setting the speed feedback 6.7
Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 6.7.2
6.7.2 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9
On X9, incremental encoders with HTL level can be operated. Wiring diagram
and pin assignment of X9 are described in chapter "Wiring of the standard
device" ® "Wiring of the feedback system".
Activation ƒ C0025 = 101. In addition, you have to set the number of increments in
C0420.
Adjustment The incremental encoder must be operated with an external supply voltage.
C0421 has no influence.
ƒ Incremental encoders with HTL level require DC 8 ... 30 V supply
voltage. Please observe the information by the manufacturer.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.7−3

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
6.8 Operating mode
Description The control mode of the controller can be selected via the operating mode.
You can select between the following modes:
ƒ V/f characteristic control
ƒ Vector control
Selection of the correct The V/f characteristic control is the classic operating mode for standard
operating mode applications.
When using the vector control you will achieve improved drive features
compared to the V/f characteristic control due to:
ƒ Higher torque via the complete speed range
ƒ Higher speed accuracy and higher concentricity factor
ƒ Higher efficiency
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.8−1

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
Speed/ torque characteristics

No feedback With feedback
M M
1 0 1 0
MN MN
-nN nN n -nN nN n
-MN -MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec092 9300vec093
Fig. 6.8−1 Speed/ torque characteristics

Operation in motor mode (CW rotation)
Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation)
Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation)
Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
Vector control
without feedback with feedback
M M
1 0 1 0
MN MN
-nN nN n -nN nN n
-MN -MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec095 9300vec094
Fig. 6.8−2 Speed/ torque characteristics

Operation in motor mode (CW rotation)
Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation)
Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation)
Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
6.8−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
Recommended operating The frequency inverter is mainly designed for the applications listed in the
modes below table.
The table helps you to select the correct operating mode for your application:
ƒ C0006 = 5: V/f characteristic control with constant Vmin boost
ƒ C0006 = 1: Vector control
Power range 110 ... 400 kW Selection of the operating mode in C0006
Motor cable Motor cable
shielded £ 100 m shielded > 100 m
unshielded £ 200 m unshielded > 200 m
Applications with asynchronous recommended alternatively recommended alternatively
motors
Single drives
Drives with constant load 5 1 5 −
Drives with heavy start 1 5 5 −
conditions
Travelling drives, conveyor belts 5 1 5 −
Pump drives, fan drives 1) 5 − 5 −
Extruder drives 5 1 5 −
Drives for wire drawing 5 1 5 −
machines
Drives for rolling machines 5 1 5 −
Drives for rewinders with 1 5 − −
dancer
(speed−controlled)
Group drives 5 − 5 −
(the resulting motor cable
length is decisive Ires)
l res + Ǹ(i @ (l 1 ) l 2 ) AAA ) l i))
1) A square voltage characteristic (C0014 = 1) is recommended for this application
Note!
Only switch between the operating modes if the controller is
inhibited!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.8−3

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
6.8.1 V/f characteristic control
Description The output voltage of the controller follows a defined characteristic. At low
output frequencies, the characteristic can be boosted. It can be adapted to
different load profiles.
ƒ Linear characteristic for drives with constant load torque over the
speed.
ƒ Quadratic characteristic for drives with quadratic load torque over the
speed:
– Quadratic V/f characteristics are preferably used in centrifugal pump
and fan drives. However, it must be checked whether your pump or
fan drive can be operated in this operating mode!
– If your pump or fan drive cannot be used for the operation with a
quadratic V/f characteristic, the linear V/f characteristic or vector
control mode must be used.
Uout Uout
C0089 C0089
100 % 100 %
C0090 C0090
Umin
Umin
0 0
0 1 n 0 1 n
nN nN
9300vec085 9300vec086
Fig. 6.8−3 Linear and square−law V/f characteristic

C0006 Op mode 5 Selection of the operating mode
for the motor control
1 vector ctrl Vector control In case of the first selection enter
without or with the motor data and identify them 6.8−8
speed feedback with C0148.
5 V/f V/f characteristic Commissioning without
control identification of the motor data is 6.8−4
possible
l Advantage of identification
with C0148: Improved smooth
running at low speeds
C0014 V/f charact. 0 Characteristic in the V/f
characteristic control mode 8.2−25
0 Linear Linear V/f characteristic
1 square Square V/f characteristic
C0015 Rated freq 50 10 {1 Hz} 5000 V/f−rated frequency
In C0015 you can set a base 8.2−25
frequency which differs from the
rated motor frequency (C0089)
l Lenze setting: C0015 = C0089
l Changing C0086 or C0089
overwrites the value in C0015
6.8−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
V/f characteristic control 6.8.1

C0016 Umin boost 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Umin boost (FCODE)
l C0016 = 1 % corresponds to a 6.8−4
boost of 1 % of the rated motor
voltage (C0090)
l Code is freely configurable
C0021 slipcomp à −20.00 {0.01 %} 20.00 Slip compensation
à Change of C0086, C0087 or 6.11−1
C0089 sets C0021 to the
calculated rated slip of the 8.2−25
motor
l When changing over to the 8.2−40
vector control mode, C0021 is
set to 0
C0090 Mot voltage à 0 {1 V} 1000 Rated motor voltage 6.6−1
à depending on C0086
voltage in C0090
0
Adjustment 1. Select "V/f characteristic control" mode (C0006 = 5, factory

adjustment).
2. Select V/f characteristic (C0014) if necessary
3. Enter the data of the motor nameplate.
4. If required, you can set a base frequency in C0015 which differs from
the rated motor frequency (C0089).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.8−5

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
Set Umin boost Load−independent boost of the motor voltage for output frequencies below
the V/f rated frequency. This serves to optimise the torque behaviour.
C0016 must be adapted to the asynchronous motor used. Otherwise the
motor may be destroyed by overtemperature or the controller may be
operated with overcurrent:
1. Operate the motor in idle state at 5 ... 10 % of the rated speed (nN):
2. Increase Vmin until you reach the following motor current:
A Motor in short−time operation up to 0.5 nN:
– For self−ventilated motors: Imotor » IN motor
– For forced ventilated motors: Imotor » IN motor
B Motor in continuous operation up to 0.5 nN:
– For self−ventilated motors: Imotor » 0.8IN motor
– For forced ventilated motors: Imotor»IN motor
Note!
Observe for all adjusting processes the thermal behaviour of the
connected asynchronous motor at low speeds:
ƒ Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B
can be driven for a short time with its rated current in the
speed range up to 0.5 nN.
ƒ Contact the motor manufacturer for getting the exact setting
values for the max. permissible motor current of
self−ventilated motors in the lower speed range.
Uout Uout
C0089 C0089
100 % 100 %
C0090 C0090
Umin
Umin
0 0
0 1 n 0 1 n
nN nN
9300vec085 9300vec086
Fig. 6.8−4 Umin boost at linear and square−law V/f characteristic
6.8−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
V/f characteristic control 6.8.1
Optimising V/f characteristic In general the V/f characteristic control can be operated without any further
control measures. The V/f characteristic control must only be optimised in case of
the following drive behaviour:
Drive behaviour Remedy
Does not rotate concentrically at low Executing motor identification
speeds, especially when operating
with long motor cables
Problems in case of high starting Adjusting the voltage increase (C0016).
duty (high mass inertia), in extreme l Set C0016 so that with an enabled controller and
cases, the error message OC1 occurs 5 ... 10 % of the rated speed an approx.
0.8−fold ... single rated motor current flows
l 6.8−6
The set voltage increase (C0016) Adapting the voltage increase with boost correction
does not result in the desired current ( 6.11−5)
flow (controller has problems at high
starting duty, error message OC1
during acceleration).
Drive does not follow the speed l Increasing acceleration / deceleration time
setpoint. l Consider sufficient magnetising time of the motor.
Reason: The current controller the magnetising time amounts to 0.1 ... 2 s
intervenes in the rated field depending on the motor power
frequency to limit the controller l Increase permissible maximum current (C0022,
output current to the maximum C0023)
current (C0022, C0023)
For operation without speed l Increase slip compensation (C0021). Important:
feedback (C0025 = 1): unstable drive due to overcompensation!
Lack of speed stability at high load l In case of cyclic load impulses (e.g. centrifugal pump)
(setpoint and motor speed are not a smoother motor characteristic can be achieved by
proportional anymore) smaller values in C0021 (maybe negative values)
Note: The slip compensation is only active for operation
without speed feedback.
Error messages OC1 or OC3 with l Increase gain of the Imax controller (C0075)
short acceleration times (C0012) l Reduce integral−action time of the Imax controller
compared with the load (controller (C0076)
cannot follow the dynamic l Increase acceleration time (C0012)
processes)
Mechanical resonances at certain The function block NLIM1 serves to suppress those
speeds speed ranges in which resonances occur (see chapter
"Function library").
Speed oscillations in no−load The oscillation damping minimises speed oscillations
operation at speeds > 1/3 rated (see "Optimising operational performance" in chapter
speed "Commissioning")
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.8−7

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
6.8.2 Vector control
Description Compared to the V/f characteristic control, the vector control serves to
achieve a considerably higher torque and lower current consumption in idle
state.
Note!
ƒ The connected motor may be maximally two power classes
smaller than the motor assigned to the drive controller.
ƒ The motor data identification is essential.

1 vector ctrl Vector control In case of the first selection enter
without or with the motor data and identify them 6.8−8
5 V/f V/f characteristic Commissioning without
control identification of the motor data is 6.8−4
possible
à Change of C0086, C0087 or 6.11−1
motor
set to 0
C0075 Vp curr CTRL 0.04 0.00 {0.01 } 0.99 Gain of current controller
l Vector control: Gain of current 8.2−25
controller
l V/f characteristic control: 8.2−40
Maximum current controller
C0076 Tn curr CTRL 10.0 0.1 {0.1 ms} 2000.0 Integral−action time of current
controller 8.2−25
l Vector control: integral−action
time of current controller 8.2−40
l V/f characteristic control:
maximum current controller
l C0076 = 2000 ms: current
controller is switched off
C0077 Ti field CTRL 4.0 0.3 {0.1 ms} 6000.0 Integral−action time of field
controller
l Only active in case of vector
control with feedback
to factory setting
0
6.8−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
Vector control 6.8.2

C0087 Mot speed à 50 {1 rpm} 36000 Rated motor speed 6.6−1
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
C0088 Mot current à 0.5 {0.1 A} 1000.0 Rated motor current 6.6−1
current in C0088
0
C0089 Mot frequency à 10 {1 Hz} 5000 Rated motor frequency 6.6−1
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
C0091 Mot cos phi à 0.50 {0.01 } 1.00 Motor cos j 6.6−1
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0092 Mot Ls à 0.00 {0.01 mH} 6553.50 Motor stator inductance 6.6−1
à Value is determined by motor
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
drive has stopped
motor nameplate into C0087,
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
"
4. Enable controller
1 WRK run Start identification The identification
not rotate!
– is completed when is lit
again
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.8−9

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
Set vector control C0006 = 1 set the vector control mode.
Note!
When setting the vector control mode, the slip compensation
(C0021) is automatically set to 0.0 %.
ƒ When you switch back to the V/f characteristic control mode,
the slip compensation must be re−adapted.
Prepare the motor data The motor data of the motor nameplate must be entered:
identification
ƒ Rated motor speed (C0087)
ƒ Rated motor current (C0088)
ƒ Rated motor frequency (C0089)
ƒ Rated motor voltage (C0090)
ƒ Motor cos j (C0091)
Executing the motor data Execute the motor data identification. ( 6.6−16)
identification
6.8−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
Vector control 6.8.2
Optimising vector control In general the vector control can be operated without any further measures.
The vector control must only be optimised in case of the following drive
behaviour:
Drive behaviour Remedy
Operation without feedback: 1. Optimise setpoint for the motor magnetising
l The current consumption in idle current. ( 6.11−9)
state differs widely from the 2. Stator inductance (C0092) must be adapted after
rated magnetising current (ImR » motor parameter identification.
IN × sin j) . Calculate sin j from The calculation of the stator inductance by the
the cos j of the motor motor data identification is based on the motor data
nameplate. entered before and does not consider the physical
l The drive has an uneven starting leakage of the motor and the inductive reactance of
performance the motor cable.
+15 %
92 C00
C00 92
0
-15 %
0,37 22 90 400 PN [kW]
9300vec040
Tendency of the correction of C0092

PN: rated motor power
Lack of speed stability at high load Use C0021 (slip compensation) to change the influence
(setpoint and motor speed are not of the rotor resistance (C0082) proportionally:
proportional anymore) l Reduce the value in C0021 at an increasing speed
(negative values)
l Increase the value in C0021 at a decreasing speed
Note: If you activate the vector control (C0006 = 1),
C0021 is automatically set to 0 %.
Unstable control at higher speeds l Reduce the gain of the speed controller (C0070) (if
required, speed−dependent adaptation via function
block CURVE1 and MCTRL−VP−ADAPT)
l Control value in C0092 by comparing the current
consumption in no−load operation with the rated
magnetising current (ImR » IN × sin j).
l Optimise oscillation damping (C0234 ... C0236)
Unstable control at higher speeds l Reduce gain of the Imax controller (C0075) or reduce
and high torque at high power gain and influence of the oscillation damping (at a
(> 55 kW) power of 55 ... 90 kW).
l For operation with feedback, deactivate oscillation
damping with C0234 = 0.
Unstable control in field weakening l Reduce integral−action time of the field controller via
range for operation with speed C0077
feedback l Increase gain of the Imax controller (C0075)
Error messages OC1 or OC3 with l Increase gain of the Imax controller (C0075)
short acceleration times (C0012) l Reduce integral−action time of the Imax controller
compared with the load (controller (C0076)
cannot follow the dynamic l Increase acceleration time (C0012)
processes).
Mechanical resonances at certain The function block NLIM1 serves to suppress those
speeds speed ranges in which resonances occur (see chapter
"Function library").
Speed oscillations in no−load The oscillation damping minimises speed oscillations
operation at speeds > 1/3 rated (see "Optimising operational performance" in chapter
speed "Commissioning")
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.8−11

Commissioning 6
Switching frequency of the inverter 6.9
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter
Description The switching frequency of the inverter influences the smooth running
behaviour, the power loss in the controller and the noise generation in the
connected motor. The Lenze setting is the optimal value for standard
applications. The following general rule applies:
The lower the switching frequency, the
ƒ lower the power loss.
ƒ higher the noise generation.
ƒ better the concentricity factor.
You can select between two switching frequency modes:
Code sine−wave modulated (sin) flat−top modulated (f_top)
C0018 1, 2, 4, 6 3
Note!
ƒ The concentricity factor at low speeds is lower with flat top
modulation than with sine−wave modulation. For standard
application a sine−wave modulated switching frequency is
optimal.
ƒ The maximum output frequency of the controller depends on
the selected switching frequency (see C0018).
ƒ With C0018 = 6, the switching frequency will be automatically
changed depending on the output current of the controller.
ƒ Please observe that the output current must be reduced when
operating with high switching frequencies to prevent an
impermissible heating of the controller (derating).
ƒ Adapt the current limit values (C0022 and C0023) so that the
currents specified in the technical data are not exceeded.
Moreover, you can adjust whether it is switched to a lower switching
frequency when the heatsink temperature reaches an adjustable limit value.
This prevents the drive from being inhibited by the error "overtemperature"
and the motor coasts without torque.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.9−1

6 Commissioning
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter

C0018 fchop 6 Switching frequency of the
inverter 6.9−1
1 1 kHz sin loss−optimised l General rule: The lower the
switching frequency the
2 2 kHz sin concentricity−opti – lower the power loss
mised – higher the noise generation
– better the concentricity
3 4 kHz f_top power−optimised factor
l Observe derating indications
4 4 kHz sin noise−optimised for high switching frequencies
l The max. output frequency
6 4/2 kHz sin noise/concentricit (fmax) is:
y−optimised with – fchop = 4 kHz Þ
automatic fmax = 300 Hz
change−over to – fchop = 2 kHz Þ
low switching fmax = 150 Hz
frequency – fchop = 1 kHz Þ
fmax = 150 Hz
C0144 OH switch 1 0 Switch off Switch−over is not Temperature−dependent
active switching frequency reduction
l If the heatsink temperature set
1 Switch on Switch−over is in C0122 is reached (warning
active OH4), the controller switches
to 2 kHz
Function of automatic C0144=0 (no temperature−dependent switching frequency reduction)

switching frequency
reduction If the maximum permissible heatsink temperature (Jmax ) is exceeded when
operating with automatic switching frequency reduction, the inverter is
inhibited, TRIP "OH" (overtemperature) is set and the motor coasts without
torque.
C0144=1 (temperature−dependent switching frequency reduction is
active):
ƒ If the heatsink temperature set in C0122 (overtemperature OH4) is
reached when operating with automatic switching frequency
reduction, the controller automatically reduces the switching
frequency to 2kHz, thus keeping the operation running.
ƒ After the heatsink has cooled down, the controller automatically
switches to the set switching frequency again.
6.9−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping 6.10
Speed range 6.10.1
6.10 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping
6.10.1 Speed range
Description The speed range required for the application is set in the codes C0010 and
C0011:
ƒ The minimum speed (C0010) corresponds to a speed setpoint selection
of 0 %.
ƒ The minimum speed (C0011) corresponds to a speed setpoint selection
of 100 %.
n
C0011
C0010
0% 100 %
9300vec097
Fig. 6.10−1 Relation between setpoint and minimum and maximum output frequency

C0010 Nmin 0 0 {1 rpm} 36000 l Reference value Minimum
for the absolute speed 6.10−1
and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration
times
l C0059 must be
set correctly
l Set C0010 <
C0011
C0011 Nmax 3000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 l C0010 is only Maximum
effective in case speed
of analog setpoint
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
via interface, major
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
C0010 Features "minimum speed" (nmin):

ƒ C0010 is approached via the acceleration ramp.
ƒ C0010 is only effective with analog setpoint selection via AIN1
(terminal X6/1 and X6/2).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.10−1

6 Commissioning
6.10.1 Speed range
C0011 Features "maximum output frequency" (nmax):

ƒ For defining fixed setpoints (JOG) C0011 acts as limitation.
ƒ C0011 is an internal scaling value! Therefore, changes must only be
made when the controller is inhibited!
Stop!
Set C0011 so that the maximum motor speed is not exceeded.
Otherwise the motor can be destroyed.
Adjusting tips Observe the internal speed limits (p = number of motor pole pairs):
ƒ Switching frequency 2/4kHz: nmax = 36000/4p min−1
ƒ Switching frequency 1kHz: nmax = 36000/4p min−1
6.10−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Speed range 6.10.2
6.10.2 Setting acceleration times and deceleration times in speed mode
Description The acceleration and deceleration times determine the controller response
time after a setpoint change.

C0012 Tir (acc) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Acceleration time Tir of the main
setpoint 6.10−3
l Refers to speed change
0 ... C0011
C0013 Tif (dec) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Deceleration time Tif of the main
setpoint
0 ... C0011
Adjustment ƒ The acceleration and deceleration times refer to a speed change from
0min−1 to the max. speed set in C0011.
ƒ Calculate the times Tir and Tif, which you can set under C0012 and
C0013.
n [min-1]
C0011
n2
n1
0
t
tir tif
Tir Tif
9300vec098
Fig. 6.10−2 Acceleration and deceleration times
T ir + t ir @ nC0011 tir and tif are the desired times for the change
2 * n1 between n1 and n2
T if + t if @ nC0011
2 * n1
Note!
If the acceleration and deceleration times are set too short and
under unfavourable operating conditions the controller can be
switched off with TRIP OC1 or OC3. In these cases, the
acceleration and deceleration times must be set so that the drive
can follow the speed profile without Imax reaching a drive
system.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.10−3

6 Commissioning
6.10.3 Quick stop
6.10.3 Quick stop
Description Quick stop brakes the drive to standstill with the deceleration time set in
C0105.
ƒ DC−injection braking (GSB) has priority over quick stop.

C0105 QSP Tif 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Quick stop deceleration time
l The deceleration time refers to 8.2−25
a speed variation of C0011 ... 0
8.2−40
Activation Via digital signal:

ƒ MCTRL−QSP = HIGH.
ƒ Activating signal DCTRL−QSP. The signal can be activated via 3 OR’d
inputs:
– Control word CAN−CTRL.B3 from CAN−IN1
– Control word AIF−CTRL.B 3 from AIF−IN
– Control word C0135.B3
Via keyboard of the keypad:
For this the key must be assigned with the quick stop function (C0469 = 2):
– activates quick stop
– restarts the drive
6.10−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Changing the direction of rotation 6.10.4
6.10.4 Changing the direction of rotation
Description In the basic configurations (C0005) the direction of rotation of the motor is
reversed in a fail−safe way via the X5/E1 and X5/E2 and the function block
R/L/Q. Thus, only the main setpoint is changed.
The reversing time depends on the ramp times set for the main setpoint or
quick stop.
When the direction of rotation is changed, the drive brakes along the
deceleration ramp (C0013) and accelerates along the acceleration ramp
(C0012) into the other direction of rotation.
Direction of rotation with in−phase connection:
Direction of Signal level at Notes
rotation
X5/E1 X5/E2
CCW rotation LOW HIGH
CW rotation HIGH LOW
Quick stop LOW LOW
Unchanged HIGH HIGH l During operation: The direction
of rotation results from the signal
which was active first.
l At mains connection: The
controller activates quick stop
(QSP).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.10−5

Commissioning 6
Optimising the operating behaviour 6.11
Slip compensation 6.11.1
6.11 Optimising the operating behaviour
6.11.1 Slip compensation
Description The speed of an asynchronous machine decreases when being loaded. This
load−dependent speed drop is called slip. By setting C0021 the slip can be
partly compensated.
In the V/f characteristic control mode the slip compensation is only active at
operation without feedback (C0025 = 1).

à Change of C0086, C0087 or 6.11−1
motor
set to 0
C0078 Tn slip CTRL 100 1 {1 ms} 6000 Integral−action time of slip
controller 8.2−25
l Filter time for slip
compensation (C0021)
l Only active with V/f
characteristic control
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.11−1

6 Commissioning
6.11.1 Slip compensation
Adjustment V/f characteristic control

The slip compensation (C0021) is automatically calculated from the rated
motor speed (C0087) and the rated motor frequency (C0089). The entered
slip constant [%] is the rated slip of the motor in [%] relating to the
synchronous speed of the motor.
ƒ Calculating the slip compensation and entering it into C0021:
n rsyn * n r E Slip constant (C0021) [%]

s+ n rsyn @ 100% nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [min−1]
f r @ 60 nr Rated motor speed according to

n rsyn + p motor nameplate [min−1]
fr Rated motor frequency according to
motor nameplate [Hz]
p Number of motor pole pairs
(1, 2, 3, ...)
ƒ If required, the slip compensation can be adapted manually:

– If C0021 is set too high, the drive may get unstable.
– With cyclic load impulses (e. g. centrifugal pump) a smooth motor
characteristic is achieved by smaller values in C0021 (possibly
negative values)
– Parameterise C0078 (filter time for the slip compensation) if you
want to change the motor response time to load changes
(dynamic « slow).
ƒ The actual speed is output as an analog signal (in [%] of nmax (C0011))
to MCTRL−NACT.
Note!
When operating synchronous or reluctance motors, C0021 must
be set to 0.
Vector control
Use C0021 to change the influence of the rotor resistance (C0082)
proportionally:
ƒ Reduce the value in C0021 at an increasing speed (negative values)
ƒ Increase the value in C0021 at a decreasing speed
Note!
6.11−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Oscillation damping 6.11.2
6.11.2 Oscillation damping
Description Suppressing no−load oscillations in case of:

ƒ Drives with different rated power of controller and motor, e. g. when
operating with high switching frequency and the power derating
involved.
ƒ Operation of higher−pole motors.
ƒ Operation of three−phase AC drives > 10 kW.
Compensation of resonances in the drive kit:
ƒ Certain asynchronous motors may show this behaviour above 1/3 of
the rated speed (1/3 × nn). This may result in an unstable operation
(current and speed variations).

C0234 damp value 20 −100 {1 %} 100 Influence of the oscillation
damping, function block MCTRL 8.2−25
l Minimising a tendency to
oscillation of the drive 8.2−40
l Influences the tendency to
oscillation of the drive
l When C0025 >1 and C0006 = 1,
C0234 is set to 0
C0235 damping 2 1 {1 ms} 600 Filter time of the oscillation
l Filter time for the internal
signal for oscillation damping 8.2−40
C0236 damp limit 1.0 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 20.0 Limit value of oscillation damping,
function block MCTRL
l Limit value for the internal
signal of oscillation damping
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.11−3

6 Commissioning
6.11.2 Oscillation damping
Adjustment The Lenze setting is designed for power−adapted motors.

Usually, the speed oscillations can be reduced by changing the Lenze setting
of the codes C0234 oder C0236 by the factor 2 ... 5.
1. Approach the range with speed oscillations.
2. Change the influence of the oscillation damping in C0234 (generally,
increase it).
3. Increase the limitation of the oscillation damping in C0236.
4. Change filter time in C0235 in the range of 1 ... 20 ms, if necessary.
ƒ These can be indicators for smooth running:
– Constant motor current characteristic
– Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat
Note!
Restricted effect with vector control
ƒ The oscillation damping has no influence on the drive
behaviour at low tendency to oscillation of the speed
controller.
ƒ Especially for drives > 55 kW with a tendency to oscillation it
may be necessary to deactivate the oscillation damping
(C0234 = 0 %).
ƒ For operation with feedback the oscillation damping has no
influence.
6.11−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Boost correction with V/f characteristic control 6.11.3
6.11.3 Boost correction with V/f characteristic control
Description In the V/f characteristic control mode (C0006 = 5), a constant voltage boost
(in [%] von C0090) can be preset in code C0016 at low speeds or motor
standstill.
If due to the setting in C0016 no current or a nonuniform current flows, the
voltage boost can be further increased via the boost correction to inject a
sufficiently high and uniform current into the motor.
If the voltage boost is insufficient, the following drive behaviour occurs:
ƒ The required torque is not achieved at standstill.
ƒ When the load is accelerated from standstill, the current overshoots as
the motor had not been magnetised sufficiently before. OC1 can trip.
Note!
If the motor magnetising current is too low, Lenze recommends
to operate the controller with sine−wave modulated switching
frequency (C0018 = 0, 1, 4, 5 oder 6) only.

C0080 Vp field CTRL 0.50 0.00 {0.01 } 0.99 Influence on the motor 6.6−1
magnetising current selected
under C0095
l Not effective with C0006 = 1
and C0025 > 1 at the same
time
l Influence is effective from 0 Hz
to the frequency selected
under C1583
C0095 Mot Io à 0.0 {0.1 A} 1000.0 Motor magnetising current 6.6−1
à dependent on C0086, C0088
and C0091
l Change of C0086 sets C0095 to
the Lenze setting
C0086 = 0
C1583 fset high 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Alterations by Lenze service only!
Adaptation of the motor 6.11−5
magnetising current set in C0095
(with V/f characteristic control:
influence limit of the boost
correction; with vector control:
influence limit of the field
precontrol)
l The output frequency is set up
to which the motor
magnetising current set in
C0095 is to have an effect.
l C1583 = 100 % ¢ half the
rated motor frequency in
C0089
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.11−5

6 Commissioning
Adjustment
Stop!
A longer operation of the motor in standstill may destroy the
motor by overheating, especially in case of small motors.
ƒ Connect the thermal contact (NC contact), PTC, or KTY of the
motor and activate the motor temperature monitoring of the
controller.
ƒ Operate self−ventilated motors with a blower, if required.
Setting voltage boost

1. Set a voltage boost in C0016. ( 6.8−6)
– When C0016 = 0 % no boost is possible.
2. For magnetising the motor, consider enough time from controller
enable to the start of the speed ramp−function generator.
– The bigger the motor the longer the time for magnetisation. A motor
with the power of 90 kW requires up to 2 s.
– If the desired continuous current does not flow, correct the boost
using the codes C0080, C0095 and C1583.
Carry out a boost correction
3. If required, set the desired motor magnetising current (standstill
current) in C0095 which is to be achieved by the boost correction.
– The value in the Lenze setting has been evaluated by the controller
from the entered motor data of the motor nameplate.
– When C0095 = 0, the boost correction is deactivated.
4. Set the influence of the boost correction in C0080.
6.11−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Boost correction with V/f characteristic control 6.11.3
0
6 × Umin
3 × Umin
0
C0080
0 0.5 0.99
9300vec141
Fig. 6.11−1 Influence of boost correction

Maximum height of the correction value when the field
frequency is 0
C0080 = 0.99 Maximum correction value. The voltage boost Umin achieved by
C0016 is increased sixfold.
C0080 = 0 No correction value. The voltage boost Umin achieved by C0016 is
not increased, the boost correction is deactivated.
Increase the value in C0080 step by step and observe the effect on the
current injection with an oscilloscope, if required.
– If the boost correction is to high, this can cause current overshoots
when the current injection starts.
5. Set the adaptation of the boost correction in C1583.
0
100 %
0
0 0.5 fout fout
9300vec140
Fig. 6.11−2 Adaptation of boost correction

Adaptation of boost correction
Characteristic when C1583 = 100 % (Lenze setting). The output
frequency corresponds to half the rated motor frequency in C0089.
Characteristic when C1583 = 199.99 %. The output frequency
corresponds to the rated motor frequency in C0089.
When C1583 = 0 % the boost correction is deactivated
Enter the output frequency in C1583 until which the boost correction is
to have an effect.
– At an output frequency of 0 Hz the boost correction has the influence
defined in C0080 and is 100 percent efficient. An increasing output
frequency reduces the influence linearly to 0.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.11−7

6 Commissioning
Example A motor connected to a controller has a rated motor voltage of 400 V

(C0090 = 400 V). The voltage boost Umin is set to 2 % (C0016 = 2 %).
ƒ At a voltage boost of 2 % and a rated motor voltage of 400 V,
Umin = 8 V.
The voltage boost Umin is to be optimised via C0080:
0
6 × Umin
3 × Umin
0
C0080
0 0.5 0.99
9300vec141
Fig. 6.11−3 Influence of boost correction

Maximum correction value when the output frequency is 0 Hz
ƒ When C0080 = 0.5, the maximum correction value is:

3 × Umin = 3 × 8 V = 24 V
ƒ The maximum voltage boost is:
Umin + correction value = 8 V + 24 V = 32 V
6.11−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor magnetising current with vector control 6.11.4
6.11.4 Motor magnetising current with vector control
This chapter describes how to optimise the setpoint for the motor
magnetising current (C0095) via the codes C0080 and C1583 in case of
vector control without feedback.
ƒ In case of vector control with feedback the setpoint for the motor
magnetising current is only determined by C0095. An optimisation is
not required. The codes C0080 and C1583 have no effect.
The motor current consists of the exciting and active part. The
magnetisation of the motor is determined by the excitation current
(magnetising current). To create a torque the motor needs active current.
In the vector control mode (C0006 = 1) a magnetising current is injected into
the motor after controller enable. The current level is detected by the
controller from the motor data.
If a too low motor magnetising current is injected after controller enable, the
following drive behaviour occurs:
ƒ The required torque is not achieved at standstill.
ƒ When a high load is accelerated from standstill, the current overshoots.
OC1 can be activated.
ƒ The machine runs irregularly as the motor is underexcited.
Note!
If the motor magnetising current is too low, Lenze recommends
to operate the controller with sine−wave modulated switching
frequency (C0018 = 0, 1, 4, 5 oder 6) only.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.11−9

6 Commissioning

under C0095
time
l Influence is effective from 0 Hz
to the frequency selected
under C1583
and C0091
the Lenze setting
C0086 = 0
C1583 fset high 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Alterations by Lenze service only!
Adaptation of the motor 6.11−5
magnetising current set in C0095
(with V/f characteristic control:
influence limit of the boost
correction; with vector control:
influence limit of the field
precontrol)
l The output frequency is set up
to which the motor
l C1583 = 100 % ¢ half the
C0089
6.11−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Commissioning 6
Motor magnetising current with vector control 6.11.4
Adjustment
Stop!
A longer operation of the motor in standstill may destroy the
motor by overheating, especially in case of small motors.
ƒ Connect the thermal contact (NC contact), PTC, or KTY of the
motor and activate the motor temperature monitoring of the
controller.
ƒ Operate self−ventilated motors with a blower, if required.
Basic setting
1. Enter the motor data of the motor nameplate and execute the motor
identification. ( 6.6−16)
2. For magnetising the motor, consider enough time. The motor is being
magnetised between controller enable and motor start.
A delayed start of the motor can be achieved using e.g. the quick stop
function:
– Activate quick stop. Enable the controller and wait until the motor is
magnetised sufficiently. Deactivate quick stop for the motor to start.
The bigger the motor the longer the time for magnetisation. A motor with
the power of 90 kW requires up to 2 s.
If the desired continuous current does not flow, the magnetisation of the
motor can be optimised using the codes C0080, C0095 and C1583.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 6.11−11

6 Commissioning
Optimisation
3. If required, select a setpoint for the motor magnetising current in
C0095.
– The value in the Lenze setting has been evaluated by the controller
from the entered motor data of the motor nameplate.
4. The influence, the setpoint of the motor magnetising current is to
have, can be set in C0080.
– A P controller which increases or reduces the setpoint can be
parameterised via C0080.
– Increase the value in C0080 step by step and observe the effect on
the current injection with an oscilloscope, if required.
– When C0080 = 0 the P controller is deactivated. No setpoint is
selected for the motor magnetising current.
5. Set the adaptation of the setpoint for the motor magnetising current in
C1583.
0
100 %
0
0 0.5 fout fout
9300vec140
Fig. 6.11−4 Adaptation of the setpoint for the motor magnetising current
Adaptation of the setpoint
Characteristic when C1583 = 100 % (Lenze setting). The output
frequency corresponds to half the rated motor frequency in C0089.
Characteristic when C1583 = 199.99 %. The output frequency
corresponds to the rated motor frequency in C0089.
When C1583 = 0 % the adaptation is deactivated. No setpoint is selected for the
motor magnetising current.
Select the output frequency in C1583, up to which the setpoint of the

motor magnetising current is to have an effect.
– At an output frequency of 0 Hz the setpoint has the influence defined
in C0080 and is 100 percent efficient. An increasing output frequency
reduces the influence linearly to 0.
6.11−12 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
Contents
7 Parameter setting
Contents
7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1−1

7.2.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−1
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−2
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−2
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−4
7.2.5 Loading a parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−6
7.2.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices . . . . . . . 7.2−7
7.2.7 Activating password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−9
7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−10
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2−11
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7−1

Parameter setting 7
Important notes 7.1
7.1 Important notes
Adapting the controller The controller functions can be adapted to your applications by means of
functions to the application parameterisation. You can either parameterise via keypad, PC or via the
parameter channel of a bus system.
The function library contains a detailed description of the functions, the
signal flow diagrams contain all configurable signals.
Parameters and codes The parameters for the functions are stored in numbered codes:
ƒ Codes are marked in the text with a "C" (e.g. C0002).
ƒ The code table provides a quick overview of all codes. The codes are
sorted according to their numbers and can be used as reference.
( 8.5−1)
Parameter setting via keypad A quick parameter setting is provided by the keypad XT. Moreover, it serves
as status display, error diagnosis and transfer of parameters to other drive
controllers.
Keypad XT
EMZ9371BC
Can be used with 8200 vector, 8200 motec, starttec, Drive PLC,
9300 vector, 9300 servo
Operator buttons 8
Plain text display yes
Menu structure yes
Configurable menu (user menu") yes
Predefined basic configurations yes
Non−volatile memory for parameter transfer yes
Password protection yes
Diagnosis terminal Keypad XT in handheld design, IP 20
(E82ZBBXC)
Installation in control cabinet no
Type of protection IP 20
Detailed description 7.2−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.1−1

7 Parameter setting
7.1 Important notes
Parameter setting via PC You need the parameter setting / operating software »Global Drive Control«
(GDC) or »Global Drive Control easy« (GDC easy) and an interface for
communication:
ƒ Interface for system bus (CAN) (preset in GDC):
– PC system bus adapter
ƒ Serial interface for LECOM:
– Communication module LECOM−A/B (RS232/RS485)
EMF2102IB−V001
The parameter setting /operating software of the Global Drive Control
family are easy−to−understand and tools for the operation, parameter
setting and diagnostics or Lenze drive controllers.
GDC easy GDC
ESP−GDC2−E ESP−GDC2
Supply Free download from the Program package must be
internet at charged for
www.lenze.com
Operation in interactive mode yes yes
Comprehensive help functions yes yes
Menu "Short setup" yes yes
Monitor windows for displaying yes yes
operating parameters and for
diagnostic purposes
Saving and printing of parameter yes yes
settings as code list
Loading of parameter files from the yes yes
controller to the PC
Storing of parameter files from the PC yes yes
in the controller
Function block editor no yes
Technology functions for 9300 Servo no yes
Oscilloscope function for 9300 Servo no yes
and 9300 vector
Detailed description Online help of the Online help of the
program program
Parameter setting via bus Detailed information can be found in the documentation of the
system corresponding bus system.
7.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
General data and operating conditions 7.2.1
7.2.1 General data and operating conditions
dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Feature Values
Dimensions
Width a 60 mm
Height b 73.5 mm
Depth c 15 mm
Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +60 °C)
Enclosure IP 20
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.2−1

7 Parameter setting
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
SHP 50 T
U SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
Fig. 7.2−1 Installation and commissioning of XT EMZ9371BC keypad or E82ZBBXC diagnosis

terminal
Connect keypad to the AIF interface on the front of the standard device.
The keypad can be connected/disconnected during operation.
As soon as the keypad is supplied with voltage, it carries out a short self−test.
The operation level indicates when the keypad is ready for operation:
Current state of the standard device
Memory location 1 of the user menu (C0517):
Code number, subcode number, and current value
Active fault message or additional status message
Actual value in % of the status display defined in C0004
must be pressed to leave the operation level
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Fig. 7.2−2 Display elements and function keys of the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
7.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
Display elements and function keys 7.2.3
Displays Status displays of standard device

Display Meaning Explanation
# Ready for operation
Active pulse inhibit Power outputs are inhibited
$ Set current limit exceeded in motor
or generator mode
% Speed controller 1 in the limitation Drive is torque−controlled
(Only active when operated with
standard devices of the 9300
series)
& Active fault
Acceptance of parameters
' Parameter is accepted immediately Standard device starts working
with the new parameter value
immediately
SHPRG ' Parameter must be confirmed with Standard device starts working
( with the new parameter value
after confirmation
SHPRG In case of controller inhibit, Standard device starts working
parameter must be confirmed with with the new parameter value
( after the controller has been
re−enabled
None Display parameters Cannot be changed
Active level
Menu Menu level active Select main menu and submenus
Code Code level active Select codes and subcodes
Para Parameter level active Change parameters in codes or
subcodes
None Operating level active Display operating parameters
Short text
Alphanumeric Contents of menus, meanings of
codes and parameters
In the operating level display of
C0004 in % and in the active fault
Number
Active level Meaning Explanation
Menu level Menu number Only active if standard devices of
the 8200 vector or 8200 motec
series are used
Code level Four−digit code number
Number
Active level Meaning Explanation
Menu level Submenu number Only active if standard devices of
the 8200 vector or 8200 motec
series are used
Code level Two−digit subcode number
Parameter value
Parameter value including unit
Cursor
In the parameter level, the digit above the cursor can be changed directly
Function keys
See the following table for description
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.2−3

7 Parameter setting
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters
Function keys
Note!
Shortcuts with (:
Press and hold the ( key, then press a second key.
Key Function
Menu level Code level Parameter level Operating level
Change to the Change to the Change to the code

parameter level operating level level
Load predefined Accept parameters
(
configurations in if SHPRG ' or
the "Short setup" SHPRG are
menu displayed
Change between Change the code Change the digit
) menu items number via cursor
Quick change
( Quick change of Quick change of
()
between menu
code number digit via cursor
items
Change between main menu, Cursor to the right
* submenus, and code level Cursor to the left
Deactivate the function of the + key, the LED in the key goes out
+ Inhibit the controller, the LED in the key is lit
Reset the fault 1. Eliminate the cause of malfunction
(TRIP reset): 2. Press +
3. Press
1) Only active if standard devices of the 8200 vector or 8200 motec series are used
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters
Note!
Your settings have an effect on the current parameters in the
main memory. You must save your settings in a parameter set so
that they are not lost when the mains are connected.
If you only need one parameter set, save your settings as
parameter set 1, since parameter set 1 is loaded automatically
after mains connection.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the menu )* Use the arrow keys to select the desired
menu
2. Change to the code level Display of the first code in the menu
3. Select code or subcode ) Display of the current parameter value
4. Change to the parameter level
5. When SHPRG is displayed, + 1) The drive coasts
inhibit the controller
6. Change parameter
A * Move cursor below the digit to be changed
B ) Change of digit
() Quick change of digit
(
7.2−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
Changing and saving parameters 7.2.4
Step Key Action

sequence
7. Accept the changed parameter
Display of SHPRG or SHPRG ' ( Confirm change to accept the parameter
Display "OK"
Display ' − The parameter has been accepted
immediately
8. Enable the controller, if 1) The drive runs again
required
9. Change to the code level
A Display of the operating level
B Display of the code with changed
parameter
10. Change further parameters Restart the "loop" with step 1. or 3.
11. Save changed parameters
A )* Select the code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
menu "Load/Store"
B Change to the parameter level
Display "0" and "READY"
Select the parameter set C Save as parameter set 1:
in which the parameters ð Set "1" "Save PS1"
are to be saved Save as parameter set 2:
permanently
ð Set "2" "Save PS2"
Save as parameter set 3:
Save as parameter set 4:
D ( When "OK" is displayed, the settings are
permanently saved in the selected
parameter set.
B Display of C0003 "PAR SAVE"
13. Set parameters for another Restart the "loop" with step 1. or 3.
parameter set
1) The function of the + key can be programmed:
C0469 = 1: Controller inhibit
C0469 = 2: Quick stop (Lenze setting)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.2−5

7 Parameter setting
7.2.5 Loading a parameter set
7.2.5 Loading a parameter set
The keypad serves to load a saved parameter set into the main memory
when the controller is inhibited. After the controller is enabled, it operates
with the new parameters.
Danger!
ƒ When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is
reinitialised and acts as if it had been connected to the mains:
– System configurations and terminal assignments can be
changed. Make sure that your wiring and drive configuration
comply with the settings of the parameter set.
ƒ Only use terminal X5/28 as source for the controller inhibit!
Otherwise the drive may start in an uncontrolled way when
switching over to another parameter set.
Note!
ƒ After switching on the supply voltage, the controller always
loads parameter set 1 into the main memory.
ƒ It is also possible to load other parameter sets into the main
memory via the digital inputs or bus commands.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Inhibit controller Terminal X5/28 = LOW
2. Load the saved parameter set
into the main memory
A )* Select the code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the
menu "Load/Store"
B Change to the parameter level
The active parameter set is displayed, e. g.
display "0" and "Load Default"
If you want to restore the delivery status,
proceed with D
Select the parameter set C Load parameter set 1:
to be loaded ð Set "1" "Load PS1"
Load parameter set 2:
ð Set "2" "Load PS2"
D ( "RDY" goes off. The parameter set is loaded
completely into the main memory if "RDY"
is displayed again.
B Display of C0002 "PAR LOAD"
4. Enable controller Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
The drive is running with the settings of
the loaded parameter set
7.2−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
Transferring parameters to other standard devices 7.2.6
7.2.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices
Parameter settings can be easily copied from one standard device to another
by using the keypad.
For this purpose use the "Load/Store" menu
Danger!
During the parameter transfer from the keypad to the standard
device the control terminals can adopt undefined states!
Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the
standard device before the transfer takes place. This ensures that
the controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the
defined state "LOW".
Copying parameter sets from

the standard device into the
keypad Note!
After copying the parameter sets into the XT keypad
(C0003 = 11), always the parameter set that was loaded last via
C0002 is activated.
Like this the current parameters also remain active after copying:
ƒ Save the current parameters in the parameter set before
copying and load this parameter set in the controller via
C0002.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Connect the keypad to
standard device 1
The drive coasts.
3. Select C0003 in the )* Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
"Load/Store" menu "Load/Store" menu using the arrow keys.
4. Change to the parameter level Display "0" and "READY"
5. Copy all parameter set into the The settings saved in the keypad are
keypad overwritten.
Set "11" "Save extern"
6. Start copying ( The "RDY" status display goes off. As
parameter value "BUSY" is displayed.
If "BUSY" goes off after approx. one
minute, all parameter sets were copied into
the keypad. The "RDY" status display is lit.
B Display C0003 and "PAR SAVE"
9. Remove keypad from standard
device 1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.2−7

7 Parameter setting
7.2.6 Transferring parameters to other standard devices
Copying parameter sets fom Step Key Action

keypad into the standard sequence
device
1. Connect the keypad to
standard device 2
The "IMP" status display is it.
The drive coasts
3. Pull the plugs X5 and X6 All control terminals have the defined
"LOW" status.
4. Select C0002 in the )* Select code C0002 "PAR LOAD" in the
"Load/Store" menu "Load/Store" menu using the arrow keys.
5. Change to the parameter level The active parameter set is shown, e. g.
display "0" and "Load Default"
6. Select the correct copy The settings saved in the standard device
function are overwritten.
l Copy all parameter sets available into the l The parameter set that was active
EEPROM of the standard device and save before copying is overwritten.
them permanently. l The parameters are not yet active after
copying. Select parameter set and load
it in the main memory. 7.2−6
Set "20" "ext −> EEPROM"
l Copy individual parameter sets into the
main memory of the standard device.
Copy parameter set 1 into the main
memory:
Set ð "11" "Load ext PS1"
memory:
memory:
memory:
7. Start copying ( The "RDY" status display goes off. As
parameter value "BUSY" is displayed.
If "BUSY" goes off, the parameter sets
selected were copied into the standard
device. The "RDY" status display is lit.
B Display C0002 and "PAR LOAD"
9. l If the function "Copy all )* Select code C0003 "PAR SAVE" in the
parameter sets into the "Load/Store" menu using the arrow keys
EEPROM" (C0002 = 20) is and store the contents of the main
selected, they might have memory permanently.
to be loaded in the main
memory manually.
l If the function "Copy
individual parameter sets
into the main memory"
(C0002 = 1x) is selected,
they might have to be
saved permanently in the
EEPROM manually.
10. Plug in plugs X5 and X6
The drive is running with the new settings.
7.2−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
Activating password protection 7.2.7
7.2.7 Activating password protection
Note!
ƒ If the password protection is activated (C0094 = 1 ... 9999), you
only have free access to the user menu.
ƒ To access the other menus, you must enter the password. By
this, the password protection is annulled until you enter a new
password.
ƒ Please observe that the password−protected parameters can
be overwritten as well when transferring the parameter sets
to other standard devices. The password is not transferred.
ƒ Do not forget your password! If you have forgotten your
password, it can only be reset via a PC or a bus system!
Activate password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the "USER menu" )* Change to the user menu using the arrow
keys
2. Change to the code level Display of code C0051 "MCTRL−NACT"
3. Select C0094 Display of code C0094 "Password"
4. Change to the parameter level Display "0" = no password protection
5. Set password
A Select password (1 ... 9999)
B ( Confirm password
B Display of C0094 and "Password"
7. Change to the "USER menu" **)
The password protection is active now.
You can only quit the user menu if you re−enter the password and confirm it with (.
Remove password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Change to the code level in the
user menu
2. Select C0094 Display of code C0094 "Password"
3. Change to the parameter level Display "9999" = password protection is
active
4. Enter password
A ) Set valid password
B ( Confirm
The password protection is deactivated by
entering the password once again.
B Display of C0094 and "Password"
The password protection is deactivated now. All menus can be freely accessed again.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.2−9

7 Parameter setting
7.2.8 Diagnostics
7.2.8 Diagnostics
In the "Diagnostic" menu the two submenus "Actual info" and "History"
contain all codes for
ƒ monitoring the drive
ƒ fault/error diagnosis
In the operating level, more status messages are displayed. If several status
messages are active, the message with the highest priority is displayed.
Priority Display Meaning
1 GLOBAL DRIVE INIT Initialisation or communication error between
keypad and controller
2 XXX − TRIP Active TRIP (contents of C0168/1)
3 XXX − MESSAGE Active message (contents of C0168/1)
4 Special device states:
Switch−on inhibit
5 Source for controller inhibit (the value of C0004 is displayed simultaneously):
STP1 9300 servo: Terminal X5/28
ECSxS/P/M/A: Terminal X6/SI1
STP3 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
STP4 INTERBUS or PROFIBUS−DP
STP5 9300 servo, System bus (CAN)
ECSxA/E:
ECSxS/P/M: MotionBus (CAN)
STP6 C0040
6 Source for quick stop (QSP):
QSP−term−Ext The MCTRL−QSP input of the MCTRL function block is on
HIGH signal.
QSP−C0135 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
QSP−AIF INTERBUS or PROFIBUS−DP
QSP−CAN 9300 servo, System bus (CAN)
ECSxA:
ECSxS/P/M: MotionBus (CAN)
7 XXX − WARNING Active warning (contents of C0168/1)
8 xxxx Value below C0004
7.2−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Parameter setting 7
Menu structure 7.2.9
7.2.9 Menu structure
For simple, user−friendly operation, the codes are clearly arranged in

function−related menus:
Main menu Submenus Description
Display Display
User−Menu Codes defined in C0517
Code list All available codes

ALL All available codes listed in ascending order (C0001 ... C7999)
PS 1 Codes in parameter set 1 (C0001 ... C1999)
Load/Store Parameter set management
Parameter set transfer, restore delivery status
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Actual info Display codes to monitor the drive
History Fault analysis with history buffer
Short setup Quick configuration of predefined applications
Configuration of the user menu
The predefined applications depend on the type of the standard
device (frequency inverter, servo inverter, position controller, ...)
Main FB Configuration of the main function blocks

NSET Setpoint processing
NSET−JOG Fixed setpoints
NSET−RAMP1 Ramp function generator
MCTRL Motor control
DFSET Digital frequency processing
DCTRL Internal control
Terminal I/O Connection of inputs and outputs with internal signals
AIN1 X6.1/2 Analog input 1
AIN2 X6.3/4 Analog input 2
AOUT1 X6.62 Analog output 1
AOUT2 X6.63 Analog output 2
DIGIN Digital inputs
DIGOUT Digital outputs
DFIN Digital frequency input
DFOUT Digital frequency output
State bus State bus (not with 9300 frequency inverter)
Controller Configuration of internal control parameters
Speed Speed controller
Current Current controller or torque controller
Phase Phase controller (not with 9300 frequency inverter)
Motor/Feedb. Input of motor data, configuration of speed feedback
Motor adj Motor data
Feedback Configuration of feedback systems
Monitoring Configuration of monitoring functions
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 7.2−11

7 Parameter setting
7.2.9 Menu structure
Main menu Submenus Description

Display Display
LECOM/AIF Configuration of operation with communication modules
LECOM A/B Serial interface
AIF interface Process data
Status word Display of status words
System bus Configuration of system bus (CAN)
Management CAN communication parameters
CAN−IN1
CAN object 1
CAN−OUT1
CAN−IN2
CAN object 2
CAN−OUT2
CAN−IN3
CAN object 3
CAN−OUT3
Status word Display of status words
FDO Free digital outputs
Diagnostic CAN diagnostic
FB config Configuration of function blocks
Func blocks Parameterisation of function blocks

The submenus contain all available function blocks
FCODE Configuration of free codes
Identify Identification
Drive Software version of standard device
Op Keypad Software version of keypad
7.2−12 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Contents
8 Configuration
Contents
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1−1

8.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.1 Diameter calculator (DCALC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−1
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−5
8.2.3 Master frequency output (DFOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−8
8.2.4 Master frequency ramp−function generator (DFRFG) . . . . . . 8.2−13
8.2.5 Master frequency processing (DFSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−18
8.2.6 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control
(MCTRL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2−25
8.2.7 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2) . . . . . . 8.2−40
8.3 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−1
8.3.1 Fault responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−1
8.3.2 Monitoring times for process data input objects . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−2
8.3.3 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−3
8.3.4 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−3
8.3.5 Controller current load (I x t monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−4
8.3.6 Motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−5
8.3.7 Heatsink temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−6
8.3.8 DC−bus voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−7
8.3.9 External error (EEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3−7
8.4 Overview of monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4−1
8.5 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5−1
8.6 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
8.6.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1
8.6.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−3
8.6.3 Selection list 3: Angle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−6
8.6.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−6
8.6.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−7
8.7 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8−1

Configuration 8
Important notes 8.1
8.1 Important notes
The "Configuration" chapter consists of two parts.
System Manual The "Configuration" chapter in the System Manual contains the following:
ƒ Monitoring
ƒ Monitoring functions
ƒ Description of the following function blocks:
– Diameter calculator (DCALC)
– Digital frequency input (DFIN)
– Digital frequency output (DFOUT)
– Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG)
– Digital frequency processing (DFSET)
– Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1)
– Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2)
ƒ Code table
ƒ Selection lists
ƒ Table of attributes
System Manual (extension) The "Configuration" chapter in the System Manual (extension) contains the
following:
ƒ Notes on the configuration with Global Drive Control
ƒ Description of the basic configuration
ƒ Use of function blocks
ƒ Description of the other function blocks for the 9300 vector frequency
inverter
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.1−1

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Diameter calculator (DCALC) 8.2.1
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.1 Diameter calculator (DCALC)
Description The function block calculates the current reel diameter in winding drives.
DCALC1-SET DCALC1
C1320
C1328
C1325 DCALC1-D-OUT
DCALC1-LOAD
C1321/1 DCALC1-DMAX
C1326/1 C1300
a DCALC1-DMIN
DCALC1-N-LINE a
C1327/1 * b
C1322/1 b DCALC1-OUT
CTRL ARIT
C1301
DCALC1-N-WIND
C1327/2 C1302 C1305 C1308 C1310
C1322/2 C1303 C1306 C1309
C1304 C1307
DCALC1-HOLD DCALC1-OVFL
C1321/2
DCALC1-I=0
C1326/2
C1311
fb_dcalc1
Fig. 8.2−1 Diameter calculator (DCALC1)

C1300 N−motor/ 300 −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Motor speed at Dmax, function
Dmax block DCALC1 8.2−1
l Nominal speed of the winding
drive
C1301 N−line max 3000 1 {1 rpm} 32767 Maximum line speed, function
block DCALC1
l Nominal speed of the line drive
C1302 calc cycle 0.1 0.1 {0.1 rev} 100.0 Calculation cycle, function block
DCALC1 8.2−1
C1303 time const 0.10 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Filter time constant, function
block DCALC1
C1304 Dmax 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Maximum diameter, function
block DCALC1 8.2−1
l Nominal winding diameter
C1305 lower D−limit 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Lower diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
l Minimum winding diameter
C1306 upper D−limit 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Upper diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
l Maximum winding diameter
C1307 hyst D−limit 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.0 Hysteresis − diameter limitation,
function block DCALC1
l Hysteresis for Dmin /Dmax
output
C1308 arit function 1 0 DCALC1−OUT=D DCALC1−OUT = Selection of the arithmetic
diameter function, function block DCALC1 8.2−1
1 DCALC1−OUT=1/D DCALC1−OUT =
1/diameter
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−1

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C1309 Dmin 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Minimum diameter, function
block DCALC1 8.2−1
C1310 DCALC1−Titime 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 Acceleration and deceleration
time, function block DCALC1
C1311 window D−calc 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Window − diameter calculation,
l Window setting for permissible
diameter deviation
C1320 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block DCALC1 8.2−1
l The signal is scaled to the value
in C1304
(100 % ¢ C1304)
C1321 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signals, function block DCALC1
1 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH: initial value at
DCALC1−SET is accepted
l DCALC1−LOAD has a higher
priority than DCALC1−HOLD
2 CFG: HOLD 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = holds the diameter
value reached and resets the
integrators.
C1322 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Function block DCALC1
1 DIS: N−Line l Display of the signals linked in 8.2−1
C1327
2 DIS: N−WIND
C1325 DIS: SET −199,99 {0.01 %} 199,99 Function block DCALC1
l Display of the signal linked in
C1320
C1326 0 1 Function block DCALC1
1 DIS: LOAD l Display of the signals linked in
C1321
2 DIS: HOLD
C1327 Selection list 3 Configuration of input signals,
function block DCALC1 8.2−1
1 CFG: N−Line 1000 FIXED0INC l Speed signal of the line drive
2 CFG: N−WIND 1000 FIXED0INC l Speed signal of the winding
drive
C1328 DIS: D−ACT −200 {1 mm} 200 Function block DCALC1
l Display of the current diameter
Setting the initial value The signal at DCALC1−Set is set as initial value.
ƒ With DCALC1−LOAD = 1 the initial value is accepted.
ƒ The initial value is accepted unfiltered.
8.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Diameter calculator (DCALC) 8.2.1
Calculating the diameter By division of the speed signals at DCALC1−N−LINE and DCALC1−N−WIND, the
current diameter is calculated.
ƒ The signal at DCALC1−N−LINE has to correspond to the circumferential
speed of the reel.
ƒ The signal at DCALC1−N−WIND has to be proportional to the reel speed.
ƒ You have to adapt the signal at DCALC1−N−LINE in C1300 and C1301, so
that the value calculated corresponds to the actual diameter. The
nominal reel diameter dmax is entered in C1304.
– For operation with the nominal reel diameter dmax you have to enter
the value at input DCALC1−N−WIND in C1300 and the value at input
DCALC1−N−LINE in C1301.
ƒ The input signals are integrated cyclically. In C1302 you alter the
integration interval (calculation cycle):
Great value in C1302 Þ high resolution
Low value in C1302 Þ low resolution
ƒ If the integrator overflows, DCALC1−OVFL is set to HIGH. The integrator
is reset internally and starts again with the calculation of the last
correct value.
ƒ A first−order low pass filters the values calculated. The filter time
constant is set via C1303.
Displaying the diameter In C1328 the current diameter is displayed.
ƒ For the conversion of the scaled calculated value to the absolute value
[mm], the reference diameter dmax has to be entered via C1304.
ƒ At DCALC1−D−OUT the current diameter is output. The signal is scaled
to the value in C1304.
Maintaining/saving the With DCALC1−HOLD = HIGH the last diameter value calculated is
current value maintained and the integrators are reset.
ƒ When the controller is switched off, the current diameter value is
saved. When it is switched on, the last value saved is loaded.
Setting/displaying the In C1305 the minimum diameter (dmin) in [mm] is entered. dmin is reached
diameter when DCALC1−DMIN switches to HIGH.
In C1306 the maximum diameter (dmax) in [mm] is entered. dmax is reached
when DCALC1−DMAX switches to HIGH.
In C1307 a hysteresis for resetting the display signal is set. The entry in [%]
relates to the absolute values in C1305 and C1306.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−3

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Converting the diameter (d) In configurations with a speed forward control it is common to multiply the
to 1/d precontrol signal with the reciprocal value of the diameter (d). This value is
output at DCALC1−OUT.
ƒ C1308 = 0: DCALC1−OUT = d
ƒ C1308 = 1: DCALC1−OUT = 1/d
For the conversion to 1/d the reference value for the diameter has to be
defined in C1309, for which the signal at DCALC1−OUT is to be 100 %.
ƒ Normally C1309 corresponds to the minimum diameter in C1305
(dmin).
In order to ensure a continuous transition when setting new diameter
values, a ramp function generator is activated if C1310 > 0 s.
Web break monitoring A window comparator compares the corresponding newly calculated value
to the value last filtered.
ƒ In C1311 the maximum difference in [%] between the two values is
defined.
ƒ DCALC1−I=0 is set to LOW if the maximum difference is exceeded.
Formulas for calculation Current diameter (C1328)
DCALC1−N−LINE [inc] C1300 [rpm]

C1328 [mm] + @ @ C1304 [mm]
DCALC1−N−WIND [inc] C1301 [rpm]
Output signal at DCALC1−OUT

For C1308 = 0 (DCALC1−OUT = d):
C1328 [mm]
DCALC1−OUT [%] + @ 100 %
C1304 [mm]
For C1308 = 1 (DCALC1−OUT = 1/d):

C1304 [mm] C1309 [mm]
DCALC1−OUT [%] + @ @ 100 %
C1328 [mm] C1304 [mm]
Note!
The value at DCALC1−OUT is limited by the maximum reel
diameter (C1306) and the minimum reel diameter (C1305).
8.2−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency input (DFIN) 8.2.2
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN)
Description The function block calculates a speed signal from the rectangular signals at
X9. TTL signals and HTL signals can be connected. The zero track can be
selected as an option.
The edge changes are detected every 1 ms and result directly in the output
value.
X9
C0427 DFIN
DFIN-OUT
C0425 C0426
fb_dfin
Fig. 8.2−2 Digital frequency input (DFIN)

C0425 DFIN const 3 0 256 inc/rev Constant of the master frequency
1 512 inc/rev input, function block DFIN 8.2−5
l Output signal at the connected
2 1024 inc/rev encoder or at the upstream
3 2048 inc/rev controller in the event of a
4 4096 inc/rev master frequency
cascade/master frequency bus
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
C0426 DIS: OUT −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Output signal of the master
frequency input, function block
DFIN
l Display only
C0427 DFIN function 0 Function of the master frequency
input, function block DFIN
0 2−phase l Phase−displaced signal
sequence
1 A pulse/B dir l Control of direction of rotation
via track B
2 Pulse A or B l Control of speed and direction
of rotation via track A or track
B
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−5

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN)
Evaluating input signals In C0427 the different modes for the evaluation of the input signals can be
selected.
C0427 = 0 (phase−displaced signal sequence)
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 8.2−3 Phase−displaced signal sequence (CW rotation)

Clockwise Track A leads track B by 90 ° (positive value at DFIN−OUT)
rotation
Counter−clock Track A lags track B by 90 ° (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
wise rotation
C0427 = 1 (control of the direction of rotation via track B)
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 8.2−4 Control of direction of rotation via track B

Clockwise Track A transmits the speed
rotation Track B = LOW (positive value at DFIN−OUT)
Counter−clock Track A transmits the speed
wise rotation Track B = HIGH (negative value at DFIN−OUT)
C0427 = 2 (control of speed and direction of rotation via track A or track B)
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 8.2−5 Control of speed and direction of rotation via track A or track B
Clockwise Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive
rotation value at DFIN−OUT)
Track B = LOW
Counter−clock Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative
wise rotation value at DFIN−OUT)
Track A = LOW
8.2−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency input (DFIN) 8.2.2
Adjusting the output signal In C0425 the output signal can be adapted:
ƒ To the encoder at X9 or
ƒ To the upstream controller with master frequency cascade/master
frequency bus.
Transfer function
Calculating the output signal:
DFIN−OUT[rpm] + f[Hz] @ 60
C0425
Example:
The input frequency amounts to 200 kHz, the number of increments
corresponds to 2048 inc/rev. (C0425 = 3).
DFIN−OUT[rpm] + 200000Hz @ 60 + 5859rpm

2048
Signal adaptation
Signal adaptations other than by squaring in C0425 can be achieved by
connecting a function block.
Example:
The function block CONV3 shall convert the speed signal into a quasi analog
signal.
Calculating the output signal at CONV3:
CONV3−OUT[%] + f[Hz] @ 0.4 @ C0950

C0425 C0951
Interconnecting function blocks:
X9
C0427 DFIN CONV3
DFIN-OUT CONV3-IN C0950 CONV3-OUT
C0952
C0951
C0953
C0425 C0426
fb_dfin_01
Fig. 8.2−6 Digital frequency input (DFIN) with connected converter
Note!
If a master frequency is output to DFOUT−AN−IN or DFOUT−DF
(C0540 = 0 or C0540 = 1) and an incremental encoder is
evaluated via X8, the function block DFIN cannot be used
anymore.
If the input signals at X8 or X9 are output to X10, (C0540 = 4 or
C0540 = 5), this restriction does not exist.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−7

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.3 Master frequency output (DFOUT)
Description The function block creates rectangular signals from an analog signal or
speed signal, which are output via X10. Alternatively, you can set the master
frequency output to a signal output at X8 or X9.
C0030 DFOUT
C0540
DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
C0542
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
C0541
C0547
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
C0544 C0540
CTRL
C0548
0 X10
X5 E5
1
C0545 2
X9 3
4
5
X8
fb_dfout
Fig. 8.2−7 Digital frequency output (DFOUT)

C0030 DFOUT const 3 0 256 inc/rev Function block DFOUT
1 512 inc/rev l Setting of the constant 8.2−8
(increments per revolution) for
2 1024 inc/rev the master frequency output
3 2048 inc/rev X10
4 4096 inc/rev
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
8.2−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency output (DFOUT) 8.2.3

C0540 Function 0 Function selection, function block
DFOUT 8.2−8
l Output signal at X10
0 Analog input Analog input Signal at DFOUT−AN−IN is output.
Zero track can be input externally.
1 PH diff input Phase difference Signal at DFOUT−DF−IN is output.
input Zero track can be input externally.
2 Not assigned
3 Not assigned
4 X10 = X9 X9 is output on The input signals are buffered
X10 C0030 is without function
5 X10 = X8 X8 is output on
X10
C0541 CFG: AN−IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block DFOUT
l Signal in [%] of C0011
C0542 CFG: DF−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
function block DFOUT
l Speed signal
C0544 CFG: SYN−RDY 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l DFOUT−SYN−RDY = HIGH:
Generating a zero pulse
C0545 PH offset 0 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Phase offset, function block
DFOUT
l Displacing the zero pulse
generated via DFOUT−SYN−RDY
by up to 360 °
l 1 rev. = 65535 inc (360 °)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−9

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Output signals at X10

A
A
B
B
Z
Z
fb_dfout_01
Fig. 8.2−8 Signal sequence for CW rotation (definition)
ƒ The output signals correspond to the simulation of an incremental

encoder:
– Track A and track B and, if required, the zero track and the
corresponding inverted tracks are output. The levels are
TTL−compatible.
– Positive input values (CW rotation) result in the represented signal
sequence.
ƒ With negative input values (CCW rotation) track B leads track A by 90 °.
ƒ The encoder constant of the encoder simulation is set in C0030.
C0540 serves to define which input signal or signal source shall be active.
The zero track is output according to the selected setting.
C0540 Signal at X10
0 DFOUT−AN−IN is output to X10. Zero track can be selected externally.
1 DFOUT−DF−IN is output to X10. Zero track can be selected externally.
2 No function
3 No function
4 The signal at input X9 is electrically amplified and directly output (C0030 is without
function)
5 The signal at input X8 is electrically amplified and directly output (C0030 is without
function)
Note!
The settings C0540 = 0 and C0540 = 1 are not possible when a
connection to the master frequency input X9 (DFIN) was
established and an incremental encoder was connected via X8
(C0025 = 100, 110 ... 113).
8.2−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency output (DFOUT) 8.2.3
Output of analog signal as Setting: C0540 = 0

frequency
ƒ The analog signal at the input DFOUT−AN−IN is converted into a
frequency and output to X10.
ƒ Frequency calculation:
f[Hz] + DFOUT−AN−IN[%] @ C0030 @ C0011

100 60
Example:
The input signal at DFOUT−AN−IN amounts to 50 %, the number of
increments corresponds to 2048 inc/rev. (C0030 = 3) and the maximum
speed (C0011) is set to 3000 rpm.
f[Hz] + 50% @ 2048 @ 3000 + 51200Hz

100 60
Generating an index pulse
An artificial index signal can be generated for the output frequency.
1. Set the input DFOUT−SYN−RDY = HIGH.
– 360° later, a LOW−HIGH edge generates the index pulse.
– Then a zero pulse is generated every 360 ° according to C0030.
2. If necessary, shift the zero pulse by up to 360 ° (65536 inc = 360 °) via
C0545.
Output of the speed signal as Setting: C0540 = 1
frequency
ƒ The speed signal at the input DFOUT−DF−IN is converted into a
frequency and output to X10.
ƒ Frequency calculation:
f[Hz] + DFOUT−DF−IN[rpm] @ C0030

60
Example:
The input signal at DFOUT−DF−IN amounts to 3000 rpm, the number of
increments corresponds to 2048 inc/revolution (C0030 = 3).
f[Hz] + 3000rpm @ 2048 + 102400Hz

60
An artificial zero pulse can be generated for the output frequency.
1. Set the input DFOUT−SYN−RDY = HIGH.
– 360° later, a LOW−HIGH edge generates the zero pulse.
– Then a zero pulse is generated every 360 ° according to C0030.
2. If necessary, shift the zero pulse by up to 360 ° (65536 inc = 360 °) via
C0545.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−11

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Signal at X8 is directly output ƒ The input signals at X8 are amplified electrically and output directly.
at X10
ƒ The signals depend on the assignment of the input X8.
ƒ The codes C0030, C0545 and the output DFOUT−OUT have no function.
ƒ The zero track is only output if it is connected to X8.
Signal at X9 is directly output ƒ The input signals at X9 are amplified electrically and output directly.
at X10
ƒ The signals depend on the assignment of the input X9.
ƒ The codes C0030, C0545 and the output DFOUT−OUT have no function.
ƒ The zero track is output if it is connected to X9.
8.2−12 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency ramp−function generator (DFRFG) 8.2.4
8.2.4 Master frequency ramp−function generator (DFRFG)
Description The function block creates acceleration and deceleration ramps for the
operation with master frequency, thus leading the drive to the master
frequency with angular synchronism.
C0751 DFRFG1
C0753
C0755
DFRFG1-SYNC
CTRL
C0752
DFRFG1-IN
C0758 DFRFG1-OUT
C0765
C0754
DFRFG1-QSP
C0759 DFRFG1-FAIL
S Q
C0764/1
R
DFRFG1-STOP
C0760
C0764/2
DFRFG1-RESET
C0761
C0764/3
fb_dfrfg
Fig. 8.2−9 Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG1)

C0751 DFRFG1 Tir 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.999 Acceleration time Tir, function
block DFRFG1 8.2−13
C0752 Max speed 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 Maximum speed, function block
DFRFG1
l Maximum speed−up (speed)
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif for quick
stop, function block DFRFG1
C0754 PH error 2.109 10 {1} . 9
2 10 Following error, function block
DFRFG1
l Maximum permissible phase
difference between setpoint an
actual phase
l 1 rev. = 65535 inc
C0755 Syn window 100 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Synchronisation window, function
block DFRFG1
l 1 rev. = 65535 inc
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−13

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0758 CFG: IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
function block DFRFG1 8.2−13
l Speed/phase setpoint signal
C0759 CFG: QSP 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block DFRFG1
l HIGH = quick stop active
C0760 CFG: STOP 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
function block DFRFG1
l HIGH = Status of the profile
generator is maintained,
setpoint is saved
C0761 CFG: RESET 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
l HIGH = resetting the
integrators
C0764 0 1 Function block DFRFG1
1 DIS: QSP l Display of the signals linked in
C0759, C0760 and C0761
2 DIS: STOP
3 DIS: RESET
C0765 DIS: IN −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block DFRFG1
C0758
8.2−14 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Profile generator
Stop!
Do not operate the drive with this function at the torque
limitation Mmax, Imax.
The profile generator creates ramps which automatically compensate the
resulting phase displacement. If you do not need this compensation, set
DFRFG−RESET = HIGH.
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
C0755
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-SYNC t
Fig. 8.2−10 Synchronisation on DFRFG

C0751 Setting the deceleration and acceleration time
C0752 Setting the maximum speed
C0755 Setting the switching point
When the actual angle has reached its setpoint and the output signal
corresponds to the input signal, the drive runs in synchronism and the
output DFRFG1−SYNC is set to HIGH. At the same time the profile generator
is switched to the inactive state.
Fig. 8.2−11 Speed−time diagram DFRFG
The number of increments at DFRFG1−IN (master drive) defines the set

phase. The set phase can be displayed as a path. The speed−time diagram
shows the distance covered (angle) as the area below the speed profile.
When synchronisation is reached, master and slave have covered the same
distance (phase).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−15

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Quick stop (QSP) Quick stop takes the drive out of the system and brings it to standstill.
Setpoints and actual values are continued to be detected.
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
DFRFG-IN C0752
C0753
DFRFG-QSP t
Fig. 8.2−12 Quick stop DFRFG

C0751 Acceleration and deceleration time of the profile generator
C0752 Maximum speed
C0753 Setting the deceleration time Tif for QSP
ƒ QSP is activated using DFRFG1−QSP = HIGH.

ƒ With DFRFG1−QSP = LOW, QSP is deactivated. The setpoint is
approached via the profile generator.
Ramp function generator stop The function ramp−function generator stop" keeps the state of the profile
generator during operation. Setpoints and actual values are continued to be
detected.
DFRFG-OUT
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-STOP t
Fig. 8.2−13 Ramp function generator stop

C0752 Maximum speed
ƒ The function "ramp−function generator stop" is activated with

DFRFG1−STOP = HIGH.
– The last status is output at DFRFG1−OUT.
ƒ With DFRFG1−STOP = LOW the function ramp−function generator
stop" is reset. The setpoint is approached via the profile generator.
Reset ramp generator ƒ With DFRFG1−RESET = HIGH, the profile generator is activated.
Internally added−up set phases and actual phases are reset.
ƒ The set phase is detected using a HIGH−LOW signal at DFRFG1−RESET.
8.2−16 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Monitoring the phase The profile generator can accept a phase difference between the set phase
difference and the actual phase of up to ±2140000000 inc (= 32000 revolutions).
ƒ A limit value can be set for the permissible phase difference via C0754.
ƒ If the limit value is reached, DFRFG1−FAIL is set to HIGH and the value is
saved.
ƒ DFRFG1−FAIL is only set to LOW with DFRFG1−RESET = HIGH.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−17

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.5 Master frequency processing (DFSET)
Description The function block prepares the master frequency for the controller. You can
select values for the stretching and gearbox factor and carry out a speed or
phase trimming.
C0429 DFSET
DFSET-0-PULSE C0534
C0525 C0546
C0538/1 X5 C0531
2
E4
1
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X5 DFSET-ACK
CTRL
2
E5
1 C0528/1
X9/6,7
C0532 C0535
DFSET-N-TRIM
C0524
C0537
DFSET-RAT-DIV
C0522
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT
C0521
C0536/1 a
a
DFSET-IN a a + DFSET-NOUT
C0520 * b * b +
C0539 b b C0530
C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253
0 + + + DFSET-PSET
1 -
+ +
DFSET-SET
C0527 C0528/2
C0538/3
DFSET-RESET
C0526
DFSET-A-TRIM C0538/2
C0523 * C0529
C0536/3
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
fb_dfset
Fig. 8.2−14 Digital frequency processing (DFSET)

C0033 Gearbox 1 1 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor − denominator of
denom the function block DFSET 8.2−18
C0252 Angle offset 0 −245760000 {1 inc.} 245760000 Phase offset for master frequency
processing, function block DFSET 8.2−18
l Fixed phase offset for digital
frequency configuration
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0253 Angle n−trim à −32767 {1 inc.} 32767 Speed−dependent phase trimming
for the master frequency
processing, function block DFSET
à depending on C0005, C0025,
C0490
l Change of C0005, C0025 or
C0490 resets C0253 to the
corresponding Lenze setting
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
l Value in C0253 is reached at
15000 rpm
8.2−18 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency processing (DFSET) 8.2.5

function block DFSET 8.2−18
l Input of speed / phase setpoint
signal
C0521 CFG: VP−DIV 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block DFSET
l Signal for numerator of
stretching factor
l 100 % = 16384 inc
C0522 CFG: RAT−DIV 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
gearbox factor
l 100 % = 16384 inc
C0523 CFG: A−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Signal for phase trimming via
offset multiplier (C0529)
l 100 % = 16384 inc
C0524 CFG: N−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Signal for speed trimming
C0525 CFG: 0−PULSE 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l Signal for one−time zero pulse
activation
l HIGH = release for zero pulse
synchronisation
C0526 CFG: RESET 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l Signal for reset of integrators
l HIGH sets
– Position difference = 0
– DFSET−PSET = 0
– DFSET−PSET2 = 0
C0527 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = Set phase integrators
to equal values
l LOW−HIGH edge sets
DFSET−PSET = 0
l HIGH−LOW edge sets
DFSET−PSET to the current
value of MCTRL−PHI−SET
l DFSET−SET has a higher priority
than DFSET−RESET
C0528 −2.109 {1} 2.109 Function block DFSET
l Display only 8.2−18
1 DIS: 0−pulse A Phase difference between two
zero pulses
2 DIS: Offset Offset = C0523 × C0529 + C0252
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−19

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0529 Multip offset 1 −20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier, function block
DFSET 8.2−18
l Multiplier for the phase offset
(C0252)
C0530 DF evaluation 0 0 with factor With gearbox Master frequency evaluation,
factor function block DFSET
1 no factor Without gearbox l Evaluation of the setpoint
factor integrator
C0531 Act 0 div 1 1 {1} 16384 Actual zero pulse divisor, function
block DFSET
C0532 0−pulse/TP 1 1 0−pulse Index pulse Zero pulse / touch probe, function
block DFSET
2 Touch probe Touch probe l Zero pulse of the feedback
system or touch probe
C0533 Vp denom 1 1 {1} 32767 Gain factor of denominator Vp,
function block DFSET
C0534 0 pulse fct 0 Zero pulse function, function
block DFSET 8.2−18
l Synchronising the drive
0 inactive Inactive
1 Continuous Continuous
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
2 Cont. switch Continuous After a LOW−HIGH signal to
synchronisation, DFSET−0−pulse, the zero track is
correction in the synchronised once
shortest possible
way
10 Once, fast way One−time
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
11 Once, CW One−time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of
rotation to the
right
12 Once, CCW One−time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of
rotation to the left
13 Once, 2*0−pulse One−time
synchronisation,
correction is
detected from
setpoint pulse and
actual pulse and
corrected to the
corresponding
direction
C0535 Set 0 div 1 1 {1} 16384 Desired zero pulse divisor,
8.2−20 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

C0536 −32767 {1} 32767 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: VP−DIV l Display of the signals linked in 8.2−18
C0521, C0522 and C0523
2 DIS: RAT−DIV
3 DIS: A−TRIM
C0537 DIS: N−TRIM −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DFSET
C0524
C0538 0 1 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: 0−pulse l Display of the signals linked in
C0525, C0526 and C0527
2 DIS: RESET
3 DIS: SET
C0539 DIS: IN −6000 {1 rpm} 6000 Function block DFSET
C0520
C0546 Min inc/rev 1000 1 {1 inc.} 2147483647 Masking of the touch probe signal,
l Suppressing interference
pulses at X5/E4 (actual pulse of
touch probe signal)
l The size of the masking
window between two actual
pulses is set
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−21

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Setpoint conditioning with Stretching factor

stretching and gearbox factor
The stretching factor defines the ratio with which the drive is to run faster
or slower than the setpoint.
The setpoint at DFSET−IN is evaluated. The result is output to DFSET−POUT.
DFSET−POUT + DFSET−IN @ DFSET−VP−DIV

C0533
The stretching factor results from numerator and denominator.
ƒ The numerator (DFSET−VP−DIV) can be defined as a variable from the
analog signal source or as a fixed value from a code.
ƒ Enter the denominator under C0533.
Note!
When calculating the stretching factor, the input signal at
DFSET−VP−DIV is not processed in a scaled mode. A signal of
100 % corresponds to a count value of 16384.
Gearbox factor
The gearbox factor defines the ratio by means of which the drive speed can
be changed additionally.
The setpoint at DFSET−IN, multiplied by the stretching factor, is evaluated.
The result is output at DFSET−NOUT [in % of nmax (C0011)].
DFSET−NOUT + DFSET−IN @ DFSET−VP−DIV @ DFSET−RAT−DIV

C0533 C0033
The gearbox factor results from numerator and denominator.
ƒ The numerator (DFSET−RAT−DIV) can be defined as a variable from the
analog signal source or as a fixed value from a code.
ƒ Enter the denominator under C0033.
Note!
When calculating the gearbox factor, the input signal at
DFSET−RAT−DIV is not processed in a scaled mode. A signal of
100 % corresponds to a count value of 16384.
8.2−22 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Processing of correction Speed trimming

values
The speed trimming serves to add correction values, e. g. by a superimposed
control loop. This enables the drive to accelerate or decelerate.
ƒ At the speed trimming, an analog value at DFSET−N−TRIM is added to
the speed setpoint.
Phase trimming
The phase trimming adds a setpoint at DFSET−A−TRIM to the phase setpoint
and changes the rotor position to the setpoint with the number of
increments provided in either direction (drive is leading or lagging). The
phase is trimmed within a range of ±32767 increments (corresponds to
±½ revolution). Every analog signal can be used as a source.
ƒ The input is done is increments (1 revolution ¢ 65536 increments).
ƒ An analog input signal at DFSET−A−TRIM of
100 % ¢ 1/4 revolution ¢ 16384 increments.
ƒ You can extend the setting range with a multiplier (C0529).
Phase offset
The phase offset (C0252) adds a fixed phase offset to the setpoint of the
drive.
Phase adjustment proportional to speed
With a phase adjustment proportional to speed, the phase leads or lags with
increasing speed.
ƒ Enter the offset in increments under C0253.
ƒ The set phase offset is reached at 15000 rpm of the drive (linear
relationship).
Note!
Phase corrections are only reasonable if the controller is
operated with incremental encoder feedback and the calculated
following error is used for correcting the speed setpoint. The
following error is output to DFSET−PSET.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−23

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Synchronising to zero track or

touch probe
Stop!
When the synchronisation via the terminals X5/E4 and X5/E5
(C0532 = 2) is activated, these terminals must not contain any
other signal connections.
When selecting a basic configuration via C0005, the terminals
contain a basic setting.
Selection of synchronisation
C0532 = 1 (zero pulse) The synchronisation is performed on the zero track of the
digital frequency input X9 and the zero track of the feedback
system set under C0490.
C0532 = 2 (touch probe) The synchronisation is performed using the terminals X5/E4
(actual pulse) and X5/E5 (setpoint pulse).
Touch probe initiators can have delay times which cause a speed−dependent
phase offset.
Set the correction for the phase offset under C0429.
C0429 + 16384 @ Correctionvalue

The correction value for the phase offset can be obtained from the data
sheet of the initiator, or contact the manufacturer.
Synchronisation modes
C0534 Synchronisation mode Note
0 Inactive Function inactive
1 Continuous synchronisation with
correction in the shortest possible way
2 Continuous synchronisation with After a LOW−HIGH signal to
correction in the shortest possible way DFSET−0−pulse, the zero track is
10 One synchronisation. A phase deviation is synchronised once
corrected in the shortest possible way.
11 One synchronisation. A phase deviation is
corrected in CW direction.
12 One synchronisation. A phase deviation is
corrected in CCW direction.
13 Single synchronisation. A phase difference
is determined between setpoint pulse and
actual pulse and is corrected to the
corresponding direction of rotation
according to the sign.
ƒ During synchronisation, DFSET−ACK is set to HIGH.
Note!
Drive synchronisation is only reasonable if the controller is
operated with incremental encoder feedback and the calculated
following error is used for correcting the speed setpoint. The
following error is output to DFSET−PSET.
8.2−24 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1) 8.2.6
8.2.6 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1)
Description The function block MCTRL1 controls the motor. It is always carried out so that
it does not need to be entered into the processing table.
In the Lenze setting, the controller is set to V/f characteristic control
(C0006 = 5). Without other settings and with analog setpoint selection via
X6/1, X6/2 and connected asynchronous standard motor (50 Hz/400 V)
commissioning can be executed immediately.
The V/f characteristic control is suitable for single drives, multi−motor drives,
synchronous motors, reluctance motors and asynchronous motors.
MCTRL1
DCTRL-QSP >
–1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900 Auto-GSB
C0042
C0907/3 C0019 >
–1
C0107 MCTRL-GSB-OUT
MCTRL-GSB
C0904
MCTRL-NSET2
C0905
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0893 n.c. n.c.
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4 MCTRL-MSET2
C0892 n.c.
C0906/3 C0056 MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
C0899 n.c. oscillation damping
C0907/2 MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-I-LOAD active
C0902 n.c.
current
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0235 C0054 MCTRL-IMAX
C0901 n.c.
C0234 C0236
C0105 C0906/5
MCTRL-DCVOLT
QSP
C0053
±100% Imax V/f PWM
1
MCTRL-N-SET 0
C0890 slip compensation
C0906/1
active MCTRL-IXT
MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT current C0022 C0014 C0018
C0910 C0078 C0023 C0015 C0142
C0087 C0064
C0911 C0021 C0075 C0036 C0143
MCTRL-BOOST C0089 C0076 C0089 C0148
C0903 C0086 MCTRL-FACT
C0090 C0909
C0906/6 speed control C0912
MCTRL-M-ADD 1 C0086 C0058
C0891 n.c.
MCTRL-VACT
C0906/2 -
C0052
C0071 C0074 C0025
C0070
MCTRL-M-TEMP
KTY
C0421
C0063
C0011
X8 Encoder
MCTRL-NACT
1
C0420 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X9 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0025 C0051 MCTRL-PHI-ANA

CONST
fb_mctrl1_01
Fig. 8.2−15 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−25

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

1 vector ctrl Vector control In case of the first selection enter 6.8−8
without or with the motor data and identify them
5 V/f V/f characteristic Commissioning without 6.8−4
control identification of the motor data is
possible
and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration
times
l C0059 must be
set correctly
l Set C0010 <
C0011
of analog setpoint
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
frequency which differs from the
rated motor frequency (C0089)
overwrites the value in C0015
C0016 Umin boost 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Umin boost (FCODE) 6.8−4
l C0016 = 1 % corresponds to a
boost of 1 % of the rated motor
voltage (C0090)
8.2−26 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

C0018 fchop 6 Switching frequency of the 6.9−1
inverter
fmax = 150 Hz
à Change of C0086, C0087 or 6.11−1
motor
set to 0
C0036 DC brk value 0.0 0.0 {0.1 A} − Set DC braking current
à depends on the controller 8.2−25

8.2−40
C0042 DIS: QSP Quick stop
0 QSP inactive Quick stop is not active
8.2−40
1 QSP active Quick stop is active
C0050 MCTRL−NSET2 −100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Speed setpoint, function block
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Display of the speed in [%] of
C0011 8.2−40
C0051 MCTRL−NACT −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Actual speed value, function block
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
8.2−40
C0052 MCTRL−Umot 0 {1 V} 800 Motor voltage, function block
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−VACT = 100 % = C0090 8.2−40
C0053 UG−VOLTAGE 0 {1 V} 900 DC−bus voltage, function block
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−DCVOLT = 100 % = 8.2−40
1000 V
C0054 Imot 0.0 {0.1 A} 5000.0 Actual motor current, function
block MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022 8.2−40
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−27

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0056 MCTRL−MSET2 −100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Read only. The output signal
depends on the operating mode: 8.2−25
l Current motor current in case
of V/f characteristic control, 8.2−40
function block MCTRL1
l Torque setpoint in case of
vector control, function block
MCTRL2
C0058 MCTRL−FACT −600.0 {0.1 Hz} 600.0 Output frequency
l MCTRL−FACT = 100.0 % =
1000.0 Hz 8.2−40
C0063 Mot temp 0 {1 °C} 200 Motor temperature
l Read only 8.2−25
l Monitoring of the motor
temperature must be 8.2−40
activated.
l KTY at X8/5, X8/8:
– At 150 °C, TRIP OH3 is set
– Early warning is possible via
OH7, temperature is set in
C0121
l PTC, thermal contact at T1, T2:
– Release sets TRIP or
warning OH8
C0064 Utilization 0 {1 %} 150 Device utilisation I×t
l Device utilisation of the last
180 s operating time 8.2−40
l C0064 > 100 % triggers
warning OC5
l C0064 > 110 % limits the ouput
current of the controller to
67 % of the maximum current
in C0022
C0070 Vp speed CTRL 10.0 0.0 {0.1 } 255.9 Gain of speed controller
C0071 Tn speed CTRL 50 1 {1 ms} 6000 Integral−action time of speed 8.2−25
controller
C0071 = 6000 ms: No 8.2−40
integral−action time
C0074 limit N 10.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Limitation of the speed controller
l Influence of the speed 8.2−25
controller for V/f characteristic
control with feedback 8.2−40
l max. setpoint difference in
percent
controller
controller 8.2−25
8.2−28 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

controller 8.2−25
C0086 Mot type à Motor selection list Motor type selection 6.6−1
à depending on the controller
used
in C0021, C0022, C0081,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
and C0091
the Lenze setting
C0086 = 0
8.2−40
C0107 holding time 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Hold time for automatic DC
injection braking (Auto−GSB) 8.2−25

8.2−40
C0143 limit 2 kHz 0.0 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 20.0 Speed−dependent switching
threshold 8.2−25
l Threshold for automatic
switching frequency reduction 8.2−40
l The controller changes
automatically to 2 kHz when
this value falls below the
threshold
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−29

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

l When C0025 >1 and C0006 = 1,
C0234 is set to 0
C0890 CFG: N−SET 5050 NSET−NOUT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block MCTRL 8.2−25
l Speed setpoint
8.2−40
C0900 CFG: QSP 10250 R/L/Q−QSP Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = drive performs quick
stop 8.2−40
C0903 CFG: BOOST 5015 MCTRL−BOOST Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Boost of the motor voltage
C0904 CFG: DC−BREAK 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = Motor is braked
C0905 DIS: DC−BREAK 0 1 Function block MCTRL 8.2−40
C0904
C0906 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block MCTRL
1 DIS: N−SET l Display of the signals linked in 8.2−25
C0890, C0891, C0892, C0893,
2 DIS: M−ADD C0901 and C0903 8.2−40
3 DIS: LO−M−LIM
4 DIS: HI−M−LIM
5 DIS: I−SET
6 DIS: BOOST
C0907 0 1 Function block MCTRL
1 reserved l Display of the signals linked in
C0899, C0900 and C0902
2 DIS: N/M−SWT
3 DIS: QSP
4 DIS: I−LOAD
C0909 speed limit 1 1 +/− 175 % Speed limitation, function block
MCTRL 8.2−25
2 0 ... 175 %
l Limitation of direction of
3 −175 ... 0 % rotation for the speed setpoint 8.2−40
C0910 CFG: VP−ADAPT 1006 FIXED100% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Gain adaptation of the speed
controller 8.2−40
l If the gain is varying, join to
CURVE−OUT of FB CURVE
C0911 DIS: VP−ADAPT −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block MCTRL
C0910
8.2−30 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Speed setpoint selection ƒ The signal at the input MCTRL−N−SET is the setpoint speed in [%] and
always refers to the maximum speed (C0011).
ƒ In most basic configurations, MCTRL−N−SET is connected to the function
block NSET (speed setpoint conditioning).
– You can also connect MCTRL−N−SET to any other analog output signal
of a function block.
Speed setpoint limitation ƒ The speed setpoint at MCTRL−N−SET is always limited to ±100 % of the
maximum speed nmax (C0011).
ƒ The motor control converts the speed setpoint into a frequency
setpoint, which is limited to a maximum output frequency, depending
on the switching frequency fchop
Switching frequency fchop Maximum output frequency
2 kHz 150 Hz
4 kHz 300 Hz
Setting of the V/f The motor voltage characteristic is set via the input of the motor ratings.
characteristic
Via the input MCTRL−BOOST the motor voltage can be raised. The input is
connected to C0016 (freely configurable) in all basic configurations.
ƒ To adapt the motor voltage boost to your application, you can also
connect the input with other function blocks.
Speed control With feedback operation, a PI controller will control the slip.
Activating the speed control
The speed control is activated when you select an incremental encoder in
C0025.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0070 Gain Vp
C0071 Integral−action time Tn
C0074 Influence of the speed controller at operation with incremental encoder.
Reference is nmax (C0011).
Note!
If the speed controller influence is adapted to the motor slip to
be expected, the motor cannot accelerate in an uncontrolled way
when the incremental encoder fails.
Adaptation of the speed controller
The gain of the speed controller can be changed online via the input
MCTRL−VP−N−ADAPT. The set gain in C0070 is the reference value for an input
signal of 100 %.
ƒ You can influence the gain (C0070) by adapting a function block (e.g.
CURVE) to MCTRL−VP−N−ADAPT.
ƒ The adaptation is switched off in the Lenze default setting.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−31

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Limitation of the output The limitation of the output current is mainly used for the protection of the
current controller and the stabilisation of the control.
When the maximum permissible motor load is exceeded, you can adapt the
max. output current of the controller accordingly.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0022 Maximum current in motor mode
C0023 Maximum current in generator mode
If you select a motor (via C0086), the maximum current of which is clearly
lower than the output current of the controller, the maximum motor current
(C0022) is limited automatically to 200% of the rated motor current.
Mode of operation
In the V/f characteristic control mode, a PI controller (Vp = C0075,
Tn = C0076) prevents an excess of the max. permissible motor current by
reducing (motor overload) or increasing (generator overload) of the output
frequency.
The N controller is not active in the V/f characteristic control mode without
feedback.
Consequences
ƒ The motor cannot follow the speed setpoint.
ƒ MCTRL−IMAX is set to HIGH
ƒ When selecting the automatic switching frequency setting (C0018 = 0
or 6), the controller switches to a lower switching frequency so that a
disconnection is not required.
Automatic speed detection
after controller enable − flying
restart circuit Note!
Due to physical regularities, the operability of the flying restart
circuit depends on the application, the motor and the motor
power.
ƒ With EVF9335 ... EVF9338 and EVF9381 ... EVF9383 devices,
the operability of the flying restart circuit can therefore not be
guaranteed.
8.2−32 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Quick stop (QSP) After a signal request, the motor is decelerated to standstill when an internal
ramp function generator has been activated.
Mode of operation
ƒ Quick stop is active
– MCTRL−QSP = HIGH
– The control word DCTRL−QSP is applied
– DC injection braking (GSB) is not active (GSB has priority over quick
stop)
ƒ If quick stop is active, the motor brakes to standstill with the
deceleration time set in C0105. MCTRL−QSP−OUT is set to HIGH.
Manual DC injection braking ƒ After a signal, the motor is braked by injecting a DC current.
ƒ Braking in generator mode must be used for controlled brake ramps.
ƒ The hold time (C0107) has no influence. The motor remains braked
until MCTRL−GSB is set to LOW.
Note!
Manual DC injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Setting
Selection Code Description
DC braking current C0036 DC braking current with which the motor is braked
Stop!
An excessive DC braking current and braking time can thermally
overload the motor. Special care must be taken when using
self−ventilated motors.
Activation
The input MCTRL−GSB in the function block MCTRL is triggered with HIGH
level.
ƒ MCTRL−GSB = HIGH: Function is activated
ƒ MCTRL−GSB = LOW: Function is not activated
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−33

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure

0
1
5 C0036
9300vec089
Fig. 8.2−16 Signal sequence with DC injection braking

Actual speed value of the motor (e. g. MCTRL−NACT)
Controller output current (e. g. MCTRL−IACT)
Pulse inhibit (e. g. DCTRL−IMP)
Activating DC injection braking (MCTRL−GSB)
DC injection braking is active (MCTRL−GSB−OUT)
MCTRL−GSB−OUT = HIGH: Function is active
MCTRL−GSB−OUT = LOW: Function is not active
The motor rotates with the preset speed. The current adjusts itself as a
function of the load .
DC injection braking is activated with MCTRL−GSB = HIGH. Pulse inhibit
is set. The motor coasts.
The pulse inhibit is deactivated and the DC braking current set in C0036 is
injected
DC injection braking is deactivated with MCTRL−GSB = LOW
The motor is accelerated to speed setpoint at the set acceleration ramp and
is kept there.
8.2−34 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Automatic DC injection When the speed falls below a settable speed setpoint threshold, the function
braking
"DC injection braking" is activated.
Note!
Automatic DC−injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Setting
Speed setpoint threshold C0019 If the values fall below the threshold, DC−injection
braking is released
Hold time C0107 Duration of DC−injection braking. After the hold time,
pulse inhibit is set.
Stop!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−35

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure
Automatic DC injection braking provides two function procedures, each
with a different reaction of the controller. The parameter setting is identical
for both function procedures.
Function procedure 1:
ƒ After the hold time has elapsed (C0107), the controller automatically
sets pulse inhibit .

0
2
5 C0036
C0107
9300vec090
Fig. 8.2−17 Signal characteristic with automatic DC injection braking

Speed setpoint (e. g. AIN−OUT)
With a speed setpoint < speed threshold (C0019), DC injection braking is
activated. Pulse inhibit is set. The motor coasts.
injected
After the hold time (C0107) pulse inhibit is set
8.2−36 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
ƒ If you define a speed setpoint > speed threshold (C0019) before the
hold time elapses, DC−injection braking is deactivated and the drive
follows the speed setpoint. If the speed falls below the threshold again,
DC−injection braking is reactivated and the hold time is restarted.

0
C0019
2
5 C0036
9300vec091

injected
DC−injection braking is deactivated as soon as the speed setpoint exceeds
the speed threshold (C0019). The motor is accelerated to the defined speed
setpoint and kept there.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−37

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Oscillation damping Suppressing no−load oscillations in case of:

involved.
Adjustment
The Lenze setting is designed for power−adapted motors.
increase it).
8.2−38 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Slip compensation The speed of an asynchronous machine decreases when being loaded. This
load−dependent speed drop is called slip. By setting C0021 the slip can be
partly compensated.
In the V/f characteristic control mode the slip compensation is only active at
operation without feedback (C0025 = 1).
The slip compensation (C0021) is automatically calculated from the rated
motor speed (C0087) and the rated motor frequency (C0089). The entered
slip constant [%] is the rated slip of the motor in [%] relating to the
synchronous speed of the motor.
ƒ Calculating the slip compensation and entering it into C0021:
n rsyn * n r E Slip constant (C0021) [%]

s+ n rsyn @ 100% nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [min−1]
f r @ 60 nr Rated motor speed according to

n rsyn + p motor nameplate [min−1]
fr Rated motor frequency according to
motor nameplate [Hz]
p Number of motor pole pairs
(1, 2, 3, ...)
ƒ If required, the slip compensation can be adapted manually:

– If C0021 is set too high, the drive may get unstable.
– With cyclic load impulses (e. g. centrifugal pump) a smooth motor
characteristic is achieved by smaller values in C0021 (possibly
negative values)
– Parameterise C0078 (filter time for the slip compensation) if you
want to change the motor response time to load changes
(dynamic « slow).
ƒ The actual speed is output as an analog signal (in [%] of nmax (C0011))
to MCTRL−NACT.
Note!
When operating synchronous or reluctance motors, C0021 must
be set to 0.
Inhibiting the direction of If the motor may only rotate in one direction, you can limit the output
rotation voltage generation to one direction of rotation via C0909.
Code Description
C0909 = 1 The motor rotates in both directions
C0909 = 2 Motor rotates clockwise, "positive direction of rotation"
(View of the motor shaft)
C0909 = 3 Motor rotates counter−clockwise, "negative direction of rotation"
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−39

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.7 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2)
Description The function block MCTRL2 controls the motor. Since it is always executed,
it does not need to be entered into the processing table.
Compared with the V/f characteristic control the vector control (C0006 = 1)
has a much higher torque efficiency at the same motor current. The motor
is monitored and controlled via an internal motor model. This serves to
achieve an optimum operating behaviour of the motor at any time.
The vector control can be used for single drives, asynchronous motors and
multi−motor drives of the same type with rigid coupling.
MCTRL2
DCTRL-QSP >
–1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900 Auto-GSB
C0042
C0907/3 C0019 >
–1
C0107 MCTRL-GSB-OUT
MCTRL-GSB
C0904
MCTRL-NSET2
C0905
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0893
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4
C0892
C0056 MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-N/M-SWT C0906/3
C0899
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-I-LOAD C0907/2
C0902 C0054 MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4
C0901 MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0105 C0906/5 C0053
QSP
±100%
1 + + 1 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET 0
0 + 0
C0890 - + 1
C0906/1
MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT MCTRL-IXT
C0910 C0070 C0022 C0018
C0071 C0023 C0021
C0911 C0081 C0036 C0064
C0497
C0086 C0087 C0075
MCTRL-BOOST speed control MCTRL-FACT
C0903 n.c. C0088 C0076
C0089 C0143
C0906/6 C0090 C0234 C0058
C0091 C0235 MCTRL-VACT
MCTRL-M-ADD
C0891 C0082 C0236
C0084 C0909 C0052
C0906/2 C0148
C0085
C0092
C0898 MCTRL-M-TEMP
C0912 KTY
C0421 C0063
C0011
X8 Encoder
MCTRL-NACT
1
C0420 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X9 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0025 C0051 MCTRL-PHI-ANA

CONST
fb_mctrl2_01
Fig. 8.2−19 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2)
8.2−40 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2) 8.2.7

1 vector ctrl Vector control In case of the first selection enter 6.8−8
without or with the motor data and identify them
control identification of the motor data is
possible
and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration
times
l C0059 must be
set correctly
l Set C0010 <
C0011
of analog setpoint
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
inverter
fmax = 150 Hz
C0019 Thresh nact=0 0 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Operating threshold − automatic
DC injection brake (Auto−GSB) 8.2−25
l Falling below the threshold in
C0019 activates automatic DC 8.2−40
injection braking when the
holding time set under C0107 >
0
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−41

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

à Change of C0086, C0087 or 6.11−1
motor
set to 0
C0025 Feedback type 1 Speed feedback 6.7−1
1 no feedback No feedback
number of l Incremental encoders with TTL
increments in level can only be connected to
C0420 X8.
number of l Connect incremental encoders
increments in with HTL−level on X9 only
C0420
increments: l Incremental encoders with TTL
110 IT512−5V 512 inc level can only be connected to
X8.
111 IT1024−5V 1024 inc
112 IT2048−5V 2048 inc
113 IT4096−5V 4096 inc

8.2−40
8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
C0011 8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−VACT = 100 % = C0090 8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−DCVOLT = 100 % = 8.2−40
1000 V
l Read only
l MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022 8.2−40
8.2−42 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

depends on the operating mode: 8.2−25
MCTRL2
1000.0 Hz 8.2−40
activated.
C0121
warning OH8
warning OC5
in C0022
controller
C0071 = 6000 ms: No 8.2−40
controller
controller 8.2−25
C0082 Mot Rr à 0.0000 {0.0001 W} 65.5350 Motor rotor resistance 6.6−1
parameter identification from 6.6−16
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090
and C0091
l Selection of a motor in C0086
sets the corresponding rotor
resistance value
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−43

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0084 Mot Rs à 0.00 {0.01 mW} 100000. Motor stator resistance 6.6−1
00 à Value is determined by motor
parameter identification 6.6−16
(C0148, C0149)
used
in C0021, C0022, C0081,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
current in C0088
0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
8.2−44 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

C0093 Drive ident Controller identification
l Read only
0 Invalid Defective power section
1 None No power section
14 9335VC 400V Display of the controller used
... ...
20 9383VC 400V
21 9334VC 500V
... ...
28 9383VC 500V
9321 9321 VC
... ...
9333 9333VC
C0094 Password 0 0 {1} 9999 Password 7.2−9
l C0094 = 1 ... 9999: Free access
to the user menu only
and C0091
the Lenze setting
C0086 = 0
8.2−40

8.2−40
threshold 8.2−25
switching frequency reduction 8.2−40
threshold
l When C0025 >1 and C0006 = 1,
C0234 is set to 0
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−45

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0420 Encoder const 512 1 {1 inc/rev} 8192 Number of increments for 6.7−1
incremental encoder at X8 or X9
l Connect incremental encoders
with HTL−level on X9 only
C0421 Enc voltage 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Supply voltage for the incremental
encoder at X8
destroy the incremental encoder!
C0497 Nact filter 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Filter time constant Nact for actual
speed value, function block 8.2−40
MCTRL2
l Internal filtering of the speed
signal for control
l C0497 = 0 ms: Switched off
l Speed setpoint
8.2−40
C0891 CFG: M−Add 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Additional torque setpoint or
torque setpoint
C0892 CFG: Lo−M−LIM 5700 ANEG1−OUT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block MCTRL
l Lower torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0893 CFG: HI−M−LIM 19523 FCODE−472/3 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Upper torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0898 CFG: M−LIM 0 0 M−LIM ON Reduced torque Torque limitation in the field
switch limit is active weakening range, function block 8.2−40
MCTRL
l If the torque limit is reduced,
the maximum possible torque
1 M−LIM OFF Reduced torque in the field weakening range is
limit is inactive lowered with 1/f. This provides
a higher motor stability in the
field weakening range
C0899 CFG: N/M−SWT 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l LOW = active speed control
l HIGH = active torque control
stop 8.2−40
C0901 CFG: I−SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Setting of integral action
component of the speed
controller
C0902 CFG: I−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = the integral action
component at MCTRL−I−SET is
accepted by the speed
controller
8.2−46 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

C0904 CFG: DC−BREAK 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
C0904
1 DIS: N−SET l Display of the signals linked in 8.2−25
C0890, C0891, C0892, C0893,
2 DIS: M−ADD C0901 and C0903 8.2−40
3 DIS: LO−M−LIM
4 DIS: HI−M−LIM
5 DIS: I−SET
6 DIS: BOOST
1 reserved l Display of the signals linked in
C0899, C0900 and C0902
2 DIS: N/M−SWT
3 DIS: QSP
4 DIS: I−LOAD
MCTRL 8.2−25
2 0 ... 175 %
l Limitation of direction of
3 −175 ... 0 % rotation for the speed setpoint 8.2−40
C0910 CFG: VP−ADAPT 1006 FIXED100% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
controller 8.2−40
C0910
Speed setpoint selection ƒ The signal at the input MCTRL−N−SET is the setpoint speed in [%] and
always refers to the maximum speed (C0011).
ƒ In most basic configurations, MCTRL−N−SET is connected to the function
block NSET (speed setpoint conditioning).
– You can also connect MCTRL−N−SET to any other analog output signal
of a function block.
Speed setpoint limitation ƒ The speed setpoint at MCTRL−N−SET is always limited to ±100 % of the
maximum speed nmax (C0011).
ƒ The motor control converts the speed setpoint into a frequency
setpoint, which is limited to a maximum output frequency, depending
on the switching frequency fchop
Switching frequency fchop Maximum output frequency
2 kHz 150 Hz
4 kHz 300 Hz
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−47

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Speed control A PI controller compares the speed setpoint with the actual speed of the
motor model and creates a torque setpoint from the speed variation.
ƒ the actual speed is output as an analog signal (in [%] of nmax (C0011))
to MCTRL−NACT.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0070 Gain Vp
C0071 Integral−action time Tn
Operation with speed feedback

To change over to operation with external speed feedback, the incremental
encoder must be selected via C0025. The external speed feedback serves to
operate the motor in all of the four torque/speed quadrants.
Adaptation of the speed controller
Use the input MCTRL−VP−N−ADAPT to change the gain of the speed controller
online. The set gain in C0070 is the reference value for an input signal of
100 %.
ƒ By adapting a function block (e.g. CURVE) to MCTRL−VP−N−ADAPT you
can influence the gain (C0070).
ƒ In the Lenze setting the adaptation is deactivated.
Behaviour when speed setpoint = 0
If the speed setpoint = 0 (MCTRL−N−SET = 0) and actual speed value » 0
(MCTRL−NACT » 0), the speed controller is switched off. The motor merely
receives its magnetising current.
Behaviour in braking operation at very low speed
Stop!
A longer−lasting braking operation with very low speed can lead
to an unstable vector control. Remedy:
ƒ Passing through the critical speed range more quickly.
ƒ Using speed feedback.
8.2−48 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Temperature detection
For motors with temperature detection (KTY83−110) the controller can
consider temperature changes in its motor model. The accuracy and stability
of the vector control are improved considerably.
ƒ Sensor connection:
– X8/5 = −KTY (rt/ws/bl)
– X8/8 = +KTY (br/gr/sw)
Note!
You can also use the thermal sensor (KTY) without speed
feedback.
ƒ When monitoring SD6 (C0594) is activated, temperature feedback is
activated at the same time.
ƒ First, activate the temperature feedback and then start the motor
identification to consider the motor temperature.
ƒ In addition, you can activate and parameterise the monitoring
functions OH3 (C0583) and OH7 (C0584).
ƒ The current motor temperature can be displayed via C0063.
Setting integral action component
To initialise the speed controller with a starting torque, the integral action
component of the speed controller can be described via MCTRL−I−SET
(starting value) and MCTRL−I−LOAD (control signal).
Input signal Effect
MCTRL−I−LOAD = HIGH l The speed controller transmits the value at MCTRL−I−SET to its
integral action component
l The P component is switched off
MCTRL−I−LOAD = LOW The speed controller is active
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−49

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Torque limitation in the field The function is suitable for applications which also require a constant torque
weakening range in the field weakening range.
ƒ With quick stop (QSP) the torque limitation becomes inactive.
ƒ When the motor torque reaches the defined limit, the drive cannot
follow the speed setpoint anymore and the output MCTRL−MMAX is set
to HIGH.
External setting of torque limits
If the maximum torque reached in the field weakening operation is too low,
the torque limits can be changed via the inputs MCTRL−HI−M−LIM and
MCTRL−LO−M−LIM.
ƒ MCTRL−HI−M−LIM defines the upper torque limit in [%] of the maximum
torque displayed in C0057.
Maximum possible input value: 199.99 %
ƒ MCTRL−LO−M−LIM defines the lower torque limit in [%] of the maximum
torque displayed in C0057.
Minimum possible input value: −199.99 %
Note!
The maximum possible torque displayed under C0057refers to
the basic speed range (zero speed to rated speed of the motor)
and is calculated from the nameplate data and the setting of the
maximum motor current under C0022.
8.2−50 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
M
199 %
100 %
1
80 %
2
nN 2 nN 3 nN n
9300vec153
Fig. 8.2−20 Torque characteristics when being evaluated with C0898

"Internal limit characteristic" when C0898 = 1 and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM = 199 %
Boost of the upper torque limit when MCTRL−HI−M−LIM = 199 % and
C0898 = 0
Torque characteristic when C0898 = 1 and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM = 80 %
Torque characteristic when C0898 = 0 and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM = 80 %
Evaluating torque limits using C0898

Code C0898 serves to evaluate the defined torque limits at the inputs
MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM using the function 1/fact. This serves
to reduce the torque.
Evaluation of the torque C0898 = 0 Lenze setting
limit in the field The input signals at MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and
weakening range MCTRL−HI−M−LIM are evaluated with 1/fact.
C0898 = 1 An "internal limit characteristic" which corresponds
to a maximum torque limit of ±199,99 % is evaluated
with 1/fact.
l The torque remains constant until the limit
characteristic is reached. This requires that the
controller provides a sufficient amount of current
and the motor is stable within the required speed
range.
l The input signals at MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and
MCTRL−HI−M−LIM are not evaluated with 1/fact.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−51

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Limitation of the output The output current is mainly limited for protecting the controller and
current stabilising the drive control.
If the maximum permissible motor load is exceeded, the maximum output
current of the controller must be adjusted accordingly.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0022 Maximum current in motor mode
C0023 Maximum current in generator mode
If you select a motor via C0086 the maximum current of which is much lower
than the output current of the controller, the maximum current in motor
mode (C0022) is automatically limited to the double rated motor current.
Mode of functioning
In the vector control mode the limit values are complied with by means of
the automatic limitation of the speed controller.
The speed controller is limited if the motor current has reached the limit set
under C0022 or C0023 (the controller supplies the max. output current). In
this status
Consequences
ƒ The motor cannot follow the speed setpoint.
ƒ MCTRL−IMAX is set to HIGH.
ƒ When selecting the automatic chopper frequency setting (C0018 = 0 or
6) a switch−over to a lower chopper frequency is carried out, so that the
unit will not be switched off.
8.2−52 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Torque control with speed As an alternative to the speed control, the vector control can be switched to
limitation torque control with speed limitation.
Note!
In the basic configurations C0005 = 4xxx the torque control with
speed limitation is already set.
ƒ When MCTRL−N/M−SWT = HIGH, the torque control with speed
limitation is active.
– The torque control with torque setpoint selection via MCTRL−M−ADD
is active.
– MCTRL−M−ADD acts as a bipolar torque setpoint.
– The sign of the speed limitation value at MCTRL−N−SET is
automatically created from the sign of the torque setpoint at
MCTRL−M−ADD. Thus, the speed limitation value acts in both
directions of rotation.
– The actual torque is output as analog signal (in [%] of Mmax (C0057))
to MCTRL−MACT.
Stop!
If the motor is to create a holding torque at standstill, the torque
setpoint must not fall below a certain limit.
ƒ Depending on the motor type and accuracy of the identified
motor parameters, the vector control can become unstable if
the torque setpoint <10 % ... 20 %.
ƒ Operate the motor with speed feedback when the required
holding torque is within the critical region.
Automatic speed detection

after controller enable − flying
restart circuit Note!
Due to physical regularities, the operability of the flying restart
circuit depends on the application, the motor and the motor
power.
ƒ With EVF9335 ... EVF9338 and EVF9381 ... EVF9383 devices,
the operability of the flying restart circuit can therefore not be
guaranteed.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−53

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Quick stop (QSP) After a signal, the motor is decelerated to standstill when an internal ramp
function generator has been activated.
Mode of operation
ƒ Quick stop is active
– MCTRL−QSP = HIGH
– The control word DCTRL−QSP is applied
– DC injection braking (GSB) is not active (GSB has priority over quick
stop)
ƒ When quick stop is active:
– the motor decelerates to standstill with the deceleration time set in
C0105,
– A torque control is deactivated and the motor is controlled by the
speed controller.
– The torque limitations MCTRL−LO−M−LIM and MCTRL−HI−M−LIM are
deactivated.
– MCTRL−QSP−OUT is set to HIGH.
Note!
When the motor is at standstill, the field current is injected into
the motor.
8.2−54 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Manual DC injection braking ƒ After a signal, the motor is braked by injecting a DC current.
ƒ Braking in generator mode must be used for controlled brake ramps.
ƒ The hold time (C0107) has no influence. The motor remains braked
until MCTRL−GSB is set to LOW.
Note!
Manual DC injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Special features of vector control with feedback
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) £ than the motor magnetising
current, the motor magnetising current is injected.
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) > than the motor magnetising
current, the DC braking current is injected.
Setting
Stop!
Activation
The input MCTRL−GSB in the function block MCTRL is triggered with HIGH
level.
ƒ MCTRL−GSB = HIGH: Function is activated
ƒ MCTRL−GSB = LOW: Function is not activated
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−55

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure

0
1
5 C0036
9300vec089
Fig. 8.2−21 Signal sequence with DC injection braking

Activating DC injection braking (MCTRL−GSB)
DC injection braking is activated with MCTRL−GSB = HIGH. Pulse inhibit
is set. The motor coasts.
injected
DC injection braking is deactivated with MCTRL−GSB = LOW
The motor is accelerated to speed setpoint at the set acceleration ramp and
is kept there.
8.2−56 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Automatic DC injection When the speed falls below a settable speed setpoint threshold, the function
braking
"DC injection braking" is activated.
Note!
Automatic DC−injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Special features of vector control with feedback
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) £ than the motor magnetising
current, the motor magnetising current is injected.
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) > than the motor magnetising
current, the DC braking current is injected.
Setting
Speed setpoint threshold C0019 If the values fall below the threshold, DC−injection
braking is released
Hold time C0107 Duration of DC−injection braking. After the hold time,
pulse inhibit is set.
Stop!
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−57

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure
Automatic DC injection braking provides two function procedures, each
with a different reaction of the controller. The parameter setting is identical
for both function procedures.
ƒ After the hold time has elapsed (C0107), the controller automatically
sets pulse inhibit .

0
2
5 C0036
C0107
9300vec090

injected
After the hold time (C0107) pulse inhibit is set
8.2−58 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
ƒ If you define a speed setpoint > speed threshold (C0019) before the
hold time elapses, DC−injection braking is deactivated and the drive
follows the speed setpoint. If the speed falls below the threshold again,
DC−injection braking is reactivated and the hold time is restarted.

0
C0019
2
5 C0036
9300vec091

injected
DC−injection braking is deactivated as soon as the speed setpoint exceeds
the speed threshold (C0019). The motor is accelerated to the defined speed
setpoint and kept there.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−59

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Oscillation damping Suppressing no−load oscillations in case of:

involved.
Adjustment
The Lenze setting is designed for power−adapted motors.
increase it).
Note!
Restricted effect with vector control
ƒ The oscillation damping has no influence on the drive
behaviour at low tendency to oscillation of the speed
controller.
ƒ Especially for drives > 55 kW with a tendency to oscillation it
may be necessary to deactivate the oscillation damping
(C0234 = 0 %).
ƒ For operation with feedback the oscillation damping has no
influence.
8.2−60 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Slip compensation Vector control

Use C0021 to change the influence of the rotor resistance (C0082)
proportionally:
ƒ Reduce the value in C0021 at an increasing speed (negative values)
ƒ Increase the value in C0021 at a decreasing speed
Note!
Inhibiting the direction of If the motor may only rotate in one direction, you can limit the output
rotation voltage generation to one direction of rotation via C0909.
Code Description
C0909 = 1 The motor rotates in both directions
C0909 = 2 Motor rotates clockwise, "positive direction of rotation"
C0909 = 3 Motor rotates counter−clockwise, "negative direction of rotation"
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.2−61

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.3
Fault responses 8.3.1
8.3 Monitoring
Various monitoring functions ( 8.4−1) protect the drive system against

impermissible operating conditions.
If a monitoring function responds,
ƒ the set fault response is triggered to protect the drive and
ƒ the fault message is entered at position 1 in the fault history buffer
(C4168/x) ( 9.2−1).
8.3.1 Fault responses
Depending on the failure, one or more of the following responses are

possible:
Response Effects on the drive and controller Danger warnings
TRIP l Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high
(highest resistance until TRIP is reset
priority) l The drive coasts (no control!).
l After TRIP reset, the drive accelerates to its
setpoint on the ramps set.
Message Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high
resistance as long as the message is active.
l Short− The drive coasts (no control) as long
Danger!
The drive restarts
time as the message is active. automatically if the message
message If the message is no longer available, is no longer available.
£ 0.5 s the drive accelerates to its setpoint
with maximum torque.
l Longer The drive coasts (due to internal
message controller inhibit) as long as the
> 0.5 s message is active.
If required, restart the drive.
Warning l Only display of the failure.
l The drive operates in a controlled manner. Stop!
Off l No response on failures! Monitoring is As these responses have no
deactivated. effect on the drive behaviour,
the drive can be destroyed.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.3−1

8 Configuration
8.3 Monitoring
8.3.2 Monitoring times for process data input objects
8.3.2 Monitoring times for process data input objects
Each process data input object can monitor whether a telegram has been
received within a time set. As soon as a telegram arrives, the corresponding
monitoring time (C0357) is restarted ("retriggerable monoflop" function).
The following assignments are valid:
Setting the response to the monitoring:
ƒ C0591 for CAN1_IN ("CE1")
The following can be set:
ƒ 0 = error (TRIP) − controller sets controller inhibit (CINH)
ƒ 2 = warning
ƒ 3 = monitoring is switched off
You can also use the signals as binary output signals, e. g. for the assignment
of the output terminal.
Bus off If the controller disconnects from the CAN bus due to faulty telegrams, the
"BusOffState" (CE4) signal is set.
"BusOffState" can trigger an error (TRIP) or warning (like CE1, CE2, CE3). You
can also switch the signal off. The response is set via C0595. You can also
assign the terminal output.
Reset node Changes with regard to the baud rates, the CAN node addresses, or the
addresses of process data objects are only valid after a reset node.
The reset node can be effected by:
ƒ A reconnection of the low−voltage supply
ƒ Reset node via the bus system
ƒ Reset node via C0358
8.3−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.3
Maximum speed 8.3.3
8.3.3 Maximum speed
Stop!
Destruction of the drive!
ƒ If the fault is triggered, the drive is without torque.
ƒ In the event of an actual speed value encoder failure it is not
guaranteed that the monitoring responds.
ƒ Use a mechanical brake if necessary.
ƒ Special, system−specific measures are to be taken.
The NMAX fault is triggered if the system speed (MCTRL−NACT)

ƒ exceeds the value set under C0596 or
ƒ exceeds the maximum speed nmax (C0011) by twice the max. speed
value.
A fault initiates TRIP NMAX. Other responses cannot be set.
8.3.4 Motor
Overcurrent in the motor Fault OC1 is triggered if the motor current exceeds the 2.25−fold rated
cable (OC1)
controller current.
If a fault occurs, TRIP OC1 is triggered. Other responses cannot be set.
Earth fault in the motor cable The OC2 fault is triggered if

(OC2)
ƒ the motor has a short circuit to the frame,
ƒ one of the phases has a short circuit to the shield,
ƒ one of the phases has a short circuit to PE,
ƒ the capacitive charging current of the motor cable is too high.
A fault initiates TRIP OC2. Other responses cannot be set.
Overload during acceleration Fault OC3 is activated in the case of a too great load during acceleration. The
or deceleration (OC3)
acceleration times or deceleration times (C0012, C0013, C0105) are set too
short in proportion to the load.
If a fault occurs, TRIP OC3 is activated. Other responses cannot be set.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.3−3

8 Configuration
8.3 Monitoring
8.3.5 Controller current load (I x t monitoring)
Failure of a motor phase (LP1) If a current−carrying motor phase fails, a motor winding is broken or the
current limit value set in C0599 is too high, the LP1 fault is triggered.
The monitoring is not appropriate for field frequencies > 480 Hz and when
synchronous servo motors are used. Deactivate the monitoring at these
conditions.
The response to exceeding the thresholds can be set under C0597.
Note!
The monitoring can only be activated if the function block MLP1
is entered in the processing table (C0465).
8.3.5 Controller current load (I x t monitoring)
Ir
200 %
150 %
100 %
70 %
10 60 120 180 t [s]

9300std228
Fig. 8.3−1 I × t diagram

Ir Device output current
100 % continuous thermal current at C0022 £ 1.5 Ir
70 % continuous thermal current at C0022 > 1.5 Ir
The I × t monitoring monitors the current load of the controller. The current
load is calculated from the mean value of the motor current over the
acquisition period of 180 s.
The monitoring is set in such a way that the following operation modes are
possible:
ƒ Continuously with device output current = Ir.
ƒ £ 60 s with device output current £ 1.5 x Ir.
A fault initiates TRIP OC5. Other responses cannot be set.
8.3−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.3
Motor temperature 8.3.6
8.3.6 Motor temperature
KTY at X7 or X8 The motor temperature is monitored by means of a KTY. Connect the

thermal sensor to the resolver cable at X7 or the encoder cable at X8.
ƒ Warning threshold (OH7) can be set via C0121
– The switch−on point is 5 °C below the threshold set.
ƒ Fixed warning threshold (OH3) = 150 °C
– The switch−on point is 135 °C.
The response for the case when the thresholds are exceeded can be defined
in:
ƒ C0584 (adjustable threshold)
ƒ C0583 (fixed threshold)
Stop!
With the setting C0583 = 3, monitoring is deactivated. The
motor temperature in C0063 shows 0 °C, even if C0584 = 2
(warning) is set.
Monitoring of the KTY at X7 The SD6 fault is triggered if there is a short or open circuit between X7/8 and
or X8
X7/9 or X8/5 and X8/8.
The response can be set under C0594.
PTC thermistor or thermal The motor temperature is monitored with a PTC thermistor or thermal
contact (NC contact) at T1, T2
contact. Wire the temperature sensor to T1, T2.
ƒ Fixed warning threshold (OH8)
– The switch−off threshold and the hysteresis depend on the
temperature sensor (DIN 44081).
The response to exceeding the threshold can be set under C0585.
Stop!
Motor could be destroyed!
ƒ If the responses "Warning" or "Off" are set, the motor could be
destroyed by overload.
Protective measure:
ƒ Set the response "TRIP".
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.3−5

8 Configuration
8.3 Monitoring
8.3.7 Heatsink temperature
8.3.7 Heatsink temperature
Via a temperature threshold, the heatsink temperature of the controller can

be monitored:
ƒ Adjustable threshold (OH4) under C0122
– The reset point is 5° C below the adjusted threshold.
ƒ Fixed threshold (OH) = 85° C
– The reset point is at 80° C.
The response for exceeding the adjustable threshold can be set under C0582.
8.3−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Monitoring 8.3
DC−bus voltage 8.3.8
8.3.8 DC−bus voltage
In C0173 the mains voltage and DC−bus voltage are set. From this the
switching thresholds for overvoltage and undervoltage result.
EVF9335 ... EVF9338 Selection Mains Operation Message LU Message OU
EVF9381 ... EVF9383 voltage with brake (undervoltage) (overvoltage)
transistor
C0173 set reset set reset
[V AC] [V DC] [V DC] [V DC] [V DC]
ExV210 0 < 400 yes / no 285 430 770 755
ExV240 1 400 yes / no 285 430 770 755
ExV270
2 460 yes / no 328 473 770 755
ExV300
3 480 no 342 487 770 755
4 480 yes 342 487 800 785
5 500 yes / no 342 487 900 885
Ex read 400 yes / no 285 430 700 685
ExV060 only
ExV110
C0173 = 1: Lenze setting
Overvoltage If the DC−bus voltage exceeds the upper switch−off threshold set in C0173,
warning OU is activated.
Undervoltage If the DC−bus voltage falls below the lower switch−off threshold set in C0173,
the LU message is triggered.
ƒ An undervoltage message > 3 seconds is interpreted as an operating
state (e.g. mains switched off) and entered in the history buffer. The
entry is, however, deleted as soon as the cause has been eliminated
(e.g. mains switched on again).
This operating state can occur if the control module is already supplied
externally via terminals X5/39 and X5/59, but the mains voltage is not yet
switched on.
ƒ An undervoltage message < 3 seconds is interpreted as a fault
(e.g.mains fault), entered in the history buffer and saved.
8.3.9 External error (EEr)
A HIGH signal at DCTRL−TRIP−SET triggers the EEr fault.

You can, for example, connect the digital input DCTRL−TRIP−SET with an
input terminal (X5/Ex). In this way an external encoder can trigger the EEr
fault.
The response can be set under C0581.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.3−7

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009
8.4 Overview of monitoring functions
The responses of monitoring functions can be partly parameterised via codes ˘ in GDC in the parameter menu under
Monitoring ˘.
Monitoring Possible responses
l Lenze setting
ü Setting possible
Error message Description Source CoDe TRIP Message Warning Off
0071 CCr System fault Internal l

x091 EEr External monitoring (activated via DCTRL) FWM C0581 l ü ü ü
Voltage supply
2020 OU Overvoltage in the DC bus (C0173) MCTRL l
1030 LU Undervoltage in the DC bus (C0173) MCTRL l
0107 H07 Internal fault (power section) Internal l
Communication
x061 CE0 Communication error on the automation interface (AIF) AIF C0126 ü ü l
x062 CE1 Communication error at process data input object CAN1_IN (monitoring time can be set CAN1_IN C0591 ü ü l
with C0357/1)
with C0357/2)
Overview of monitoring functions

with C0357/3)
x065 CE4 BUS−OFF state of the system bus (CAN) CAN C0595 ü ü l
(too many faulty telegrams)
Temperatures / sensors
0050 OH Heatsink temperature > 85° C MCTRL l
x053 OH3 Motor temperature > 150° C MCTRL C0583 ü ü l
l ü
Configuration
x054 OH4 Heatsink temperature > C0122 MCTRL C0582
x057 OH7 Motor temperature > C0121 MCTRL C0584 l ü
x058 OH8 Motor temperature across inputs T1 and T2 is too high. MCTRL C0585 ü ü l
Please note: In the case of "Warning" (C0585 = 2) or "Off" (C0585 = 3), the drive can be
destroyed if the fault is not eliminated in time!
x086 Sd6 Thermal sensor error at motor (X7 or X8) MCTRL C0594 ü ü l
x110 H10 Thermal sensor error at heatsink FWM C0588 l 1) 1)
x111 H11 Thermal sensor error in the device interior FWM C0588 l 1) 1)
Motor / feedback system

0011 OC1 Motor cable overcurrent MCTRL l
0012 OC2 Motor cable earth fault MCTRL l
8.4−1
0013 OC3 Overload at acceleration or deceleration MCTRL l
8.4
8
8.4
8
8.4−2
Monitoring Possible responses

l Lenze setting
ü Setting possible
Error message Description Source CoDe TRIP Message Warning Off
0015 OC5 I x t overload MCTRL l

x032 LP1 Motor phase failure MCTRL C0597 ü ü l
Overview of monitoring functions

Configuration
(current limit can be set in C0599)
Please note: Can only be used for asynchronous motors. The function block MLP1 has to
be entered in C0465.
x083 Sd3 Interruption of the digital frequency coupling. The input signal ˜Lamp Control˜ at X9/8 MCTRL C0587 l ü ü
is LOW
Please note: In the case of "Warning" (C0587 = 2), the drive can be destroyed if the
fault is not eliminated in time!
x085 Sd5 At analog input X6/1, X6/2, the input current is < 2 mA MCTRL C0598 ü ü l
Monitoring only possible if C0034 = 1
0140 ID1 Motor data identifcation − characteristic MCTRL l
0141 ID2 Motor data identification − motor data MCTRL l
Speed
0200 NMAX Maximum speed (C0596) has been exceeded. MCTRL l
Time−out / overflow
0105 H05 Intern fault (memory) Internal l

Parameter setting
0072 PR1 Checksum error in parameter set 1 Internal l
0074 PEr Program error Internal l
0075 PR0 Error in the parameter sets Internal l
0079 PI Fault during the parameter initialisation Internal l
Representation of the error number:
x 0 = TRIP, 1 = message, 2 = warning
E. g. "2091": An external monitoring has triggered EEr warning
1) Setting only permitted by Lenze service
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009
Configuration 8
Code table 8.5
8.5 Code table
How to read the code table:
Column Abbreviation Meaning

Code Cxxxx Code Cxxxx l Parameter value of the code can be defined
1 Subcode 1 of Cxxxx differently in each parameter set
l Parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE)
2 Subcode 2 of Cxxxx
* Parameter value of the code is the same in all parameter sets
" Changed parameter or the code or subcode is accepted after pressing (
Changed parameter of the code or subcode is accepted after pressing ( ,
if the controller is inhibited
Name Name of the code
Lenze Lenze setting (value on delivery or after restoring the delivery status with C0002)
à The column "IMPORTANT" contains further information
Selection 1 {%} 99 min. value {unit} max. value
IMPORTANT − Short, important explanations

C0002 Par load 1 Loading a parameter set
0 Load default Restore the delivery status
1 Load PS1 l Load parameter set saved in
2 Load PS2 the controller and activate it
l Parameter set 1 is loaded
3 Load PS3 automatically after every
4 Load PS4 mains connection
11 Load ext PS1 Load parameter set from the
12 Load ext PS2 keypad into the controller and
activate it
13 Load ext PS3
14 Load ext PS4
20 ext −> EEPROM Load all parameter sets from the
keypad into the controller
C0003 Par save 0 Save parameter set
" 0 Ready Saving is completed
1 Save PS1 Save the parameters loaded in
2 Save PS2 the controller into a parameter
set (PS1 .... PS4)
3 Save PS3
4 Save PS4
11 Save extern All parameter sets (PS1 .... PS4)
must be transferred from the
controller to the keypad XT
C0004 Op display 56 0 {1} 1999 Operating display
" l Keypad shows selected code
in the operating level if no
other status messages of
C0183 are active
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−1

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0005 Signal CFG Selection of the basic
configuration
1000 0 Common Modified basic The first two digits indicate the
configuration predefined basic function, e. g.:
l 01xxx: Speed control
100 CFG: emty All internal

connections are The third digit indicates
removed additional functions:
l xx0xx: No additional
function
1000 Speed mode Speed control l xx1xx: Brake control
l xx2xx: Setpoint selection via
2000 Step mode Step control motor potentiometer
l xx3xx: PID controller
l xx4xx: Mains failure control
3000 Lead screw Traversing control l xx5xx: Setpoint selection via
master frequency
4000 Torque mode Torque control l xx6xx: Gearbox factor −
analog trimming
l xx7xx: Gearbox factor −
5000 DF master Digital frequency
digital trimming
master
l xx8xx: Master frequency
ramp function generator
6000 DF slv bus Master frequency
slave (bar) The fourth digit indicates the
predefined voltage source for
7000 DF slv cas Digital frequency the control terminals:
slave (cascade) l xxx0x: External supply
voltage
l xxx1x: Internal supply
8000 Dancer ctrl e Dancer position voltage
control with
external diameter The fifth digit indicates the
measurement predefined device control
l xxxx0: Terminal control
9000 Dancer ctrl i Dancer position l xxxx1: RS232, RS485 or
control with optical fibre
internal diameter l xxxx3: INTERBUS or
measurement PROFIBUS−DP
l xxxx5: System bus (CAN)
1 vector ctrl Vector control In case of the first selection 6.8−8
without or with enter the motor data and
speed feedback identify them with C0148.
control identification of the motor data
is possible
with C0148: Improved
smooth running at low
speeds
C0009 LECOM 1 1 {1} 99 LECOM controller address
address l Bus device number when
operated via interface
l 10, 20 ... 90 reserved for
broadcast to device groups
with RS232, RS485, optical
fibre
8.5−2 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

and relative
setpoint
selection for the
acceleration and
deceleration
times
l C0059 must be
set correctly
l Set C0010 <
C0011
l C0010 is only
C0011 Nmax 3000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 effective in case Maximum
of analog speed
setpoint
selection via
AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
changes in one step
should only be
made when the
controller is
inhibited.
C0012 Tir (acc) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Acceleration time Tir of the main
setpoint 6.10−3
0 ... C0011
C0013 Tif (dec) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Deceleration time Tif of the
main setpoint
0 ... C0011
frequency which differs from
the rated motor frequency
(C0089)
overwrites the value in
C0015
C0016 Umin boost 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Umin boost (FCODE) 6.8−4
l C0016 = 1 % corresponds to a
boost of 1 % of the rated
motor voltage (C0090)
C0017 FCODE (Qmin) 50 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Qmin−switching threshold
(FCODE)
l Programmable speed
threshold
l If the current speed is <
C0017, CMP1−OUT is
activated.
l Freely configurable code
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−3

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

inverter
l General rule: The lower the
1 1 kHz sin loss−optimised switching frequency the
– lower the power loss
2 2 kHz sin concentricity−optimi – higher the noise
sed generation
factor
3 4 kHz f_top power−optimised l Observe derating indications
for high switching
4 4 kHz sin noise−optimised frequencies
(fmax) is:
6 4/2 kHz sin noise/concentricity− – fchop = 4 kHz Þ
optimised with fmax = 300 Hz
automatic – fchop = 2 kHz Þ
change−over to low fmax = 150 Hz
switching frequency – fchop = 1 kHz Þ
fmax = 150 Hz
C0019 Thresh nact=0 0 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Operating threshold − automatic
DC injection brake (Auto−GSB) 8.2−25
l Falling below the threshold
in C0019 activates automatic 8.2−40
DC injection braking when
the holding time set under
C0107 > 0
C0020 turn value 100 0 {1 %} 200 Influence on concentricity factor
l Manual influence on the
concentricity factor of the
motor
à Change of C0086, C0087 or 6.11−1
motor
set to 0
C0025 Feedback type 1 Speed feedback 6.7−1
1 no feedback No feedback
100 IT (C420) − X8 Input of the number Incremental encoder at X8
of increments in l Incremental encoders with
C0420 TTL level can only be
connected to X8.
101 IT (C420) − X9 Input of the number Incremental encoder at X9
of increments in l Connect incremental
C0420 encoders with HTL−level on
X9 only
increments: l Incremental encoders with
110 IT512−5V 512 inc TTL level can only be
connected to X8.
111 IT1024−5V 1024 inc
112 IT2048−5V 2048 inc
113 IT4096−5V 4096 inc
8.5−4 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0026 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 26/1 6.5−4
and FCODE26/2 See System
Manual
1 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN1 (X6/1, X6/2) (extension)
2 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN2 (X6/3, X6/4)
C0027 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 27/1
and FCODE27/2
l 100 % = gain 1
l 100 % = gain 1
C0030 DFOUT const 3 0 256 inc/rev Function block DFOUT 8.2−8
1 512 inc/rev l Setting of the constant
(increments per revolution)
2 1024 inc/rev for the master frequency
3 2048 inc/rev output X10
4 4096 inc/rev
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
C0032 FCODE 1 −32767 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor − numerator of
Gearbox the function block DFSET 8.2−18
l Freely configurable code
C0033 Gearbox 1 1 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor − denominator of
denom the function block DFSET 8.2−18
C0034 Mst current 0 0 −10 V ... +10 V Voltage / current range for 5.5−9
analog signals at input X6/1, 6.5−4
1 4 mA ... 20 mA X6/2
l Observe jumper position of
2 −20 mA ... +20 mA X3

8.2−40
C0037 Set−value rpm 0 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Setpoint selection
C0038 0 {1 rpm} 36000 Suppress speed ranges, function See System
Manual
block NLIM1 (extension)
l Speed ranges are only run
through dynamically
l Static behaviour in the
inhibited range is suppressed
1 N 1 start 0 Suppress speed range 1
2 N 1 stop 0
4 N 2 stop 0
6 N 3 stop 0
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−5

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0039 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 JOG setpoints for the speed See System
Manual
1 JOG set−value 1500 setpoint conditioning, function (extension)
block NSET
2 JOG set−value 1000 l Parameter setting of the
3 JOG set−value 500 fixed speeds (JOG setpoints)
4 JOG set−value 200 l Activation via binary coding
of digital input signals in
5 JOG set−value 100
C0787/1 ... C0787/4
6 JOG set−value 50 l For coding see description of
7 JOG set−value 25 function block NSET
9 JOG set−value 5
... ... ...
C0040 Ctrl enable 0 Controller enable 6.4−1
l Controller can only be
enabled if X5/28 = HIGH
0 Ctrl inhibit Controller inhibited
1 Ctrl enable Controller enabled
8.2−40
C0043 Trip reset 0 0 no/trip reset Reset actual error
1 trip active There is a TRIP error
C0045 DIS: act JOG 0 Nset active Nset is active Active JOG setpoint for the See System
Manual
1 JOG1 JOG setpoint 1 speed setpoint conditioning, (extension)
function block NSET
2 JOG2 JOG setpoint 2 l Display of the activated fixed
... ... ... speed
15 JOG15 JOG setpoint 15
C0046 DIS: N −199.9 {0.01 %} 199.99 Main setpoint for the speed
9 setpoint conditioning, function
block NSET
l Read only
C0049 DIS: NADD −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Additional setpoint, function See System
Manual
block NSET (extension)
l Read only
0 MCTRL 8.2−25
C0011 8.2−40
C0051 MCTRL−NACT −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Actual speed value, function
l Read only
8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−VACT = 100 % = C009 8.2−40
0
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−DCVOLT = 100 % = 8.2−40
1000 V
8.5−6 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

l Read only
l MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022 8.2−40
0 depends on the operating mode: 8.2−25
MCTRL2
C0057 Max Torque 0 {1 Nm} 5000 Maximum possible torque of the
drive configuration
l Display only
l With V/f characteristic
control depending on C0022,
C0086, C0088
l With vector control
depending on C0022, C0086,
C0088, C0091
1000.0 Hz 8.2−40
C0059 Mot pole no. 1 {1} 50 Pole pair number of the motor
l Display only
C0061 Heatsink temp 0 {1 °C} 100 Heatsink temperature See System
Manual
l Read only (extension)
l If the temperature of the
heatsink > 85 °C, the
controller sets TRIP OH
l Early warning is possible via
C0122
activated.
– Early warning is possible
via OH7, temperature is set
in C0121
l PTC, thermal contact at T1,
T2:
warning OH8
warning OC5
l C0064 > 110 % limits the
ouput current of the
controller to 67 % of the
maximum current in C0022
C0067 Act trip Selection list 10 Momentary fault message
l Display only
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−7

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

controller
C0071 = 6000 ms: No 8.2−40
C0074 limit N 10.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Limitation of the speed
controller 8.2−25
l Influence of the speed
controller for V/f 8.2−40
characteristic control with
feedback
l max. setpoint difference in
percent
l Vector control: Gain of 8.2−25
current controller
controller 8.2−25
l Vector control:
integral−action time of 8.2−40
current controller
C0077 Ti field CTRL 4.0 0.3 {0.1 ms} 6000.0 Integral−action time of field
controller
l Only active in case of vector
control with feedback
controller 8.2−25
C0079 Adapt I−CTRL 100.00 10.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Adaption of the current
controller 8.2−25
l Evaluation for the reset time
Tni of the current controller 8.2−40
l Effective for setpoint = 0
l Is increased automatically to
100 % up to rated speed
l C0079 = 100 %: no adaption
of the reset time
l C0079 < 100 %:
– evaluation of the reset
time:
under C0095
time
l Influence is effective from
0 Hz to the frequency
selected under C1583
8.5−8 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

to factory setting
l Change of C0081 sets C0086
=0
C0082 Mot Rr à 0.0000 {0.0001 W} 65.5350 Motor rotor resistance 6.6−1
from C0087, C0088, C0089,
C0090 and C0091
l Selection of a motor in C0086
sets the corresponding rotor
resistance value
C0084 Mot Rs à 0.00 {0.01 mW} 100000.00 Motor stator resistance 6.6−1
(C0148, C0149)
C0085 Mot Lss à 0.00 {0.01 mH} 6553.50 Motor leakage inductance 6.6−1
(C0148, C0149)
used
the corresponding
parameters in C0021, C0022,
C0081, C0087, C0088, C0089,
C0090, C0091
the corresponding rated
motor speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
motor current in C0088
=0
motor frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
motor voltage in C0090
=0
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−9

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

the corresponding motor
cos j in C0091
C0086 = 0
parameter identification
from C0088, C0089, C0090
and C0091
l Read only
... ...
20 9383VC 400V
21 9334VC 500V
... ...
28 9383VC 500V
9321 9321 VC
... ...
9333 9333VC
C0094 Password 0 0 {1} 9999 Password 7.2−9
l C0094 = 1 ... 9999: Free
access to the user menu only
and C0091
to the Lenze setting
C0086 = 0
C0096 0 no protection No password Parameter access protection
protection l Extension of the access
1 R protection Read protection protection for AIF bus
systems and CAN with
2 W protection Write protection activated password in C0094
3 R/W protection Read/write l All codes in the user menu
protection can continued to be accessed.
1 AIF protect. 0 Parameter access protection AIF
2 CAN protect. 0 Parameter access protection
CAN
C0099 S/W version x.y Software version
x Main version l Read only
y Subversion
8.5−10 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0101 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Additional acceleration times for See System
Manual
speed setpoint conditioning, (extension)
1 add Tir 0.00 function block NSET
l Additional acceleration and
deceleration times for the
2 add Tir 0.00 main setpoint
l Activation via binary coding
... ... ... of digital input signals in
C0788/1 ... C0788/4
15 add Tir 0.00 l For coding see description of
function block NSET
C0103 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Additional deceleration times
for speed setpoint conditioning,
1 add Tif 0.00 function block NSET
l Additional acceleration and
deceleration times for the
2 add Tif 0.00 main setpoint
... ... ... of digital input signals in
C0788/1 ... C0788/4
15 add Tif 0.00 l For coding see description of
function block NSET
C0104 select accel. 0 Selection of acceleration See System
Manual
function of the linear ramp (extension)
function generator of NSET
0 a = const Constant acceleration
1 t = const Constant time
2 s = const Constant path
l The deceleration time refers 8.2−25
to a speed variation of
C0011 ... 0 8.2−40

8.2−40
C0108 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE108/1 6.5−6
and FCODE108/2 See System
Manual
1 FCODE (gain) 100.00 Gain of analog output signal (extension)
AOUT1 (X6/62)
l 100 % = gain 1
2 FCODE (gain) 100.00 Gain of analog output signal
AOUT2 (X6/63)
l 100 % = gain 1
and FCODE109/2
AOUT1 (X6/62)
AOUT2 (X6/63)
C0114 0 High active HIGH level is active Inversion of digital input signals 6.5−1
1 LOW active LOW level is active at X5, function block DIGIN See System
Manual
1 DIGIN1 pol 0 Terminal X5/E1 (extension)

5 DIGIN6 (ST) 0 Terminal X5/ST
pol
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−11

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0116 Selection list 2 Configuration of free digital See System
Manual
outputs (FDO) (extension)
1 CFG: FDO−0 1000 FIXED0 l Signals can only be evaluated
when being networked with
... ... ... ... automation interfaced
32 CFG: FDO−31 1000 FIXED0
C0117 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital inputs 6.5−3
signals, function block DIGOUT See System
Manual
A change of the basic (extension)
configuration in C0005 changes
the signal assignment!
1 CFG: DIGOUT1 15000 DCTRL−TRIP Terminal X5/A1
2 CFG: DIGOUT2 10650 CMP1−OUT Terminal X5/A2
3 CFG: DIGOUT3 500 DCTRL−RDY Terminal X5/A3
4 CFG: DIGOUT4 5003 MCTRL−MMAX Terminal X5/A4
C0118 0 High active HIGH level is active Inversion of digital output
1 LOW active LOW level is active signals, function block DIGOUT
C0121 OH7 limit 150 45 {1 °C} 150 Setting of the operating
temperature for monitoring 6.6−11
OH7 See System
Manual
(extension)
l Monitoring OH7 is
configured in C0584
C0122 OH4 limit 80 45 {1 °C} 85 Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
OH4 (extension)
l Monitoring of the heatsink
temperature
l Activating monitoring with
C0582
l Temperature in C0122
reached:
– Warning OH4 is initiated
C0125 Baudrate 0 0 9600 baud LECOM baud rate
1 4800 baud l Baud rate for accessory
module 2102
2 2400 baud
3 1200 baud
4 19200 baud
C0126 MONIT CE0 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring CE0 See System
Manual
2 Warning l Error message in case of (extension)
communication error AIF
3 Off
C0130 DIS: act Ti Active Ti times for the speed See System
Manual
0 C12/C13 setpoint conditioning, function (extension)
block NSET
1 Tir1/Tif1 l Display of the additional
2 Tir2/Tif2 acceleration and deceleration
... ... times for the main setpoint
(C0101, C0103)
14 Tir14/Tif14
15 Tir15/Tif15 of C0788/1 ... C0788/4
C0132 RFG fly delay May only be changed by Lenze
service personnel!
C0133 HLG fly delay May only be changed by Lenze
service personnel!
8.5−12 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0134 RFG charac 0 0 Linear linear characteristic Ramp function generator See System
Manual
characteristic, function block (extension)
1 S−shaped S−shaped NSET
characteristic l Characteristic of the main
setpoint
C0135 Control word 0 Bit Assignment Control word, function block AIF See System
Manual
0 reserved l Decimal control word when (extension)
networked via automation
1 reserved interface AIF
2 reserved l 16−bit information, binary
3 Quick stop coded
4 reserved
5 reserved
6 reserved
7 reserved
8 Operation inhibited
9 Controller inhibit
10 TRIP SET
11 Trip reset
12 reserved
13 reserved
14 reserved
15 reserved
C0136 Display of the control words in See System
Manual
C0135, AIF−IN and CAN−IN1 (extension)
1 Ctrl wrd C135 Control word C0135
2 Ctrl wrd CAN Control word CAN
3 Ctrl wrd AIF Control word AIF
C0141 FCODE (setval) 0.00 −199.9 {0.01 } 199.99 Main setpoint, freely
configurable code (FCODE)
l Used as main setpoint in the
basic configurations
C0005 = xxx1
C0142 Start options May only be changed by Lenze
service personnel!
threshold 8.2−25
switching frequency 8.2−40
reduction
threshold
C0144 OH switch 1 0 Switch off Switch−over is not Temperature−dependent
active switching frequency reduction
l If the heatsink temperature
set in C0122 is reached
1 Switch on Switch−over is active (warning OH4), the controller
switches to 2 kHz
C0145 select ref May only be changed by Lenze
service personnel!
C0146 fly current May only be changed by Lenze
service personnel!
C0147 fly dt−f May only be changed by Lenze
service personnel!
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−13

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

drive has stopped
2. Enter the correct values of
the motor nameplate into
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091
"
1 WRK Start identification 4. Enable controller
run The identification
not rotate!
– is completed when is
lit again
C0149 Auto ident 0 0 Id Automatic identification is Automatic motor data
inactive inactive identification 6.6−16
1. Inhibit controller, wait until
drive has stopped
2. Enter the correct values of
the motor nameplate into
1 Id Automatic identification is C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
active active C0091
l The identification starts 3. Set C0149 = 1, confirm with
automatically after "
controller enable 4. Enable controller
l After a faulty identification, The identification
the process is restarted – starts, goes off. The
after TRIP RESET or mains motor "whistles" but does
switching and subsequent not rotate!
controller enable – lasts approx. 1 ... 2 min
– is completed when is
lit again
C0150 Status word Bit00 — Bit08 Status code Read only See System
Manual
Bit01 IMP Bit09 Status code Decimal status word for (extension)
networking via automation
Bit02 — Bit10 Status code interface (AIF)
Bit03 — Bit11 Status code l Binary interpretation
Bit04 — Bit12 Warning indicates the bit states
Bit05 — Bit13 Message
Bit06 n=0 Bit14 —
Bit07 CINH Bit15 —
C0151 DIS: FDO (DW) Read only See System
Manual
l Free digital outputs (FDO) (extension)
l Hexadecimal representation
of the digital output signals
configured in C0116
l Binary interpretation
indicates the bit states
8.5−14 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0155 Status word 2 Bit00 Fail Bit08 R/L Display only
Bit01 Mmax Bit09 — l Binary interpretation
indicates the bit states
Bit02 Imax Bit10 —
Bit03 IMP Bit11 —
Bit04 RDY Bit12 —
Bit06 TRIP Bit14 —
Bit07 Init Bit15 —
C0156 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
signals of function block STAT (extension)
1 CFG: STAT.B0 2000 DCTRL−PAR*1−O l Input signals are output as
status messages in C0150,
2 CFG: STAT.B2 5002 MCTRL−IMAX AIF status word and CAN1
3 CFG: STAT.B3 5003 MCTRL−MMAX status word
4 CFG: STAT.B4 5050 NSET−RFG I=O
5 CFG: STAT.B5 10650 CMP1−OUT
6 CFG: STAT.B14 505 DCTRL−CW/CCW
7 CFG: STAT.B15 500 DCTRL−RDY
C0157 0 No status message Digital status signal of function
1 Status message is output block STAT
1 DIS: STAT.B0 l Display of the signals linked
in C0156
2 DIS: STAT.B2
3 DIS: STAT.B3
4 DIS: STAT.B4
5 DIS: STAT.B5
6 DIS: STAT.B14
7 DIS: STAT.B15
C0161 Act trip Display of history buffer "Active See System
Manual
fault" (extension)
l Keypad: LECOM error number
C0167 Reset failmem 0 0 Ready Clear history buffer See System
Manual
l Active fault messages are not (extension)
1 Clear history buffer cleared
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−15

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0168 Display of the fault messages in See System
Manual
the history buffer (extension)
l Keypad: LECOM error number
1 Fail no. act Active fault
2 Fail no. old1 Last fault
3 Fail no. old2 Second to last fault
4 Fail no. old3 Third last fault
5 Fail no. old4 Fourth−last fault
6 Fail no. old5 Fifth−last fault
7 Fail no. old6 Sixth−last fault
8 Fail no. old7 Last but six fault
C0169 Display in [s] Displays at what time the fault
(C0168) has occurred since
mains connection (C0179)
l If a fault is followed by
another fault for several
times, only the time of the
last occurrence is stored
1 Failtime act Active fault
2 Failtime old1 Last fault
3 Failtime old2 Second to last fault
4 Failtime old3 Third last fault
5 Failtime old4 Fourth−last fault
6 Failtime old5 Fifth−last fault
7 Failtime old6 Sixth−last fault
8 Failtime old7 Last but six fault
C0170 Displays how many times the
fault (C0168) has occurred after
the last mains connection
1 Counter act Active fault
2 Counter old1 Last fault
3 Counter old2 Second to last fault
4 Counter old3 Third last fault
5 Counter old4 Fourth−last fault
6 Counter old5 Fifth−last fault
7 Counter old6 Sixth−last fault
8 Counter old7 Last but six fault
8.5−16 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0173 UG limit 1 Check during commissioning 12−1
and adapt, if necessary! See System
Manual
All controllers in the system (extension)
must have the same threshold!
l Adaptation of UG thresholds
l Only display in case of the
variants for 400 V mains
(EVF93xx−EV,
EVF93xx−EVV030,
EVF93xx−EVV060,
EVF93xx−EVV110):
– C0173 = 1
– OU = 700 ... 685 V
Mains LU OU
0 < 400 V 285 V 770 ... 755 V Device with or without brake
1 400 V 285 V 770 ... 755 V transistor
2 460 V 328 V 770 ... 755 V
3 480 V 342 V 770 ... 755 V Device without brake transistor
4 480 V 342 V 800 ... 785 V Device with brake transistor
5 500 V 342 V 900 ... 885 V
C0174 BR Limit 3 Display of the brake transistor 12−1
thresholds See System
Manual
Check during commissioning (extension)
and adapt, if necessary!
All controllers connected to the
bus must have the same
threshold!
Mains UBR OU
0 400 V 685 V 700 V Only display in case of the
(EVF93xx−EV, EVF93xx−EVV030,
EVF93xx−EVV060,
EVF93xx−EVV110)
1 400 V / 460 V 755 V 770 V Only in case of the variants for
400 V/500 V mains
2 480 V 785 V 800 V (EVF93xx−EVV210,
EVF93xx−EVV240,
3 500 V 885 V 900 V EVF93xx−EVV270,
EVF93xx−EVV300)
C0178 Op timer {s} Display only
Total time of the controller
enable (X5/28 = HIGH)
C0179 mainstimer {s} Display only
Total time of mains "ON"
C0182 Ti S−shaped 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Integration time of S−shaped See System
Manual
ramp function generator, (extension)
function block NSET
l C0182 = 0.00: ramp function
generator operates linearly
l C0182 > 0.00: ramp function
generator operates in an
S−shape (without jerk)
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−17

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0183 Diagnostics Diagnostics
l If several items or fault or
status information are to be
shown, the information with
the smallest number is
displayed
0 No fault
101 Initialisation
102 TRIP/fault
103 Emergency stop
104 IMP message
105 Power OFF Function is not supported
111 Operation inhibit via C0135
112 Operation inhibit via AIF
113 Operation inhibit via CAN
121 Controller inhibited via X5/28
122 Controller inhibited internally
(DCTRL−CINH1)
123 Controller inhibited internally
(DCTRL−CINH2)
124 Controller inhibited via at the
keypad
125 Controller inhibited via AIF
126 Controller inhibited via CAN
141 Switch−on inhibit
142 Pulse inhibit
151 Quick stop via MCTRL−QSP
152 Quick stop via at the keypad
153 Quick stop via AIF
154 Quick stop via CAN
161 DC injection braking via terminal
162 DC injection braking via C0135
163 DC injection braking via AIF
164 DC injection braking via CAN
170 Motor parameter identification is active
250 Warning is active (C0168)
C0190 NSET arit 0 0 OUT = C46 Arithmetic function, function See System
Manual
1 C46 + C49 block NSET (extension)
Connects main setpoint (C0046)
2 C46 − C49 and additional setpoint (C0040)
3 C46 * C49
4 C46 / C49
5 C46/(100 − C49)
8.5−18 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0195 BRK1 T act 99.9 0.0 {0.1 s} 99.9 Brake closing time, function See System
Manual
block BRK1 (extension)
l C0195 = 99.9 s: infinite
l After the time has elapsed in
C0195, the status "brake
applied" is reached
C0196 BRK1 T release 0.0 0.0 {0.1 s} 60.0 Brake opening time, function
block BRK1
l Opening time can be
obtained from the technical
data of the brake
l After the time has elapsed in
C0196, the status "brake
released" is reached
C0200 S/W Id x Main version Software ID
y Subversion l Display only
S9300MVxy000 9300 vector 0.37 ... 90 kW
S9300MVxy020 9300 vector 110 ... 400 kW
C0201 S/W date xxx yy zzzz xxx = month Software creation
yy = day l Display only
zzzz = year
C0202 Internal identification
l Display only
C0203 Commission number
l Display only
C0204 Serial number
l Display only
C0206 Product date xx/yy/zz Date of production
l Display only
l xx = day, yy = month,
zz = year
C0207 DL info 1 Download info 1
l Display only
l Display only
l Display only
C0220 NSET Tir add 2.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Acceleration time Tir for See System
Manual
additional setpoint, function (extension)
block NSET
l The acceleration time refers
0 ... C0011
C0221 NSET Tif add 2.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Deceleration time Tif for
additional setpoint, function
block NSET
l The deceleration time refers
C0011 ... 0
C0222 PCTRL Vp 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Gain Vp, function block PCTRL1 See System
Manual
C0223 PCTRL1 Tn 400 20 {1 ms} 99999 Integral action component Tn, (extension)
function block PCTRL1
l C0223 = 99999 ms: no
integral action component
C0224 PCTRL1 Kd 0.0 0.0 {0.1 } 5.0 Differential component Kd,
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−19

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

l When C0025 >1 and
C0006 = 1, C0234 is set to 0
C0236 damp limit 1.0 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 20.0 Limit value of oscillation
damping, function block MCTRL
C0241 Cmp−RFG−I=0 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Speed threshold in [%] for the See System
Manual
digital output NSET−controller (extension)
enable−I=0, function block NSET
l The analog signals
NSET−NOUT (without
arithmetic and limiting
functions) and
NSET−controller enable−I are
compared
l NSET−controller
enable−I=0 = HIGH: the
differential signal between
NSET−NOUT and
NSET−controller enable−I falls
below the value in C0241
l C0241 = 100 %: nmax
C0244 BRK1 M set 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Holding torque, function block See System
Manual
BRK1 (extension)
l C0244 = 100 % = C0057
C0250 FCODE 1 Bit 0 0 1 Free control code FCODE250
C0252 Angle offset 0 −245760000 {1 inc.} 245760000 Phase offset for master
frequency processing, function 8.2−18
block DFSET
l Fixed phase offset for digital
frequency configuration
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0253 Angle n−trim à −32767 {1 inc.} 32767 Speed−dependent phase
trimming for the master
frequency processing, function
block DFSET
à depending on C0005, C0025,
C0490
l Change of C0005, C0025 or
C0490 resets C0253 to the
corresponding Lenze setting
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
l Value in C0253 is reached at
15000 rpm
8.5−20 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0260 MPOT1 high 100.00 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit, function block See System
Manual
MPOT1 (extension)
l Condition: C0260 > C0261
C0261 MPOT1 low −100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Lower limit, function block
MPOT1
l Condition: C0261 < C0260
C0262 MPOT1 TIR 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Acceleration time Tir, function
block MPOT1
l The set time refers to a
change of 0 ... 100 %
C0263 MPOT1 Tif 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Deceleration time Tif, function
block MPOT1
Motor potentiometer
l The set time refers to a
change of 100 ... 0 %
C0264 MPOT1 on/off 0 0 no change Deactivation of motor
1 Deceleration with Tif to 0% potentiometer, function block
MPOT1
2 Deceleration with Tif to C0261 l Function is executed when
3 Jump with Tif = 0 to 0% MPOT1−INACT = HIGH
4 Jump with Tif = 0 to C0261
5 Acceleration with Tir to C0260
C0265 MPOT1 init 0 0 Value of MPOT1 when mains fails Initialisation of motor
potentiometer, function block
MPOT1
1 lower limit of C0261
l Starting value which is to be
accepted during mains
2 0% switching and activated
motor potentiometer
Manual
signals, function block MPOT (extension)
1 CFG: UP 1000 FIXED0 UP DOWN MPOT1−OU
T
0 0 ¾
0 1 ¯
1 0
2 CFG: DOWN 1000 FIXED0 1 1 ¾
: Output signal runs to the upper limit
value
¯: Output signal runs to the lower limit
value
¾: Output signal is unchanged
C0268 CFG: INACT 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block MPOT
l HIGH: motor potentiometer
is not active. Output signal
runs to 0
C0269 Digital input signals, function
1 DIS: UP block MPOT
l Display of the signals linked
2 DIS: DOWN in C0267 and C0268
3 DIS: INACT
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−21

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0325 Vp2 adapt 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Function block PTCTRL1 See System
Manual
l Adaptation of gain Vp2 (extension)
C0326 Vp3 adapt 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Function block PTCTRL1
l Adaptation of gain Vp3
C0327 Set2 adapt 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Function block PTCTRL1
l Adaptation of setpoint speed
threshold nset2
l Condition: C0327 > C0328
C0328 Set1 adapt 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Function block PTCTRL1
l Adaptation of setpoint speed
threshold nset1
l Condition: C0328 < C0327
C0329 Adapt on/off 0 0 No adaptation of the process controller Function block PTCTRL1
1 External adaptation via input l Adaptation On/Off
2 Adaptation via setpoint

3 Adaptation via control difference
C0332 PCTRL Tir 0 0 {1 s} 10000 Acceleration time Tir, function See System
Manual
block PCTRL1 (extension)
to a setpoint change of
0 ... 100 %
C0333 PCTRL1 Tif 0 0 {1 s} 10000 Deceleration time Tif, function
block PCTRL1
100 % ... 0
C0336 DIS: act Up 0.0 {0.1 } 500.0 Current gain Vp, function block See System
Manual
PCTRL1 (extension)
l Read only
C0337 Bi/unipolar 0 Sphere of action, function block
PCTRL1
0 Bipolar l Output value is limited to
−100 ... 100 %
1 Unipolar l Output value is limited to
0 ... 100 %
C0338 ARIT1 funct 1 0 OUT = IN1 Selection of function, function See System
Manual
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 block ARIT1 (extension)
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 * IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100 − IN2)
C0339 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signals, function block ARIT1
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% ARIT1−IN1
C0340 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ARIT1
in C0339
1 DIS: IN ARIT1−IN1
C0350 CAN address 1 1 {1} 63 System bus node address
l Change is effective after
˜Reset node˜ command
8.5−22 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0351 CAN baudrate 0 0 500 kbit/s System bus baud rate
1 250 kbit/s l Change is effective after
2 125 kbit/s
3 50 kbit/s
4 1000 kbit/s
C0352 CAN mst 0 0 Slave Configuration of the system bus
nodes
1 Master l Change is effective after
C0353 0 C0350 is the source Source of the system bus
1 C0354 is the source address
1 CAN addr sel1 0 CAN IN1, CAN−OUT1
C0354 1 {1} 512 Selective system bus address
l Individual addressing of the
system bus process data
objects
1 IN1 addr 2 129 CAN−IN1
2 OUT1 addr 2 1 CAN−OUT2
C0355 0 {1} 2047 System bus identifier
1 CAN−IN1 Id l Read only
2 CAN−OUT1 Id
3 CAN−IN2 Id
4 CAN−OUT2 Id
5 CAN−IN3 Id
6 CAN−OUT3 Id
C0356 0 {1 ms} 65000 System bus time settings
1 CAN boot−up 3000 Required for CAN
interconnection without master
2 OUT2 cycle 0 0 = event−controlled process
data transfer
3 OUT3 cycle 0 >0 = cyclic process data transfer
4 CAN delay 20 When the NMT state
"Operational" (after
"Pre−operational" or "Stopped")
has been reached, the delay
time ˜CANdelay˜ is started.
After the delay time has e;apsed,
the PDO´s CAN−OUT2 and
CAN−OUT3 are sent for the first
time.
C0357 0 {1 ms} 65000 System bus monitoring times
l After a fault message, the
CAN objects remain in receive
mode
1 CE1monit 3000 CAN−IN1
time
time
time
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−23

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0358 Reset node 0 0 No function Set the nodal reset pointof the
1 CAN reset system bus
C0359 CAN state 0 Operational System bus status
1 Pre−operational l Read only
2 Warning
3 Bus off
C0360 0 65535 Telegram counter
l Read only
l For count values > 65535 the
counter starts at 0
1 Message OUT All telegrams sent
2 Message IN All telegrams received
3 Message Telegrams sent on CAN−OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
6 Message Telegrams sent on parameter
POUT1 channel1
7 Message Telegrams sent on parameter
POUT2 channel2
8 Message IN1 Telegrams received from
CAN−IN1
CAN−IN2
CAN−IN3
11 Message PIN1 Telegrams received from
parameter channel1
12 Message PIN2 Telegrams received from
parameter channel2
8.5−24 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0361 0 {1 %} 100 System bus load
l Read only
l For a perfect operation, the
entire bus load (all nodes
connected) should be less
than 80 %
1 Load OUT All telegrams sent
2 Load IN All telegrams received
3 Load OUT1 Telegrams sent on CAN−OUT1
6 Load POUT1 Telegrams sent on parameter
channel1
7 Load POUT2 Telegrams sent on parameter
channel2
8 Load IN1 Telegrams received from
CAN−IN1
CAN−IN2
CAN−IN3
11 Load PIN1 Telegrams received from
parameter channel1
12 Load PIN2 Telegrams received from
parameter channel2
C0364 CFG: CAN activ 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration − digital input
signal
l Switches the system bus via
the external signal from
"Pre−Operational" to
"Operational"
C0365 DIS:CAN activ 0 Pre−Operational System bus state
1 Operational l Display only
C0366 Sync Response 1 0 No response Response to sync telegram of

1 Response the master
C0367 Sync Rx ID 128 1 {1} 256 Receipt identifier (Rx)
l Sync Identifier for grouping
for data transfer to CAN−IN1
C0368 Sync Tx ID 128 1 {1} 256 Transmission identifier (Tx)
l Identifier for generating a
sync telegram
C0369 Sync Tx Time 0 0 {1} 65000 Sync transmission time (Tx)
l Transmission interval for the
object set in C0368
C0400 DIS: OUT −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Analog output signal, function See System
Manual
block AIN1 (extension)
l Read only
C0402 CFG: OFFSET 19502 FCODE−26/1 Selection list 1 Configuration offset, function
block AIN1
l The offset is added to the
input signal at AIN1−IN
C0403 CFG: GAIN 19504 FCODE−27/1 Selection list 1 Configuration of gain, function
block AIN1
l The gain is multiplied by the
C0404 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AIN1
1 DIS: OFFSET l Display of the signals linked
in C0402 and C0404
2 DIS: GAIN
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−25

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0405 DIS: OUT −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Analog output signal, function See System
Manual
block AIN2 (extension)
l Read only
C0407 CFG: OFFSET 19503 FCODE−26/2 Selection list 1 Configuration of offset, function
block AIN2
block AIN2
C0409 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AIN2
1 DIS: OFFSET l Display of the signals linked
in C0407 and C0408
2 DIS: GAIN
C0420 Encoder const 512 1 {1 inc/rev} 8192 Number of increments for 6.7−1
incremental encoder at X8 or X9
l Connect incremental
encoders with HTL−level on
X9 only
C0421 Enc voltage 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Supply voltage for the
incremental encoder at X8
destroy the incremental
encoder!
C0425 DFIN const 3 0 256 inc/rev Constant of the master 8.2−5
1 512 inc/rev frequency input, function block
DFIN
2 1024 inc/rev l Output signal at the
3 2048 inc/rev connected encoder or at the
4 4096 inc/rev upstream controller in the
event of a master frequency
5 8192 inc/rev cascade/master frequency
6 16384 inc/rev bus
C0426 DIS: OUT −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Output signal of the master
DFIN
l Display only
C0427 DFIN function 0 Function of the master
DFIN
0 2−phase l Phase−displaced signal
sequence
1 A pulse/B dir l Control of direction of
rotation via track B
2 Pulse A or B l Control of speed and
direction of rotation via track
A or track B
8.5−26 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0431 CFG: IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block AOUT1 (extension)
l Signal at AOUT1−IN is output
to terminal X6/62
block AOUT1
l the offset is added to the
input signal at AOUT1−IN
block AOUT1
C0434 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AOUT1
1 DIS: IN l Display of the signals linked
in C0431, C0432 and C0433
2 DIS: OFFSET
3 DIS: GAIN
C0436 CFG: IN 5002 MCTRL−MSET2 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block AOUT2 (extension)
l Signal at AOUT2−IN is output
to terminal X6/63
block AOUT2
block AOUT2
C0439 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AOUT2
in C0436, C0437 and C0438
2 DIS: OFFSET
3 DIS: GAIN
C0443 DIS: 0 {1} 255 Terminal signals, function block See System
Manual
DIGIN−OUT DIGIN (extension)
l Read only
l Binary interpretation of the
terminal signals at X5
Bit Assignment
0 DIGIN1 X5/E1
1 DIGIN2 X5/E2
2 DIGIN3 X5/E3
3 DIGIN4 X5/E4
4 DIGIN5 X5/E5
5 ST−DIGIN6 X5/ST
6 DIGIN−CINH X5/28
C0444 0 LOW signal Terminal signals, function block See System
Manual
1 HIGH signal DIGOUT (extension)
l Read only
DIS: DIGOUT1 Bit Assignment X5/A1
DIS: DIGOUT2 0 DIGIN1 X5/A2
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−27

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0450 CFG: NX 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block BRK1 (extension)
l Speed threshold, from which
the drive may output the
signal "Close brake"
signal, function block BRK1
l HIGH = close brake
l LOW = open brake
C0452 CFG: SIGN 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block BRK1
l Direction of torque with
which the drive is to create a
torque against the brake
C0458 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block BRK1 See System
Manual
1 DIS: NX l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C0450 and C0452
2 DIS: SIGN
C0459 DIS: ON Function block BRK1
C0451
C0464 Customer I/F 0 original Customer interface indicates the
status of the selected basic
configuration
l Reassignment of terminals in
a basic configuration does
not change C0005 and sets
C0464 = 1
1 changed l Adding or removing function
blocks or changing the signal
flow among the function
blocks in a basic
configuration sets C0005 = 0
and C0464= 1
8.5−28 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0465 ® Selection list 5 Function block − processing list
l Defining the sequence in
1 FB list 200 DFIN which the function blocks are
to be processed internally
2 FB list 0 à Depending on C0005.
3 FB list 50 AIN1 Changing C0005 loads
4 FB list 0 assigned processing list
à The displayed values apply to
5 FB list 0
C0005 = 1000
6 FB list 55 AIN2 l After changing the signal
7 FB list 0 flow, adapt the processing
8 FB list 0 list in any case. Otherwise
the controller may use the
9 FB list 10250 R/L/Q wrong signals!
10 FB list 0 l The function blocks DIGIN,
... ... 0 DIGOUT, AIF−IN, CAN−IN, and
MCTRL are always processed
14 FB list 0
and do not have to be
15 FB list 5250 NLIM1 entered in the list
16 FB list 5050 NSET
... ... 0
19 FB list 5700 ANEG1
... ... 0
22 FB list 10650 CMP1
... ... 0
25 FB list 70 AOUT1
... ... 0
28 FB list 75 AOUT2
... ... 0
31 FB list 250 DFOUT
... ... 0
41 FB list 25000 AIF−OUT
42 FB list 20000 CAN−OUT
... ... ...
50 FB list 0
C0466 CPU T remain Remaining process time for
processing the function blocks
l Display only
C0469 Fct STP key 2 0 inactive Inactive Determines the function which
is released when pressing on
1 CINH Inhibit controller: the keypad
Changes are only active after
2 qsp Quick stop mains connection!
C0470 0 {1} 255 Configuration of free control
codes for digital signals
l The data words C0470 and
C0471 are in parallel and are
identical.
1 FCODE 8 Bit 0 FCODE bit 0−7
C0471 Configuration 0 0 {1} 4294967296 Free control code for digital
of input signals
FCODE 32 Bit l The data words C0470 and
C0471 are in parallel and are
identical.
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−29

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0472 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of free control
1 FCODE analog 0.00 codes for analog signals
2 FCODE analog 0.00
3 FCODE analog 100.00
6 FCODE analog 0.00
... ... 0.00
20 FCODE analog 0.00
C0473 −32767 {1} 32767 Configuration of free control
1 FCODE abs 1 codes for absolute analog
signals
2 FCODE abs 1
3 FCODE abs 0
... ... 0
10 FCODE abs 0
1 FCODE PH 0 codes for phase signals
l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
... ... 0
5 FCODE PH 0
codes for phase difference
1 FCODE DF 0
signals
2 FCODE DF 0 l 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0497 Nact filter 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Filter time constant Nact for
actual speed value, function 8.2−40
block MCTRL2
l Internal filtering of the speed
signal for control
l C0497 = 0 ms: Switched off
C0510 CFG: IN1 50 AIN1−OUT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block NLIM1 (extension)
l Input for analog speed
setpoint
C0511 DIS: IN1 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block NLIM1
l Display of the input signal
configured in C0510
8.5−30 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0517 0.00 {0.01 } 1999.00 l The user menu contains in
" the Lenze setting the most
1 User menu 51.00 Actual speed value (MCTRL−NACT) important codes for
commissioning the operating
2 User menu 54.00 Actual motor current (MCTRL−IACT) mode ˜V/f characteristic
3 User menu 56.00 Torque setpoint (MCTRL−MSET2) control
4 User menu 64.00 Device utilisation I×t l With an active password
protection only the codes
5 User menu 183.00 Diagnostics entered in C0517 can be
6 User menu 168.01 History buffer freely accessed
7 User menu 39.01 JOG−setpoints 1 (NSET) l Enter the numbers of the
required codes in the
8 User menu 86.00 Motor type selection
subcodes
9 User menu 148.00 Identifying motor parameters l The input is done in the
10 User menu 22.00 Imax limit in motor mode format xxx.yy
11 User menu 23.00 Imax limit in generator mode – xxx: Code number
– yy: Subcode number
12 User menu 11.00 Maximum speed Nmax
l It is not checked whether the
13 User menu 12.00 Acceleration time Tir main setpoint entered code exists.
14 User menu 13.00 Deceleration time Tif main setpoint
15 User menu 16.00 Umin boost
16 User menu 70.00 Gain Vp speed controller
17 User menu 71.00 Integral−action time Tn speed controller
18 User menu 75.00 Gain Vp current controller
19 User menu 76.00 Integral−action time Tn current controller
20 User menu 142.00 Starting condition
21 User menu 92.00 Motor stator inductance
22 User menu 36.00 DC braking current
23 User menu 93.00 Controller identification
24 User menu 99.00 Software version
... ... 0 Not assigned
31 User menu 94.00 Password
32 User menu 3.00 Save parameter set
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−31

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

l Input of speed / phase
setpoint signal
C0521 CFG: VP−DIV 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
stretching factor
l 100 % = 16384 inc
C0522 CFG: RAT−DIV 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
gearbox factor
l 100 % = 16384 inc
C0523 CFG: A−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Signal for phase trimming via
offset multiplier (C0529)
l 100 % = 16384 inc
C0524 CFG: N−TRIM 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Signal for speed trimming
C0525 CFG: 0−PULSE 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l Signal for one−time zero
pulse activation
l HIGH = release for zero pulse
synchronisation
l Signal for reset of integrators
l HIGH sets
– Position difference = 0
– DFSET−PSET = 0
– DFSET−PSET2 = 0
l HIGH = Set phase integrators
to equal values
l LOW−HIGH edge sets
DFSET−PSET = 0
l HIGH−LOW edge sets
DFSET−PSET to the current
value of MCTRL−PHI−SET
l DFSET−SET has a higher
priority than DFSET−RESET
C0528 −2.109 {1} 2.109 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: 0−pulse A Phase difference between two
zero pulses
2 DIS: Offset Offset = C0523 × C0529 + C0252
8.5−32 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0529 Multip offset 1 −20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier, function block
DFSET 8.2−18
l Multiplier for the phase
offset (C0252)
C0530 DF evaluation 0 0 with factor With gearbox factor Master frequency evaluation,
1 no factor Without gearbox l Evaluation of the setpoint
factor integrator
C0531 Act 0 div 1 1 {1} 16384 Actual zero pulse divisor,
C0532 0−pulse/TP 1 1 0−pulse Index pulse Zero pulse / touch probe,
2 Touch probe Touch probe l Zero pulse of the feedback
system or touch probe
C0533 Vp denom 1 1 {1} 32767 Gain factor of denominator Vp,
C0534 0 pulse fct 0 Zero pulse function, function
block DFSET 8.2−18
l Synchronising the drive
0 inactive Inactive
1 Continuous Continuous
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
2 Cont. switch Continuous After a LOW−HIGH signal to
synchronisation, DFSET−0−pulse, the zero track is
correction in the synchronised once
shortest possible
way
10 Once, fast way One−time
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
11 Once, CW One−time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of rotation
to the right
12 Once, CCW One−time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of rotation
to the left
13 Once, 2*0−pulse One−time
synchronisation,
correction is
detected from
setpoint pulse and
actual pulse and
corrected to the
corresponding
direction
C0535 Set 0 div 1 1 {1} 16384 Desired zero pulse divisor,
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−33

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0536 −32767 {1} 32767 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: VP−DIV l Display of the signals linked 8.2−18
in C0521, C0522 and C0523
2 DIS: RAT−DIV
3 DIS: A−TRIM
C0537 DIS: N−TRIM −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DFSET
C0524
C0538 0 1 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: 0−pulse l Display of the signals linked
in C0525, C0526 and C0527
2 DIS: RESET
3 DIS: SET
C0539 DIS: IN −6000 {1 rpm} 6000 Function block DFSET
C0520
C0540 Function 0 Function selection, function 8.2−8
block DFOUT
l Output signal at X10
0 Analog input Analog input Signal at DFOUT−AN−IN is
output. Zero track can be input
externally.
1 PH diff input Phase difference Signal at DFOUT−DF−IN is output.
input Zero track can be input
externally.
2 Not assigned
3 Not assigned
4 X10 = X9 X9 is output on X10 The input signals are buffered
5 X10 = X8 X8 is output on X10 C0030 is without function
C0541 CFG: AN−IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
C0542 CFG: DF−IN 1000 FIXEDPHI−0 Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
function block DFOUT
l Speed signal
C0544 CFG: SYN−RDY 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l DFOUT−SYN−RDY = HIGH:
C0545 PH offset 0 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Phase offset, function block
DFOUT
l Displacing the zero pulse
generated via
DFOUT−SYN−RDY by up to
360 °
l 1 rev. = 65535 inc (360 °)
C0546 Min inc/rev 1000 1 {1 inc.} 2147483647 Masking of the touch probe
signal, function block DFSET 8.2−18
l Suppressing interference
pulses at X5/E4 (actual pulse
of touch probe signal)
l The size of the masking
window between two actual
pulses is set
8.5−34 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0547 DIS: AN−IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DFOUT 8.2−8
C0541
C0548 DIS: SYN−RDY 0 1 Function block DFOUT
C0544
C0549 DIS: DF−IN −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block DFOUT
C0542
C0560 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of fixed setpoints, See System
Manual
1 Fix set−value 100 function block FIXSET1 (extension)
l Output of the setpoints to
2 Fix set−value 75 FIXSET1−OUT via binary
3 Fix set−value 50 coding of the inputs
4 Fix set−value 25 FIXSET1−IN1 ... FIXST1−IN4
5 Fix set−value 0
... ... 0
15 Fix set−value 0
C0561 CFG: AIN 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block FIXSET1
l The analog input signal is
switched to FIXSET1−OUT if
all inputs FIXSET−INx = LOW
signals, function block FIXSET1
l The number of inputs to be
assigned depend on the
number of the fixed
setpoints required.
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 FIXSET1−IN1
C0563 DIS: AIN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block FIXSET1
C0561
C0564 0 1 Function block FIXSET1
in C0562/1, C0562/2,
C0562/3 and C0562/4
1 DIS: IN FIXSET1−IN1
C0570 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block S&H1 (extension)
C0571 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block S&H1
C0572 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block S&H1
C0570
C0573 DIS: LOAD 0 1 Function block S&H1
C0571
C0581 MONIT EEr 0 0 TRIP Configuration monitoring EEr, See System
Manual
1 Message external fault (extension)
2 Warning
3 Off
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−35

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0582 MONIT OH4 2 2 Warning Configuration monitoring OH4, See System
Manual
heatsink temperature (extension)
3 Off l The operating temperature
can be set in C0122
fixed operating temperature See System
2 Warning Manual
(extension)
l The operating temperature is
3 Off fixed at 150 °C
C0584 MONIT OH7 3 2 Warning Configuration of monitoring

motor temperature with 6.6−11
variable operating temperature See System
Manual
3 Off (extension)
l When reaching the
temperature set in C0121 the
warning OH7 is activated
C0585 MONIT OH8 3 0 TRIP Configuration of motor 6.6−9
temperature monitoring See System
2 Warning Manual
l Temperature monitoring via
(extension)
3 Off PTC input (T1, T2)
C0587 MONIT SD3 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
SD3, encoder at X9
2 Warning (extension)
l Monitors the voltage supply
3 Off at X9/pin 8
C0588 MONIT 0 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring See System
H10/H11 H10 and H11, thermal sensors in Manual
(extension)
the controller
l H10: Sensor error − heatsink
3 Off temperature
l H11: Sensor error − interior
temperature
C0591 MONIT CE1 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
2 Warning CE1, communication error at (extension)
CAN−IN1
3 Off
C0592 MONIT CE2 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring
2 Warning CE2, communication error at
CAN−IN2
3 Off
C0593 MONIT CE3 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring
2 Warning CE3, communication error at
CAN−IN3
3 Off
C0594 MONIT SD6 3 0 TRIP Activation of the motor
KTY at X8 See System
Manual
l Use C0594 = 0 or 2 to
(extension)
activate monitoring
l In case of a short circuit or
2 Warning
interruption at X8/5 and
X8/8 the fault message SD6
is activated
l Configuration of the
response when exceeding the
3 Off motor temperature
– Fixed operating
– Variable operating
8.5−36 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0595 MONIT CE4 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
2 Warning CE4, BUS−OFF (system bus) (extension)
3 Off
C0596 NMAX limit 4000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
Nmax, maximum system speed (extension)
exceeded
C0597 MONIT LP1 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring the See System
Manual
2 Warning motor phases LP1 (extension)
3 Off
C0598 MONIT SD5 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
2 Warning SD5, open circuit at analog input (extension)
X6/1, X6/2
3 Off
C0599 Limit LP1 5.0 1.0 {0.1 %} 10.0 Configuration of current limit See System
Manual
LP1, current limit value for (extension)
monitoring the motor phases in
C0597
C0600 Function 1 0 OUT = IN1 Function selection, function See System
Manual
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 * IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100 − IN2)
signal, function block ARIT2
in C0601
C0603 Function 1 0 OUT = IN1 Function selection, function See System
Manual
2 OUT = IN1 − IN2
3 OUT = IN1 * IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100 − IN2)
signal, function block ARIT3
in C0604
Manual
signal, function block SQRT1 (extension)
C0609 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block SQRT1
C0608
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−37

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0610 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signals, function block ADD1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Addition input ADD1−IN1
3 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Subtraction input ADD1−IN3
C0611 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ADD1
in C0610
1 DIS: IN ADD1−IN1
Manual
signals, function block ADD2 (extension)
3 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Subtraction input ADD2−IN3
C0613 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ADD2
in C0612
C0620 DB1 gain 1.00 −10.00 {0.01 } 10.00 Gain, function block DB1 See System
Manual
C0621 DB1 value 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Dead band, function block DB1 (extension)
l Fault signals around the zero
point of the input signal are
set to 0
C0622 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block DB1
C0623 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DB1
C0622
C0630 Max limit 100.00 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit, function block LIM1 See System
Manual
l The analog input signal is (extension)
limited to the set value
C0631 MiN limit −100.0 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Lower limit, function block LIM1
l The analog input signal is
limited to the set value
signal, function block LIM1
C0633 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block LIM1
C0632
8.5−38 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0640 Delay T 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Time constant, function block See System
Manual
PT1−1 (extension)
l Time period by which the
output of analog signal is
delayed
signal, function block PT1−1
C0642 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PT1−1
C0641
C0643 Delay T 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Time constant, function block
PT1−2
delayed
signal, function block PT1−2
C0645 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PT1−2
C0644
C0650 DT1−1 gain 1.00 −320.00 {0.01 } 320.00 Gain, function block DT1−1 See System
Manual
l Gain of the analog input (extension)
signal
C0651 Delay T 1.000 0.005 {0.01 s} 5.000 Time constant, function block
DT1−1
delayed
signal, function block DT1−1
C0653 Sensibility 1 1 15 bits Input sensitivity, function block
2 14 bits DT1−1
l According to the setting only
3 13 bits the indicated higher−order
4 12 bits bits are evaluated
5 11 bits
6 10 bits
7 9 bits
C0654 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DT1−1
C0652
C0655 Numerator 1 −32767 {1} 32767 Configuration of conversion See System
Manual
factor with numerator and (extension)
denominator, function block
CONV5
C0656 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT[rpm] + IN[%] @ 15000rpm @ C0655
100% C0656
signal, function block CONV5
C0658 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block CONV5
C0657
Manual
signal, function block ABS1 (extension)
l Converts bipolar signals into
unipolar signals
C0662 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ABS1
C0661
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−39

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0671 RFG1 Tir 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Acceleration time Tir and See System
Manual
deceleration time Tif, function (extension)
block RFG1
C0672 RFG1 Tif 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 l Acceleration and deceleration
ramp
signal, function block RFG1
l Selection of a final value at
RFG1−OUT
l Selection of a starting value
at RFG1−OUT
l HIGH: RFG1−OUT is set to the
value at RFG1−Set
l LOW: The signal at RFG1−OUT
travels along the ramps
towards the input value at
RFG1−IN
C0676 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block RFG1
in C0673 and C0674
1 DIS: RFG1 RFG1−IN
2 DIS: RFG1 RFG1−SET
C0677 DIS: LOAD 0 1 Function block RFG1
C0675
C0680 Function 1 1 IN1 = IN 2 Function selection, function See System
Manual
2 IN1 > IN2 block CMP1 (extension)
l Compare input signals at
3 IN1 < IN2 CMP1−IN1 and CMP1−IN2
4 |IN1IN2|
5 |IN1IN2|
6 |IN1IN2|
C0681 Hysteresis 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Hysteresis, function block CMP1
l Hysteresis for input signals
which are not stable and
hence the output oscillates
C0682 Window 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Window, function block CMP1
l Set the range in which the
signal comparison is to be
apply
signal, function block CMP1
1 CFG: IN 5001 MCTRL−NACT CMP1−IN1
2 CFG: IN 19500 FCODE−17 CMP1−IN2
C0684 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block CMP1
in C0683
1 DIS: IN CMP1−IN1
8.5−40 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
4 |IN1IN2|
5 |IN1IN2|
6 |IN1IN2|
apply
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% CMP2−IN1
in C0688
Manual
4 |IN1IN2|
5 |IN1IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
apply
in C0693
C0700 CFG: IN 19523 FCODE−472/3 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block ANEG1 (extension)
l The value at ANEG1−IN is
multiplied by −1 and output
C0701 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ANEG1
C0700
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−41

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0703 CFG: IN 19523 FCODE−472/3 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block ANEG2 (extension)
l The value at ANEG2−IN is
multiplied by −1 and output
C0704 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ANEG2
C0703
Manual
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
apply
in C0708
8.5−42 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0710 Function 0 Function selection, function See System
Manual
block TRANS1 (extension)
0 Rising trans Rising edge 1. LOW−HIGH edge at
TRANS1−IN switches
TRANS1−OUT = HIGH
2. After the time has elapsed
(C0711),
TRANS1−OUT switches
to LOW
1 Falling trans Falling edge 1. HIGH−LOW edge at
TRANS1−OUT = HIGH
(C0711),
to LOW
2 Both trans Both edges 1. LOW−HIGH− or HIGH−LOW
edge at TRANS1−IN switches
TRANS1−OUT = HIGH
(C0711),
to LOW
C0711 Pulse T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Pulse duration, function block
TRANS1
l After the time has elapsed,
to LOW
C0713 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block TRANS1
C0714 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block TRANS1
C0713
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−43

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

Manual
block TRANS2 (extension)
0 Rising trans Rising edge 1. LOW−HIGH edge at
TRANS2−OUT = HIGH
(C0716),
TRANS2−OUT switches to
LOW
1 Falling trans Falling edge 1. HIGH−LOW edge at
TRANS2−OUT = HIGH
(C0716),
LOW
2 Both trans Both edges 1. LOW−HIGH or HIGH−LOW
edge at TRANS2−IN switches
TRANS2−OUT = HIGH
(C0716),
LOW
C0716 Pulse T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Pulse duration, function block
TRANS2
to LOW
signal, function block TRANS2
C0719 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block TRANS2
C0718
Manual
block DIGDEL1 (extension)
0 On delay On delay 1. LOW−HIGH edge at
DIGDEL1−IN starts a timing
element
(C0721), DIGDEL1−OUT
switches to HIGH
1 Off delay Off delay 1. LOW−HIGH edge at
element and sets
DIGDEL1−OUT = HIGH
switches to LOW
2 ON/OFF delay On/off delay 1. LOW−HIGH or HIGH−LOW
edge at DIGDEL1−IN starts a
timing element
(C0721),
DIGDEL1−OUT = DIGDEL1−IN
C0721 Delay T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Delay time, function block
DIGDEL1
signal, function block DIGDEL1
C0724 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block DIGDEL1
C0723
8.5−44 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
block DIGDEL2 (extension)
0 On delay On delay 1. LOW−HIGH edge at
element
switches to HIGH
1 Off delay Off delay 1. LOW−HIGH edge at
element and sets
DIGDEL2−OUT = HIGH
switches to LOW
2 ON/OFF delay On/off delay 1. LOW−HIGH or HIGH−LOW
edge at DIGDEL2−IN starts a
timing element
(C0726),
DIGDEL2−OUT = DIGDEL2−IN
C0726 Delay T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Delay time, function block
DIGDEL2
signal, function block DIGDEL2
C0729 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block DIGDEL2
C0728
C0730 Mode 0 0 Stop measurement Function block OSZ See System
Manual
l Starting / stopping the (extension)
1 Start measurement measured value recording
C0731 Status 0 Measurement completed Oscilloscope function
1 Measurement active l Read only
l Current operating status
2 Trigger detected
3 Abort
4 Abort after trigger
5 Read memory
Manual
signals, function block OSZ (extension)
1 OSZ channel 1 1000 FIXED0% Function block OSZ
2 OSZ channel 2 1000 FIXED0%
signal, function block OSZ
1 Trigger input 1000 FIXED0
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−45

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0734 Trigger source 1 0 OSZ trigger input Function block OSZ See System
Manual
1 OSZ channel 1 l Configure digital input C0732 (extension)
or C0733 with desired trigger
2 OSZ channel 2 signal
3 OSZ channel 3
4 OSZ channel 4
C0735 Trigger level 0 −32767 {1} 32767 Function block OSZ
l Trigger level OSZ channel 1 ...
OSZ channel 4
C0736 Trigger edge 0 0 LOW−HIGH edge Oscilloscope function
1 HIGH−LOW edge
C0737 Trigger Delay 0.0 −100.0 {0.1 %} 999.99 Function block OSZ
l Setting of pretriggering and
posttriggering
C0738 Sampling 3 3 1 ms Oscilloscope function See System
Manual
period 4 2 ms l Time base (extension)
5 5 ms
6 10 ms
7 20 ms
8 50 ms
9 100 ms
10 200 ms
11 500 ms
12 1s
13 2s
14 5s
15 10 s
16 20 s
17 50 s
18 1 min
19 2 min
20 5 min
21 10 min
C0739 Number of 4 1 {1} 4 Function block OSZ See System
Manual
channels l Switching on/off the (extension)
channels
– 1 = channel 1
– 2 = channel 1 + 2
– 3 = channel 1 ... 3
– 4 = channel 1 ... 4
C0740 0 Oscilloscope function
l Reading data memory
1 Read start 0 0 {1} 65535 l Provides a pointed access to a
position storage block
2 Enable/inhibit 0 0 No data reading
data reading 1 Data reading
8.5−46 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0741 STATUS 0 1000000000 Function block OSZ See System
Manual
1 Version l Read only (extension)
2 Memory size
3 Data width
4 Number of
channels
C0742 Data block 8 0 {1} 65536 Function block OSZ
length
C0743 Read data 0 65535 Function block OSZ
block length l Read only
(OSZ) l Reading an 8 byte data block
C0744 Memory 3 0 512 measured values Oscilloscope function
depth 1 1024 measured values l Adapt memory capacity to
the measurement task
2 1536 measured values
C0749 0 65535 Information about storing the See System
measured values, function block Manual
(extension)
OSZ
l Read only
1 Abort index Measured value no. of the abort
time
2 Trigger index Measured value no. of the
trigger time
3 End index Measured value no. of the end
time
C0750 Vp denom 16 1 1 Gain VP of the position
2 1/2 controller, function block 8.2−13
DFRFG1
4 1/4
8 1/8
16 1/16
32 1/32
64 1/64
128 1/128
256 1/256
512 1/512
1024 1/1024
2048 1/2048
4096 1/4096
8192 1/8192
16384 1/16384
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−47

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0751 DFRFG1 Tir 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.999 Acceleration time Tir, function
block DFRFG1 8.2−13
C0752 Max speed 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 Maximum speed, function block
DFRFG1
l Maximum speed−up (speed)
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif for quick
stop, function block DFRFG1
C0754 PH error 2.109 10 {1} . 9
2 10 Following error, function block
DFRFG1
l Maximum permissible phase
difference between setpoint
an actual phase
l 1 rev. = 65535 inc
C0755 Syn window 100 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Synchronisation window,
l 1 rev. = 65535 inc
function block DFRFG1 8.2−13
l Speed/phase setpoint signal
C0759 CFG: QSP 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block DFRFG1
l HIGH = quick stop active
C0760 CFG: STOP 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
l HIGH = Status of the profile
generator is maintained,
setpoint is saved
C0761 CFG: RESET 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
l HIGH = resetting the
integrators
C0764 0 1 Function block DFRFG1
1 DIS: QSP l Display of the signals linked
in C0759, C0760 and C0761
2 DIS: STOP
3 DIS: RESET
C0765 DIS: IN −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block DFRFG1
C0758
C0770 CFG: D 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
signal, function block FLIP1 (extension)
C0771 CFG: CLK 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block FLIP1
l Each LOW−HIGH edge at
FLIP1−CLK switches the signal
at FLIP1−D to FLIP1−OUT
C0772 CFG: CLR 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l Resets the flip−flop
l HIGH: Sets FLIP1−OUT = LOW
l Input has highest priority
C0773 0 1 Function block FLIP1
1 DIS: D l Display of the signals linked
in C0770, C0771 and C0773
2 DIS: CLK
3 DIS: CLR
8.5−48 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0775 CFG: D 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
signal, function block FLIP2 (extension)
C0776 CFG: CLK 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l Each LOW−HIGH edge at
FLIP2−CLK switches the signal
at FLIP2−D to FLIP2−OUT
C0777 CFG: CLR 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l Resets the flip−flop
l HIGH: sets FLIP2−OUT = LOW
l Input has highest priority
C0778 0 1 Function block FLIP2
1 DIS: D l Display of the signals linked
in C0775, C0776 and C0777
2 DIS: CLK
3 DIS: CLR
C0780 CFG: N 5250 NLIM1−OUT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block NSET (extension)
l Main setpoint
C0781 CFG: N−INV 10251 R/L/Q−R/L Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block NSET
l HIGH: main setpoint (C0780)
is inverted
C0782 CFG: NADD 55 AIN2−OUT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Additional setpoint
C0783 CFG: 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
NADD−INV signal, function block NSET
l HIGH: additional setpoint
(C0783) is inverted
C0784 CFG: 5001 MCTRL−NACT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
CINH−VAL signal, function block NSET
l The signal is accepted by the
main setpoint integrator
when the controller is
inhibited
C0785 CFG: SET 5000 MCTRL−nset2 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l When NSET−LOAD = HIGH,
the signal is accepted by the
main setpoint integrator
C0786 CFG: LOAD 5001 MCTRL−QSP−OUT Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH: The signal at NSET−SET
is accepted by the mains
setpoint integrator
l Control of both ramp
function generators in special
situations, e.g. quick stop
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−49

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

Manual
signals, function block NSET (extension)
l Activation of a fixed speed
via binary coding of the
digital input signals
l For coding see description of
function block NSET
l Parameter setting of the
fixed speeds (JOG setpoints)
in C0039
1 CFG: JOG 53 DIGIN3 NSET−JOG*1
2 CFG: JOG 1000 FIXED0 NSET−JOG*2
signals, function block NSET
l Activation of additional
acceleration and deceleration
times for the mains setpoint
digital input signals
l For coding see description of
function block NSET
l Parameter setting of the
times in C0101 and 103
1 CFG: TI 1000 FIXED0 NSET−Ti*1
C0789 CFG: RFG−0 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
signal, function block NSET (extension)
l HIGH: Guides the main
setpoint integrator to 0 via
the current Ti times
RFG−STOP signal, function block NSET
l HIGH: Keeps the main
setpoint integrator on its
current value
8.5−50 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0798 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block NSET See System
Manual
l Display of the signals linked (extension)
1 DIS: CINH−VAL in C0783 and C0785
Read only: analog input signals
2 DIS: SET of NSET
C0799 Input signals 0 1 Function block NSET
1 DIS: N−INV l Display of the signals linked
in C0781, C0783, C0786,
2 DIS: C0787, C0788, C0789 and
NADD−INV C0790
3 DIS: LOAD
4 DIS: JOG*1
5 DIS: JOG*2
6 DIS: JOG*4
7 DIS: JOG*8
8 DIS: TI*1
9 DIS: TI*2
10 DIS: TI*4
11 DIS: TI*8
12 DIS: RFG−0
13 DIS: RFG−STOP
C0800 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block PCTRL (extension)
l Input for the process setpoint
l Value range: ±200 %
C0801 CFG: ACT 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
signal, function block PCTRL
Configuration of analog input
signal of PCTRL1
l Input for the actual value
C0802 CFG: INFLU 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Evaluation (influence) of the
output signal
C0803 CFG: ADAPT 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l The gain Vp can be changed
via the adaptation input
C0804 CFG: INACT 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = deactivates the
process controller
C0805 CFG: I−OFF 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = Switching off integral
action component
l LOW = Switching on integral
action component
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−51

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0808 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PCTRL See System
Manual
1 DIS: SET l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C0801, C0802, C0803 and
2 DIS: ACT C0804
3 DIS: INFLU
4 DIS: ADAPT
C0809 Function block PCTRL
1 DIS: INACT l Display of the signals linked
in C0805 and C0806
2 DIS: I−OFF
Manual
signals, function block ASW1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% ASW1−IN1
signal, function block ASW1
l LOW: signal at ASW1−IN1 is
output to ASW1−OUT
l HIGH: signal at ASW1−IN2 is
C0812 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ASW1
in C0810
1 DIS: IN ASW1−IN1
C0813 DIS: SET 0 1 Function block ASW1
C0811
Manual
in C0815
C0818 DIS: SET 0 1 Function block ASW2
C0816
Manual
signals, function block AND1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 AND1−IN1
C0821 0 1 Function block AND1 See System
Manual
in C0820
1 DIS: IN AND1−IN1
8.5−52 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
Manual
in C0822
Manual
Manual
in C0824
Manual
Manual
in C0826
Manual
Manual
in C0828
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−53

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

Manual
signals, function block OR1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 OR1−IN1
C0831 0 1 Function block OR1
in C0830
1 DIS: IN OR1−IN1
2 DIS: IN OR1−IN2
3 DIS: IN OR1−IN3
Manual
in C0832
1 DIS: IN OR2−IN1
2 DIS: IN OR2−IN2
3 DIS: IN OR2−IN3
Manual
in C0834
1 DIS: IN OR3−IN1
2 DIS: IN OR3−IN2
3 DIS: IN OR3−IN3
Manual
in C0836
1 DIS: IN OR4−IN1
2 DIS: IN OR4−IN2
3 DIS: IN OR4−IN3
8.5−54 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
in C0838
1 DIS: IN OR5−IN1
2 DIS: IN OR5−IN2
3 DIS: IN OR5−IN3
C0840 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
signal, function block NOT1 (extension)
C0841 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block NOT1
C0841
Manual
C0842
Manual
C0844
Manual
C0846
Manual
C0848
Manual
signals, function block AIF−OUT (extension)
1 CFG: OUT.W1 1000 FIXED0% Process output word 1
l 100% = 16384
l Signal is output via byte 3
and byte 4 to X1
l 100% = 16384
l 100% = 16384
C0851 CFG: OUT.D1 1000 FIXED0INC Selection list 3 Configuration of phase input
signal, function block AIF
l 32−bit phase signal
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−55

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0852 Type OUT.W2 0 Output of the signal type, See System
Manual
function block AIF (extension)
0 analog Analog signal AIF−OUT.W2 (C0850/2) is output
to X1
1 digital 0−15 Digital signal via bit FDO−00 ... FDO−15 (LOW word,
0 ... bit 15 C0116/1 ... C0116/15) are
output to X1
2 low phase Low phase AIF−OUT.D1 (LOW word, C0851)
is output to X1
C0853 Type OUT.W3 0 Output of the signal type,
function block AIF
0 analog Analog signal AIF−OUT.W3 (C0850/3) is output
to X1
1 digital 16−31 Digital signal via bit FDO−16 ... FDO−31 (HIGH word,
16 ... bit 31 C0116/16 ... C0116/31) are
output to X1
2 high phase High phase AIF−OUT.D1 (HIGH word, C0851)
is output to X1
C0855 0 FFFF Process input words, function See System
Manual
block AIF−IN (extension)
l Read only
1 DIS: IN Bit 0 ... bit 15 (via byte 5 and
(0 ... 15) byte 6)
2 DIS: IN Bit 16 ... bit 31 (via byte 7 and
(16 ... 31) byte 8)
C0856 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Process input words, function See System
Manual
l Read only
l 100% = 16384
1 DIS: IN.W1 Input via byte 3 and byte 4
C0857 DIS: IN.D1 −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32−bit phase signal, function See System
Manual
l Read only
l 65536 = 1 rev.
C0858 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Process output words, function See System
Manual
block AIF−OUT
1 DIS: OUT.W1 (extension)
2 DIS: OUT.W2 in C0850
3 DIS: OUT.W3 l 100% = 16384
C0859 DIS: OUT.D1 −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32−bit phase signal, function See System
Manual
block AIF−OUT (extension)
C0851
l 1 rev. = 65536
8.5−56 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
signals, function block CAN−OUT (extension)
1 CFG: 1000 FIXED0% CAN−OUT1
OUT1.W1
2 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT1.W2
3 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT1.W3
4 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT2.W1
OUT2.W2
6 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT2.W3
7 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT2.W4
OUT3.W1
9 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT3.W2
10 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT3.W3
11 CFG: 1000 FIXED0%
OUT3.W4
C0861 Selection list 3 Configuration of input signals,
function block CAN−OUT
1 CFG: OUT1.D1 1000 FIXED0INC CAN−OUT1
C0863 0 FFFF Process input words, function See System
Manual
block CAN−IN (extension)
l Read only
l Bit 0 ... bit 15 (via byte 5 and
byte 6)
l Bit 16 ... bit 31 (via byte 7 and
byte 8)
1 DIS: IN1 dig0 CAN−IN1, bit 0 ... bit 15
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−57

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0864 Output of the signal type, See System
Manual
function block CAN−OUT (extension)
1 TYPEOUT1.W2 0 0 analog Analog signal CAN−OUTx.Wx (C0860) is output
to X4
2 TYPEOUT2.W1 0 1 digital 0−15 Digital signal FDO−00 ... FDO−15 (LOW word,
bit 0 ... bit 15 C0116/1 ... C0116/15) are
output to X4
3 TypeOUT3.W1 0 2 low phase Low phase CAN−OUTx.D1 (LOW word,
C0861) is output to X4
C0865 Output of the signal type,
1 TYPEOUT1.W3 0 0 analog Analog signal CAN−OUTx.Wx (C0860) is output
to X4
2 TYPEOUT2.W2 0 1 digital 16−31 Digital signal FDO−16 ... FDO−31 (HIGH word,
bit 16 ... bit 31 C0116/16 ... C0116/31) are
output to X1
3 TYPEOUT3.W2 0 2 high phase High phase CAN−OUTx.D1 (HIGH word,
C0861) is output to X4
C0866 −32768.00 {0.01 %} 32767.00 Process input words, function See System
Manual
block CAN−IN (extension)
l Read only
l 100% = 16384
1 DIS: IN1.W1 CAN−IN1
2 DIS: IN1.W2
3 DIS: IN1.W3
5 DIS: IN2.W2
6 DIS: IN2.W3
7 DIS: IN2.W4
9 DIS: IN3.W2
10 DIS: IN3.W3
11 DIS: IN3.W4
C0867 −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32−bit phase signal, function
1 DIS: IN1.D1 block CAN−IN
l Read only
2 DIS: IN2.D1
l 1 rev. = 65536
3 DIS: IN3.D1
C0868 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Process output words, function See System
Manual
1 DIS: OUT1.W1 block CAN−OUT (extension)
2 DIS: OUT1.W2 in C0860
3 DIS: OUT1.W3 l 100% = 16384
4 DIS: OUT2.W1
5 DIS: OUT2.W2
6 DIS: OUT2.W3
7 DIS: OUT2.W4
8 DIS: OUT3.W1
9 DIS: OUT3.W2
10 DIS: OUT3.W3
11 DIS: OUT3.W4
C0869 −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32−bit phase information,
1 DIS: OUT1.D1
2 DIS: OUT2.D1 in C0861
3 DIS: OUT3.D1 l 1 rev. = 65536
8.5−58 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
signals, function block DCTRL (extension)
1 CFG: CINH 1000 FIXED0 DCTRL−CINH1
HIGH = Controller inhibit
2 CFG: CINH 1000 FIXED0 DCTRL−CINH2
HIGH = Controller inhibit
C0871 CFG: TRIP−SET 54 DIGIN4 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block DCTRL
l HIGH = fault message EEr
C0876 CFG: TRIP−RES 55 DIGIN5 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block DCTRL
l LOW−HIGH edge = TRIP reset
C0878 Function block DCTRL See System
Manual
1 DIS: CINH1 l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C0870, C0871 and C0876
2 DIS: CINH2
3 DIS: TRIP−SET
4 DIS: TRIP−RES
C0879 Resetting control words
1 Reset C135 0 0 Ready l C0879 = 1 performs one reset
2 Reset AIF 0 1 Reset

3 Reset CAN 0
Manual
signals, function block DCTRL (extension)
1 CFG: PAR*1 1000 FIXED0 C0880/ C0880/2 Selected parameter l Select parameter set
1 set l Selection of a parameter set
2 CFG: PAR*2 1000 FIXED0 0 0 Parameter set 1 digital input signals
0 1 Parameter set 2
1 0 Parameter set 3
1 1 Parameter set 4
C0881 CFG: 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
PAR−LOAD signal, function block DCTRL (extension)
l LOW−HIGH edge = Load
selected parameter set into
C0880
C0884 Function block DCTRL See System
Manual
1 DIS: PAR*1 l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C0880 and C0881
2 DIS: PAR*2
3 DIS: PAR−LOAD
C0885 CFG: R 51 DIGIN1 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
signals, function block R/L/Q (extension)
l Truth table:
Inputs Outputs
R L R/L QSP
C0886 CFG: L 52 DIGIN2 Selection list 2 0 0 0/1 1
1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 ˘ ˘
˘ State is unchanged
C0889 0 1 Function block R/L/Q
1 DIS: R l Display of the signals linked
in C0885 and C0886
2 DIS: L
l Speed setpoint
8.2−40
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−59

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0891 CFG: M−Add 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Additional torque setpoint or
torque setpoint
C0892 CFG: Lo−M−LIM 5700 ANEG1−OUT Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Lower torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0893 CFG: HI−M−LIM 19523 FCODE−472/3 Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Upper torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0898 CFG: M−LIM 0 0 M−LIM ON Reduced torque Torque limitation in the field
switch limit is active weakening range, function block 8.2−40
MCTRL
l If the torque limit is reduced,
the maximum possible
1 M−LIM OFF Reduced torque torque in the field weakening
limit is inactive range is lowered with 1/f.
This provides a higher motor
stability in the field
weakening range
N/M−SWT signal, function block MCTRL 8.2−40
l LOW = active speed control
l HIGH = active torque control
stop 8.2−40
C0901 CFG: I−SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Setting of integral action
component of the speed
controller
C0902 CFG: I−LOAD 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
l HIGH = the integral action
component at MCTRL−I−SET is
accepted by the speed
controller
C0903 CFG: BOOST 5015 MCTRL−BOOST Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Boost of the motor voltage
DC−BREAK signal, function block MCTRL 8.2−25
C0904
8.5−60 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

1 DIS: N−SET l Display of the signals linked 8.2−25
in C0890, C0891, C0892,
2 DIS: M−ADD C0893, C0901 and C0903 8.2−40
3 DIS: LO−M−LIM
4 DIS: HI−M−LIM
5 DIS: I−SET
6 DIS: BOOST
1 reserved l Display of the signals linked
in C0899, C0900 and C0902
2 DIS: N/M−SWT
3 DIS: QSP
4 DIS: I−LOAD
MCTRL 8.2−25
2 0 ... 175 % l Limitation of direction of
rotation for the speed 8.2−40
3 −175 ... 0 % setpoint
C0910 CFG: 1006 FIXED100% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
VP−ADAPT signal, function block MCTRL 8.2−25
controller 8.2−40
C0910
C0912 OV delay time à − {1 ms} − Delay time of the pulse release
after an OU message 8.2−25
The default value can be
changed by the factor 0.5 ... 2 8.2−40
à depending on the type
Manual
CONV1
C0941 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT[%] + IN[%] @ C0940
C0941
C0942
Manual
CONV2
C0946 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT[%] + IN[%] @ C0945
C0946
C0947
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−61

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

Manual
CONV3
C0951 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT[%] + IN[rpm] @ 100% @ C0950
15000rpm C0951
C0952
Manual
CONV4
C0956 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT[%] + IN[rpm] @ 100% @ C0955
15000rpm C0956
C0957
Manual
block CURVE1 (extension)
1 Function 1 Characteristic with two base
points
2 Function 2 Characteristic with three base
points
3 Function 3 Characteristic with four base
points
C0961 y0 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of base point y0, See System
Manual
function block CURVE1 (extension)
l Ordinate of the value pair
(x = 0 % / y0)
C0962 y1 50.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of base point y1,
function block CURVE1
l Ordinate of the value pair (x1
/ y1)
C0963 y2 75.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of base point y2,
l Ordinate of the value pair (x2
/ y2)
C0964 y100 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of base point
y100, function block CURVE1
l Ordinate of the value pair
(x 100 % / y100)
C0965 x1 50.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.99 Configuration of base point x1,
l Abscissa of the pair (x1 / y1)
C0966 x2 75.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.99 Configuration of base point x2,
l Abscissa of the pair (x2 / y2)
Manual
signal, function block CURVE1 (extension)
C0968 DIS: IN −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block CURVE1
C0967
8.5−62 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C0970 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
signal, function block MFAIL (extension)
l Starting value for the
controlled deceleration in [%]
of C0011
C0971 CFG: FAULT 1000 FIXED0 Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
signal, function block MFAIL
l HIGH = activates mains
failure control
l HIGH = resets mains failure
control
C0973 CFG: ADAPT 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Dynamic adaptation of the
proportional gain of UGsetl
controller in [%] of C0980
C0974 CFG: CONST 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Proportional gain of UGset
controller in [%] of C0980
C0975 CFG: 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
THRESHLD signal, function block MFAIL
l Restart protection when the
value falls below the speed
threshold
l Restart threshold in [%] of
C0011
C0976 CFG: NACT 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Comparison value for the
restart threshold in [%] of
C0011
l Start for V2 controller
l Speed starting value for the
deceleration in [%] of C0011
C0978 CFG: DC−SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
l Setting of the voltage
setpoint on which the DC−bus
voltage is to be kept
(100 % = 1000 V)
C0980 MFAIL Vp 0.500 0.001 {0.001} 31.000 Gain Vp, function block MFAIL See System
Manual
C0981 MFAIL Tn 100 20 {1 ms} 2000 Integral−action time Tn, function (extension)
block MFAIL
C0982 MFAIL Tir 2.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 16.000 Acceleration time Tir, function
block MFAIL
C0983 Retrigger T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 s} 60.000 Retrigger time, function block
MFAIL
the mains failure control is
terminated
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−63

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C0988 Input signals −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block MFAIL See System
Manual
1 DIS: N−SET l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C0970, C0973, C0974,
2 DIS: ADAPT C0975, C0976, C0977 and
3 DIS: CONST C0978
4 DIS:
THRESHLD
5 DIS: NACT
6 DIS: SET
7 DIS: DC−SET
C0989 0 1 Function block MFAIL
1 DIS: FAULT l Display of the signals linked
in C0971 and C0972
2 DIS: RESET
C1000 DIVISION 1 0 {1} 31 Part factor, function block See System
Manual
CONVPHA1 (extension)
l Calculate output signal:
100%
OUT[%] + IN[%] @
2 14 @ 2 C1000
C1001 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0INC Selection list 3 Configuration of input signal,
function block CONVPHA1
C1002 DIS: IN −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 Function block CONVPHA1
C1001
C1040 Acceleration 100.000 0.001 {0.001 } 5000.000 Acceleration, function block See System
Manual
SRFG1 (extension)
l Max. acceleration
C1041 Jerk 0.200 0.001 {0.001 s} 999.999 Jerk, function block SRFG1
l S−ramp time
signal, function block SRFG1
l Starting value for the ramp
function generator
l Starting value is accepted
when SRFG1−LOAD = HIGH
l HIGH = accepts the value at
SRFG1−SET and outputs it to
SRFG1−OUT. SRFG1−DIFF
remains on 0 %
C1045 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block SRFG1
in C1042 and C1043
2 DIS: SET
C1046 DIS: LOAD 0 1 Function block SRFG1
C1044
8.5−64 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C1090 Output signal −2147483648 {1} 2147483647 Function block FEVAN1 See System
Manual
l Display of the converted (extension)
signal
C1091 Code 141 2 {1} 2000 Code, function block FEVAN1
l Selection of the target code
in which the calculated value
is to be written
C1092 Subcode 0 0 {1} 255 Subcode, function block FEVAN1
l Selection of the target
subcode in which the
calculated value is to be
written
C1093 Numerator 1.0000 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 Numerator, function block See System
Manual
FEVAN1 (extension)
l Scaling of the input signal
C1094 Denominator 0.0001 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 Denominator, function block
FEVAN1
l Scaling of the input signal
C1095 Offset 0 0 {1} 1000000000 Offset, function block FEVAN1
l An offset can be added to the
converted signal
Manual
signal, function block FEVAN1 (extension)
signal, function block FEVAN1
l A LOW−HIGH edge transmits
the converted signal to the
target code
C1098 DIS: IN −32768 {1} 32767 Function block FEVAN1 See System
Manual
l Display of the signal linked in (extension)
C1096
C1099 DIS: LOAD Function block FEVAN1
C1097
Manual
block FCNT1 (extension)
1 Return At |counter
content| ³ |FCNT1−CMP−Val|
FCNT1−EQUAL is set to HIGH for
1 ms
2 Hold if >= At |counter
content| ³ |FCNT1−CMP−Val| the
counter stops
3 Hold if = At |counter
content| = |FCNT1−CMP−Val| the
counter stops
Manual
signals, function block FCNT1 (extension)
1 CFG: LD−VAL 1000 FIXED0% l Starting value
2 CFG: CMP−VAL 1000 FIXED0% l Comparison value
Manual
signals, function block FCNT1 (extension)
1 CFG: CLKUP 1000 FIXED0 LOW−HIGH edge counts
upwards by one
2 CFG: CLKDWN 1000 FIXED0 LOW−HIGH edge counts
downwards by one
3 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = accepts starting value
l Input signal has highest
priority
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−65

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C1103 −32768 {1} 32768 Function block FCNT1 See System
Manual
1 DIS: LD−VAL l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C1101
2 DIS: CMP−VAL
C1104 0 1 Function block FCNT1
1 DIS: CLKUP l Display of the signals linked
in C1102
2 DIS: CLKDWN
3 DIS: LOAD
Manual
in C1060
C1163 DIS: SET Function block ASW3
C1061
C1190 Motor PTC 0 Temperature characteristic for
selection PTC thermistors 6.6−11
l Selection of the characteristic
for PTC thermistors at X7 or
X8 for detecting the motor
temperature
0 Standard Characteristic for PTC
thermistors in Lenze motors
1 Characteristic Characteristic for
application−specific PTC
thermistors
C1191 Temperature 0 {1 °C} 255 Temperature range for PTC
l Define temperature points
on the characteristic for PTC
thermistors
C1192 Resistance 0 {1 W} 3000 Resistance characteristic for PTC
l Define resistance points on
the characteristic for PTC
thermistors
8.5−66 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

C1300 N−motor/ 300 −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Motor speed at Dmax, function 8.2−1
Dmax block DCALC1
l Nominal speed of the
winding drive
C1301 N−line max 3000 1 {1 rpm} 32767 Maximum line speed, function
block DCALC1
l Nominal speed of the line
drive
C1302 calc cycle 0.1 0.1 {0.1 rev} 100.0 Calculation cycle, function block 8.2−1
DCALC1
C1303 time const 0.10 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Filter time constant, function
block DCALC1
C1304 Dmax 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Maximum diameter, function 8.2−1
block DCALC1
l Nominal winding diameter
C1305 lower D−limit 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Lower diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
l Minimum winding diameter
C1306 upper D−limit 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Upper diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
l Maximum winding diameter
C1307 hyst D−limit 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.0 Hysteresis − diameter limitation,
l Hysteresis for Dmin /Dmax
output
C1308 arit function 1 0 DCALC1−OUT=D DCALC1−OUT = Selection of the arithmetic 8.2−1
diameter function, function block DCALC1
1 DCALC1−OUT=1/D DCALC1−OUT =
1/diameter
C1309 Dmin 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Minimum diameter, function 8.2−1
block DCALC1
C1310 DCALC1−Titim 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 999.900 Acceleration and deceleration
e time, function block DCALC1
C1311 window D−calc 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Window − diameter calculation,
l Window setting for
permissible diameter
deviation
C1320 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0% Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input 8.2−1
signal, function block DCALC1
l The signal is scaled to the
value in C1304
(100 % ¢ C1304)
signals, function block DCALC1
1 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH: initial value at
DCALC1−SET is accepted
l DCALC1−LOAD has a higher
priority than DCALC1−HOLD
2 CFG: HOLD 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = holds the diameter
value reached and resets the
integrators.
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−67

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C1322 −36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Function block DCALC1 8.2−1
1 DIS: N−Line l Display of the signals linked
in C1327
2 DIS: N−WIND
C1325 DIS: SET −199,99 {0.01 %} 199,99 Function block DCALC1
C1320
C1326 0 1 Function block DCALC1
1 DIS: LOAD l Display of the signals linked
in C1321
2 DIS: HOLD
C1327 Selection list 3 Configuration of input signals, 8.2−1
1 CFG: N−Line 1000 FIXED0INC l Speed signal of the line drive
2 CFG: N−WIND 1000 FIXED0INC l Speed signal of the winding
drive
C1328 DIS: D−ACT −200 {1 mm} 200 Function block DCALC1
l Display of the current
diameter
C1330 PCTRL2 Tir 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s 6000.0 Acceleration time tir, function See System
Manual
block PCTRL2 (extension)
l Acceleration time for the
setpoint
0 ... 100 %
C1331 PCTRL2 Tif 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Deceleration time tif, function
block PCTRL2
l Deceleration time for the
setpoint
100 % ... 0
C1332 PCTRL2 Vp 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Gain Vp, function block PCTRL2 See System
Manual
C1333 PCTRL2 Tn 400 20 {1 ms} 99999 Integral−action time Tn, function (extension)
block PCTRL2
Setting of reset time Tn of
PCTRL2
C1334 PCTRL2 Kd 0.0 0.0 {0.1 } 5.0 Differential component Kd,
C1335 bipolar/ 0 Sphere of action, function block
unipolar PCTRL2
0 Bipolar l Output value is limited to See System
Manual
−100 ... 100 % (extension)
1 Unipolar l Output value is limited to
0 ... 100 %
C1336 Tir overlay 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Fade−in time, function block See System
Manual
PCTRL2 (extension)
l Acceleration time of the
ramp generator
l Controls the influence of the
process controller
C1337 Tif overlay 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Fade−out time, function block
PCTRL2
l Deceleration time of the
ramp generator
l Controls the influence of the
process controller
8.5−68 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
signals, function block PCTRL2 (extension)
1 CFG: RFG−SET 1000 FIXED0% l The process setpoint is
shown at PCTRL2−SET with a
starting value via a ramp
generator
l PCTRL−RFG−LOAD = HIGH
activates the function
2 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0% l Input for process value
3 CFG: ACT 1000 FIXED0% l Input for actual value
4 CFG: INFL 1000 FIXED0% l Evaluation (influence) of the
output signal
Manual
signals, function block PCTRL2 (extension)
1 CFG: 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = function of
RFG−LOAD PCTRL2−RFG−SET is active
2 CFG: I−OFF 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = Switches of integral
action component
l LOW = switches on integral
action component
3 CFG: INACT 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = deactivates process
controller
4 CFG: OVERLAY 1000 FIXED0 l HIGH = Shows influence
l LOW = hides influence
C1344 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PCTRL2 See System
Manual
1 DIS: RFG−SET l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C1340
2 DIS: SET
3 DIS: ACT
4 DIS: INFL
C1345 0 1 Function block PCTRL2
1 DIS: RFG−LOAD l Display of the signals linked
in C1341
2 DIS: I−OFF
3 DIS: INACT
4 DIS: OVERLAY
C1350 INT1 function 0 Function selection, function See System
Manual
block INT1 (extension)
0 PHI >= REF If INT1−IN ³ INT1−REF,
INT1−DOUT is set to HIGH
1 |PHI| >= |REF| If |INT1−IN| ³ |INT1−REF|,
C1351 INT1 scaling 6553600 65536 {1} 1000000000 Scaling factor, function block
INT1
INT1 * IN[inc]
INT1 * AOUT[%] + @ 100%
C1351
C1354 CFG: REF 1000 FIXED0INC Selection list 3 Input signal configuration See System
Manual
l Reference value (extension)
function block INT1
l Angle of rotation
signal, function block INT1
l HIGH = Sets the integrator to
0
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−69

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C1357 DIS: REF −2000000000 {1 inc} 2000000000 Function block INT1 See System
Manual
C13554
C1358 DIS: IN −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block INT1
C1355
C1359 DIS: RESET 0 1 Function block INT1
C1356
C1360 INT2 function 0 Function selection, function See System
Manual
block INT2 (extension)
0 PHI >= REF If INT2−IN ³ INT2−REF,
1 |PHI| >= |REF| If |INT2−IN| ³ |INT2−REF|,
C1361 INT2 scaling 6553600 65536 {1} 1000000000 Scaling factor, function block
INT2
INT2 * IN[inc]
INT2 * AOUT[%] + @ 100%
C1361
C1364 CFG: REF 1000 FIXED0INC Selection list 3 Input signal configuration See System
Manual
l Reference value (extension)
function block INT2
l Angle of rotation
signal, function block INT2
l HIGH = Sets the integrator to
0
C1367 DIS: REF −2000000000 {1 inc} 2000000000 Function block INT2 See System
Manual
C13564
C1368 DIS: IN −32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block INT2
C1365
C1369 DIS: RESET 0 1 Function block INT2
C1366
C1370 FOLL max 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit, function block See System
Manual
FOLL1 (extension)
l Upper limit of the ramp
function generator
C1371 FOLL min −100.00 −199.99 {0.01 %} 0.00 Lower limit, function block
FOLL1
l Lower limit of the ramp
function generator
C1372 FOLL Tir 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Acceleration time Tir and
deceleration time Tif of the ramp
C1373 FOLL Tif 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 function generator, function
block FOLL1
8.5−70 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Code table 8.5

Manual
signals, function block FOLL1 (extension)
1 CFG: SIGN 1000 FIXED0% l Negative value: signal
characteristic at FOLL1−OUT
is opposed to the one at
FOLL1−IN
l Positive value: signal
characteristic at FOLL1−OUT
is the same as at FOLL1−IN
2 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% If FOLL1−IN > FOLL1−REF, the
ramp function generator starts
3 CFG: REF 1000 FIXED0% Reference value
4 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0% Initial value for the ramp
function generator
signal, function block FOLL1
l HIGH: initial value at
FOLL1−LOAD is accepted
C1377 −199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block FOLL1 See System
Manual
1 DIS: SIGN l Display of the signals linked (extension)
in C1375
2 DIS: IN
3 DIS: REF
4 DIS: LOAD
C1378 DIS: SET 0 1 Function block FOLL1
C1376
C1583 fset high 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Alterations by Lenze service
only! 6.11−5
Adaptation of the motor
C0095 (with V/f characteristic
control: influence limit of the
boost correction; with vector
control: influence limit of the
field precontrol)
l The output frequency is set
up to which the motor
l C1583 = 100 % ¢ half the
C0089
C1751 0 {1} 65535 Inverter compensation
characteristic (WRK) 6.6−16
l During the motor parameter
1 0 identification, the
characteristic is calculated
... ... from the measured motor
stator resistance and saved in
17 0
C1751/1 ... C1751/17
C1753 0 Data are not o. k. Internal data are o. k.
l Motor data identification for
the inverter compensation
1 Data are o. k. characteristic has been
completed successfully
EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006 8.5−71

8 Configuration
8.5 Code table

C1754 0 Data are not o. k. Internal data are o. k.
l Motor data identification for
the motor leakage
1 Data are o. k. inductance has been
completed successfully
C1755 100 0 {1} 65535 Image of inverter compensation
characteristic (WRK) on the
maximum current range
8.5−72 EDSVF9383V EN 4.0−03/2006

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.6
Selection list 1: Analog output signals 8.6.1
8.6 Selection lists
8.6.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals

Parameter Analog output signal () Parameter Analog output signal ()
000050 AIN1−OUT 005700 ANEG1−OUT
000055 AIN2−OUT 005705 ANEG2−OUT
000100 DFSET−NOUT 005750 FIXSET1−OUT
001000 FIXED0% 005800 LIM1−OUT
001006 FIXED100% 005850 ABS1−OUT
001007 FIXED−100% 005900 PT1−1−OUT
005000 MCTRL−nset2 005905 PT1−2−OUT
005001 MCTRL−NACT 005950 DT1−1−OUT
005002 MCTRL−MSET2 006100 MFAIL−NOUT
005003 MCTRL−MACT 006150 DB1−OUT
005004 MCTRL−IACT 006200 CONV1−OUT
005005 MCTRL−DCVOLT 006205 CONV2−OUT
005006 MCTRL−VACT 006210 CONV3−OUT
005007 MCTRL−FACT 006215 CONV4−OUT
005008 MCTRL−IxT 006230 CONVPHA1−OUT
005009 MCTRL−PHI−ACT 006300 S&H1−OUT
005010 MCTRL−M−TEMP 006350 CURVE1−OUT
005015 MCTRL−BOOST 006400 FCNT1−OUT
005050 NSET−NOUT 010000 BRK1−M−SET
005051 NSET−RFG−I 011000 DCALC1−D−OUT
005052 NSET−C10−C11 011001 DCALC1−OUT
005100 MPOT1−OUT 011050 PCTRL2−OUT
005150 PCTRL1−OUT 011100 INT1−AOUT
005250 NLIM1−OUT 011105 INT2−AOUT
005500 ARIT1−OUT 011150 FOLL1−OUT
005505 ARIT2−OUT 015030 MCTRL−LOAD−I2XT
005510 ARIT3−OUT 019500 FCODE−17
005540 SQRT1−OUT 019502 FCODE−26/1
005550 ADD1−OUT 019503 FCODE−26/2
005555 ADD2−OUT 019504 FCODE−27/1
005600 RFG1−OUT 019505 FCODE−27/2
005610 SRFG1−OUT 019506 FCODE−32
005611 SRFG1−DIFF 019507 FCODE−37
005650 ASW1−OUT 019510 FCODE−108/1
005655 ASW2−OUT 019511 FCODE−108/2
005660 ASW3−OUT 019512 FCODE−109/1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.6−1

8 Configuration
8.6 Selection lists
8.6.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals
Parameter Analog output signal () Parameter Analog output signal ()
019513 FCODE−109/2 019552 FCODE−473/2
019515 FCODE−141 019553 FCODE−473/3
019521 FCODE−472/1 019554 FCODE−473/4
019522 FCODE−472/2 019555 FCODE−473/5
019523 FCODE−472/3 019556 FCODE−473/6
019524 FCODE−472/4 019557 FCODE−473/7
019525 FCODE−472/5 019558 FCODE−473/8
019526 FCODE−472/6 019559 FCODE−473/9
019527 FCODE−472/7 019560 FCODE−473/10
019528 FCODE−472/8 020101 CAN−IN1.W1
019529 FCODE−472/9 020102 CAN−IN1.W2
019530 FCODE−472/10 020103 CAN−IN1.W3
019531 FCODE−472/11 020201 CAN−IN2.W1
019532 FCODE−472/12 020202 CAN−IN2.W2
019533 FCODE−472/13 020203 CAN−IN2.W3
019534 FCODE−472/14 020204 CAN−IN2.W4
019535 FCODE−472/15 020301 CAN−IN3.W1
019536 FCODE−472/16 020302 CAN−IN3.W2
019537 FCODE−472/17 020303 CAN−IN3.W3
019538 FCODE−472/18 020304 CAN−IN3.W4
019539 FCODE−472/19 025101 AIF−IN.W1
019540 FCODE−472/20 025102 AIF−IN.W2
019551 FCODE−473/1 025103 AIF−IN.W3
8.6−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.6
Selection list 2: Digital output signals 8.6.2
8.6.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals

Parameter Digital output signal (,) Parameter Digital output signal (,)
000051 DIGIN1 010520 AND5−OUT
000052 DIGIN2 010550 OR1−OUT
000053 DIGIN3 010555 OR2−OUT
000054 DIGIN4 010560 OR3−OUT
000055 DIGIN5 010565 OR4−OUT
000056 DIGIN6(ST) 010570 OR5−OUT
000065 DIGIN−CINH 010600 NOT1−OUT
000100 DFSET−ACK 010605 NOT2−OUT
000500 DCTRL−RDY 010610 NOT3−OUT
000501 DCTRL−CINH 010615 NOT4−OUT
000502 DCTRL−INIT 010620 NOT5−OUT
000503 DCTRL−IMP 010650 CMP1−OUT
000504 DCTRL−NACT=0 010655 CMP2−OUT
000505 DCTRL−CW/CCW 010660 CMP3−OUT
001000 FIXED0 010665 CMP4−OUT
001001 FIXED1 010700 DIGDEL1−OUT
002000 DCTRL−PAR*1 010705 DIGDEL2−OUT
002001 DCTRL−PAR*2 010750 TRANS1−OUT
002002 DCTRL−PAR−BUSY 010755 TRANS2−OUT
005001 MCTRL−QSP−OUT 010900 FLIP1−OUT
005002 MCTRL−IMAX 010905 FLIP2−OUT
005003 MCTRL−MMAX 011000 DCALC1−DMAX
005006 MCTRL−GSB−OUT 011001 DCALC1−DMIN
005050 NSET−RFG−I=0 011002 DCALC1−I=0
006000 DFRFG1−FAIL 011003 DCALC1−OVFL
006001 DFRFG1−SYNC 011100 INT1−DOUT
006100 MFAIL−STATUS 011105 INT2−DOUT
006101 MFAIL−I−RESET 013000 FEVAN1−BUSY
006400 FCNT1−EQUAL 013001 FEVAN1−FAIL
010000 BRK1−OUT 015000 DCTRL−TRIP
010001 BRK1−CINH 015001 DCTRL−MESS
010002 BRK1−QSP 015002 DCTRL−WARN
010003 BRK1−M−STORE 015003 DCTRL−FAIL
010250 R/L/Q−QSP 015010 MONIT−LU
010251 R/L/Q−R/L 015011 MONIT−OU
010500 AND1−OUT 015012 MONIT−EEr
010505 AND2−OUT 015013 MONIT−OC1
010510 AND3−OUT 015014 MONIT−OC2
010515 AND4−OUT 015015 MONIT−LP1
015016 MONIT−OH
015017 MONIT−OH3
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.6−3

8 Configuration
8.6 Selection lists
8.6.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals
015018 MONIT−OH4 019545 FCODE−471.B24
015019 MONIT−OH7 019546 FCODE−471.B25
015020 MONIT−OH8 019547 FCODE−471.B26
015022 MONIT−SD3 019548 FCODE−471.B27
015026 MONIT−CE0 019549 FCODE−471.B28
015027 MONIT−NMAX 019550 FCODE−471.B29
015028 MONIT−OC5 019551 FCODE−471.B30
015029 MONIT−SD5 019552 FCODE−471.B31
015030 MONIT−SD6 019751 FCODE−135.B0
015032 MONIT−H07 019752 FCODE−135.B1
015033 MONIT−H10 019753 FCODE−135.B2
015034 MONIT−H11 019755 FCODE−135.B4
015040 MONIT−CE1 019756 FCODE−135.B5
015041 MONIT−CE2 019757 FCODE−135.B6
015042 MONIT−CE3 019758 FCODE−135.B7
015043 MONIT−CE4 019763 FCODE−135.B12
015044 MONIT−OC3 019764 FCODE−135.B13
015045 MONIT−ID1 019765 FCODE−135.B14
015046 MONIT−ID2 019766 FCODE−135.B15
015047 MONIT−OC6 020001 CAN−CTRL.B0
015048 MONIT−OC8 020002 CAN−CTRL.B1
019500 FCODE−250 020003 CAN−CTRL.B2
019521 FCODE−471.B0 020005 CAN−CTRL.B4
019522 FCODE−471.B1 020006 CAN−CTRL.B5
019523 FCODE−471.B2 020007 CAN−CTRL.B6
019524 FCODE−471.B3 020008 CAN−CTRL.B7
019525 FCODE−471.B4 020013 CAN−CTRL.B12
019526 FCODE−471.B5 020014 CAN−CTRL.B13
019527 FCODE−471.B6 020015 CAN−CTRL.B14
019528 FCODE−471.B7 020016 CAN−CTRL.B15
019529 FCODE−471.B8 020101 CAN−IN1.B0
019530 FCODE−471.B9 020102 CAN−IN1.B1
019531 FCODE−471.B10 020103 CAN−IN1.B2
019532 FCODE−471.B11 020104 CAN−IN1.B3
019533 FCODE−471.B12 020105 CAN−IN1.B4
019534 FCODE−471.B13 020106 CAN−IN1.B5
019535 FCODE−471.B14 020107 CAN−IN1.B6
019536 FCODE−471.B15 020108 CAN−IN1.B7
019537 FCODE−471.B16 020109 CAN−IN1.B8
019538 FCODE−471.B17 020110 CAN−IN1.B9
019539 FCODE−471.B18 020111 CAN−IN1.B10
019540 FCODE−471.B19 020112 CAN−IN1.B11
019541 FCODE−471.B20
019542 FCODE−471.B21
019543 FCODE−471.B22
019544 FCODE−471.B23
8.6−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.6
Selection list 2: Digital output signals 8.6.2
020113 CAN−IN1.B12 020223 CAN−IN2.B22
020114 CAN−IN1.B13 020224 CAN−IN2.B23
020115 CAN−IN1.B14 020225 CAN−IN2.B24
020116 CAN−IN1.B15 020226 CAN−IN2.B25
020117 CAN−IN1.B16 020227 CAN−IN2.B26
020118 CAN−IN1.B17 020228 CAN−IN2.B27
020119 CAN−IN1.B18 020229 CAN−IN2.B28
020120 CAN−IN1.B19 020230 CAN−IN2.B29
020121 CAN−IN1.B20 020231 CAN−IN2.B30
020122 CAN−IN1.B21 020232 CAN−IN2.B31
020123 CAN−IN1.B22 020301 CAN−IN3.B0
020124 CAN−IN1.B23 020302 CAN−IN3.B1
020125 CAN−IN1.B24 020303 CAN−IN3.B2
020126 CAN−IN1.B25 020304 CAN−IN3.B3
020127 CAN−IN1.B26 020305 CAN−IN3.B4
020128 CAN−IN1.B27 020306 CAN−IN3.B5
020129 CAN−IN1.B28 020307 CAN−IN3.B6
020130 CAN−IN1.B29 020308 CAN−IN3.B7
020131 CAN−IN1.B30 020309 CAN−IN3.B8
020132 CAN−IN1.B31 020310 CAN−IN3.B9
020201 CAN−IN2.B0 020311 CAN−IN3.B10
020202 CAN−IN2.B1 020312 CAN−IN3.B11
020203 CAN−IN2.B2 020313 CAN−IN3.B12
020204 CAN−IN2.B3 020314 CAN−IN3.B13
020205 CAN−IN2.B4 020315 CAN−IN3.B14
020206 CAN−IN2.B5 020316 CAN−IN3.B15
020207 CAN−IN2.B6 020317 CAN−IN3.B16
020208 CAN−IN2.B7 020318 CAN−IN3.B17
020209 CAN−IN2.B8 020319 CAN−IN3.B18
020210 CAN−IN2.B9 020320 CAN−IN3.B19
020211 CAN−IN2.B10 020321 CAN−IN3.B20
020212 CAN.IN2.B11 020322 CAN−IN3.B21
020213 CAN−IN2.B12 020323 CAN−IN3.B22
020214 CAN−IN2.B13 020324 CAN−IN3.B23
020215 CAN−IN2.B14 020325 CAN−IN3.B24
020216 CAN−IN2.B15 020326 CAN−IN3.B25
020217 CAN−IN2.B16 020327 CAN−IN3.B26
020218 CAN−IN2.B17 020328 CAN−IN3.B27
020219 CAN−IN2.B18 020329 CAN−IN3.B28
020220 CAN−IN2.B19 020330 CAN−IN3.B29
020221 CAN−IN2.B20 020331 CAN−IN3.B30
020222 CAN−IN2.B21 020332 CAN−IN3.B31
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.6−5

8 Configuration
8.6 Selection lists
8.6.3 Selection list 3: Angle signals
020400 CAN−SYNC−OUT 025111 AIF−IN.B10
025001 AIF−CTRL.B0 025112 AIF−IN.B11
025002 AIF−CTRL.B1 025113 AIF−IN.B12
025003 AIF−CTRL.B2 025114 AIF−IN.B13
025005 AIF−CTRL.B4 025115 AIF−IN.B14
025006 AIF−CTRL.B5 025116 AIF−IN.B15
025007 AIF−CTRL.B6 025117 AIF−IN.B16
025008 AIF−CTRL.B7 025118 AIF−IN.B17
025013 AIF−CTRL.B12 025119 AIF−IN.B18
025014 AIF−CTRL.B13 025120 AIF−IN.B19
025015 AIF−CTRL.B14 025121 AIF−IN.B20
025016 AIF−CTRL.B15 025122 AIF−IN.B21
025101 AIF−IN.B0 025123 AIF−IN.B22
025102 AIF−IN.B1 025124 AIF−IN.B23
025103 AIF−IN.B2 025125 AIF−IN.B24
025104 AIF−IN.B3 025126 AIF−IN.B25
025105 AIF−IN.B4 025127 AIF−IN.B26
025106 AIF−IN.B5 025128 AIF−IN.B27
025107 AIF−IN.B6 025129 AIF−IN.B28
025108 AIF−IN.B7 025130 AIF−IN.B29
025109 AIF−IN.B8 025131 AIF−IN.B30
025110 AIF−IN.B9 025132 AIF−IN.B31
8.6.3 Selection list 3: Angle signals

Parameter Phase signal (-) 020103 CAN−IN1.D1
000100 DFSET−PSET 020201 CAN−IN2.D1
001000 FIXED0INC 020301 CAN−IN3.D1
005000 MCTRL−PHI−ANG 025103 AIF−IN.D1
011100 INT1−POUT
011105 INT2−POUT
Parameter Phase signal (-)

019521 FCODE−474/1
019522 FCODE−474/2
8.6.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals

Parameter Speed signal (.) Parameter Speed signal (.)
000050 DFIN−OUT 005000 MCTRL−PHI−ACT
000100 DFSET−POUT 006000 DFRFG−OUT
000250 DFOUT−OUT 006220 CONV5−OUT
001000 FIXEDPHI−0 019521 FCODE−475/1
019522 FCODE−475/2
8.6−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.6
Selection list 5: Function blocks 8.6.5
8.6.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks

Parameter Function block Parameter Function block
000000 empty 006300 S&H1
000050 AIN1 006350 CURVE1
000055 AIN2 006400 FCNT1
000070 AOUT1 010000 BRK1
000075 AOUT2 010250 R/L/Q
000100 DFSET 010500 AND1
000200 DFIN 010505 AND2
000250 DFOUT 010510 AND3
005050 NSET 010515 AND4
005100 MPOT1 010520 AND5
005150 PCTRL1 010550 OR1
005250 NLIM1 010555 OR2
005500 ARIT1 010560 OR3
005505 ARIT2 010565 OR4
005510 ARIT3 010570 OR5
005540 SQRT1 010600 NOT1
005550 ADD1 010605 NOT2
005555 ADD2 010610 NOT3
005600 RFG1 010615 NOT4
005610 SRFG1 010620 NOT5
005650 ASW1 010650 CMP1
005655 ASW2 010655 CMP2
005660 ASW3 010660 CMP3
005700 ANEG1 010665 CMP4
005705 ANEG2 010700 DIGDEL1
005750 FIXSET1 010705 DIGDEL2
005800 LIM1 010750 TRANS1
005850 ABS1 010755 TRANS2
005900 PT1−1 010900 FLIP1
005905 PT1−2 010905 FLIP2
005950 DT1−1 011000 DCALC1
006000 DFRFG1 011050 PCTRL2
006100 MFAIL 011100 INT1
006150 DB1 011105 INT2
006200 CONV1 011150 FOLL1
006205 CONV2 013000 FEVAN1
006210 CONV3 013100 OSZ
006215 CONV4 015100 MLP1
006220 CONV5 020000 CAN−OUT
006230 CONVPHA1 025000 AIF−OUT
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.6−7

Configuration 8
Table of attributes 8.7
The attribute table describes the properties of the codes used. It enables you
to create your own communication programs for the controller.
How to read the table of attributes
Column Abbreviation Meaning

Code Cxxxx Name of the Lenze code
Index dec 24575 − Lenze code Index under which the Is only required for control via INTERBUS,
number parameter is addressed PROFIBUS DP or system bus (CAN)
The subindex of array variables
hex 5FFFh − Lenze code corresponds to the Lenze
number subcode number
Data DS E Data structure Single variable
(only one parameter element)
A Array variable
(several parameter elements)
DA xx Number of array elements
(subcodes)
DT B8 Data type 1 byte bit−coded
B16 2 bytes bit−coded
B32 4 bytes bit−coded
FIX32 32−bit value with sign;
decimal with four decimal places
I32 4 bytes with sign
U32 4 bytes without sign
VS ASCII string
Format VD LECOM format ASCII decimal format
VH (see also Operating Instructions ASCII hexadecimal format
of the bus module)
VS String format
VO Octet string format for data blocks
DL Data length in byte The column "Important" contains further
information
Access LCM−R/W Ra Access authorisation for LECOM Reading is always permitted
Wa Writing is always permitted
W Writing is restricted
Condition CINH Condition for writing Writing permitted only when controller is
inhibited
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−1

8 Configuration
Code Controller Index Data Access

EVF9321 EVF9335 dec hex DS DA DT Format DL LCM−R/W Condition
... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0002 s s 24573 5FFD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0003 s s 24572 5FFC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0004 s s 24571 5FFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0005 s s 24570 5FFA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0006 s s 24569 5FF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0009 s s 24566 5FF6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0016 s s 24559 5FsF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0017 s s 24558 5FEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0018 s s 24557 5FED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0019 s s 24556 5FEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0020 s s 24555 5FEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0021 s s 24554 5FEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0022 s s 24553 5FE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0025 s s 24550 5FE6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0026 s s 24549 5FE5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0027 s s 24548 5FE4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0032 s s 24543 5FDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0033 s s 24542 5FDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0034 s s 24541 5FDD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0036 s s 24539 5FDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0037 s s 24538 5FDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0038 s s 24537 5FD9 A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0039 s s 24536 5FD8 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0040 s s 24535 5FD7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0042 s s 24533 5FD5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0043 s s 24532 5FD4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0045 s s 24530 5FD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0046 s s 24529 5FD1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0049 s s 24526 5FCE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0050 s s 24525 5FCD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0051 s s 24524 5FCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0052 s s 24523 5FCB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0053 s s 24522 5FCA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0054 s s 24521 5FC9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0056 s s 24519 5FC7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0057 s s 24518 5FC6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0058 s s 24517 5FC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.7−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0059 s s 24516 5FC4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0061 s s 24514 5FC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0063 s s 24512 5FC0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0064 s s 24511 5FBF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0066 s 24509 5FBD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0067 s s 24508 5FBC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0070 s s 24505 5FB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0080 s s 24495 5FAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0081 s s 24494 5FAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0082 s s 24493 5FAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0084 s s 24491 5FAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0085 s s 24490 5FAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0086 s s 24489 5FA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0093 s s 24482 5FA2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0094 s s 24481 5FA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0096 s s 24479 5F9F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0099 s s 24476 5F9C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0101 s s 24474 5F9A A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0103 s s 24472 5F98 A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0104 s s 24471 5F97 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0105 s s 24470 5F96 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0107 s s 24478 5F94 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0108 s s 24467 5F93 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0109 s s 24466 5F92 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0114 s s 24461 5F8D A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0116 s s 24459 5F8B A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0117 s s 24458 5F8A A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0118 s s 24457 5F89 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0120 s 24455 5F87 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0121 s s 24454 5F86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0122 s s 24453 5F85 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−3

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0125 s s 24450 5F82 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0126 s s 24449 5F81 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0127 s 24448 5F80 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0128 s 24447 5F7F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0130 s s 24445 5F7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0132 s s 24443 5F7B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0133 s s 24442 5F7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0134 s s 24441 5F79 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0135 s s 24440 5F78 E 1 B16 VH 2
C0136 s s 24439 5F77 A 3 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0140 s 24435 5F73 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0141 s s 24434 5F72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0142 s s 24433 5F71 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0143 s s 24432 5F70 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0144 s s 24431 5F6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0145 s s 24430 5F6E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0146 s s 24429 5F6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0147 s s 24428 5F6C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0148 s s 24427 5F6B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0149 s s 24426 5F6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0150 s s 24425 5F69 E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0151 s s 24424 5F68 E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0155 s s 24420 5F64 E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0156 s s 24419 5F63 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0157 s s 24418 5F62 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0161 s s 24414 5F5E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0167 s s 24408 5F58 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0168 s s 24407 5F57 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0169 s s 24406 5F56 A 8 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0170 s s 24405 5F55 A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0173 s s 24402 5F52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0174 s 24401 5F51 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0178 s s 24397 5F4D E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0179 s s 24396 5F4C E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0182 s s 24393 5F49 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0183 s s 24392 5F48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0190 s s 24385 5F41 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0195 s s 24380 5F3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0196 s s 24379 5F3B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0200 s s 24375 5F37 E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0201 s s 24374 5F36 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0202 s s 24373 5F35 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0203 s s 24372 5F34 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0204 s s 24371 5F33 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0206 s s 24369 5F31 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
8.7−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0207 s s 24368 5F30 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0208 s s 24367 5F2F E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0209 s s 24366 5F2E E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0220 s s 24355 5F23 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0221 s s 24354 5F22 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0222 s s 24353 5F21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0223 s s 24352 5F20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0224 s s 24351 5F1F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0234 s s 24341 5F15 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0235 s s 24340 5F14 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0236 s s 24339 5F13 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0241 s s 24334 5F0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0244 s s 24331 5F0B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0250 s s 24325 5F05 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0252 s s 24323 5F03 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0253 s s 24322 5F02 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0260 s s 24315 5EFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0261 s s 24314 5EFA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0262 s s 24313 5EF9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0267 s s 24308 5EF4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0268 s s 24307 5EF3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0269 s s 24306 5EF2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0325 s s 24250 5EBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0326 s s 24249 5EB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0336 s s 24239 5EAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0337 s s 24238 5EAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0338 s s 24237 5EAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0339 s s 24236 5EAC A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0340 s s 24235 5EAB A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0350 s s 24225 5EA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0351 s s 24224 5EA0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0352 s s 24223 5E9F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0353 s s 24222 5E9E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0354 s s 24221 5E9D A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0355 s s 24220 5E9C A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0356 s s 24219 5E9B A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0357 s s 24218 5E9A A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−5

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0358 s s 24217 5E99 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0359 s s 24216 5E98 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0360 s s 24215 5E97 A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0361 s s 24214 5E96 A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0364 s s 24211 5E93 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0365 s s 24210 5E92 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0366 s s 24209 5E91 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0367 s s 24208 5E90 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0368 s s 24207 5E8F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0369 s s 24206 5E8E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0400 s s 24175 5E6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0402 s s 24173 5E6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0403 s s 24172 5E6C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0404 s s 24171 5E6B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0405 s s 24170 5E6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0409 s s 24166 5E66 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0420 s s 24155 5E5B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0421 s s 24154 5E5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0425 s s 24150 5E56 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0426 s s 24149 5E55 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0427 s s 24148 5E54 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0429 s s 24146 5E52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0432 s s 24143 5E4F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0433 s s 24142 5E4E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0434 s s 24141 5E4D A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0439 s s 24136 5E48 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0443 s s 24132 5E44 E 1 B8 VH 1 Ra
C0444 s s 24131 5E43 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0450 s s 24125 5E3D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0451 s s 24124 5E3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0458 s s 24117 5E35 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0459 s s 24116 5E34 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0464 s s 24111 5E2F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0465 s s 24110 5E2E A 50 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0466 s s 24109 5E2D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0470 s s 24105 5E29 A 4 B8 VH 1 Ra/Wa
C0471 s s 24104 5E28 E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
8.7−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0472 s s 24103 5E27 A 20 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0473 s s 24102 5E26 A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0474 s s 24101 5E25 A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0475 s s 24100 5E24 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0497 s s 24078 5E0E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0511 s s 24064 5E00 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0517 s s 24058 5DFA A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0520 s s 24055 5DF7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0528 s s 24047 5DEF A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0529 s s 24046 5DEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0530 s s 24045 5DED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0531 s s 24044 5DEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0532 s s 24043 5DEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0533 s s 24042 5DEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0534 s s 24041 5DE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0535 s s 24040 5DE8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0536 s s 24039 5DE7 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0537 s s 24038 5DE6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0538 s s 24037 5DE5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0539 s s 24036 5DE4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0540 s s 24035 5DE3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0544 s s 24031 5DDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0545 s s 24030 5DDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0546 s s 24029 5DDD E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0547 s s 24028 5DDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0548 s s 24027 5DDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0549 s s 24026 5DDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0560 s s 24015 5DCF A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0561 s s 24014 5DCE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0562 s s 24013 5DCD A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0563 s s 24012 5DCC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0564 s s 24011 5DCB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0570 s s 24005 5DC5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0571 s s 24004 5DC4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0572 s s 24003 5DC3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−7

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0573 s s 24002 5DC2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0574 s 24001 5DC1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0581 s s 23994 5DBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0582 s s 23993 5DB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0592 s s 23983 5DAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0593 s s 23982 5DAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0594 s s 23981 5DAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0595 s s 23980 5DAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0596 s s 23979 5DAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0597 s s 23978 5DAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0598 s s 23977 5DA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0601 s s 23974 5DA6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0602 s s 23973 5DA5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0604 s s 23971 5DA3 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0605 s s 23970 5DA2 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0606 s 23969 5DA1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0608 s s 23967 5D9F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0609 s s 23966 5D9E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0610 s s 23965 5D9D A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0611 s s 23964 5D9C A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0612 s s 23963 5D9B A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0613 s s 23962 5D9A A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0620 s s 23955 5D93 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0621 s s 23954 5D92 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0622 s s 23953 5D91 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0623 s s 23952 5D90 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0630 s s 23945 5D89 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0631 s s 23944 5D88 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0633 s s 23942 5D86 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0640 s s 23935 5D7F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0641 s s 23934 5D7E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0642 s s 23933 5D7D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0643 s s 23932 5D7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0644 s s 23931 5D7B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0645 s s 23930 5D7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.7−8 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0650 s s 23925 5D75 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0651 s s 23924 5D74 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0653 s s 23922 5D72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0654 s s 23921 5D71 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0655 s s 23920 5D70 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0658 s s 23917 5D6D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0661 s s 23914 5D6A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0662 s s 23913 5D69 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0671 s s 23904 5D60 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0674 s s 23901 5D5D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0675 s s 23900 5D5C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0676 s s 23899 5D5B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0677 s s 23898 5D5A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0680 s s 23895 5D57 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0681 s s 23894 5D56 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0682 s s 23893 5D55 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0683 s s 23892 5D54 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0684 s s 23891 5D53 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0685 s s 23890 5D52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0686 s s 23889 5D51 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0687 s s 23888 5D50 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0688 s s 23887 5D4F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0689 s s 23886 5D4E A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0690 s s 23885 5D4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0692 s s 23883 5D4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0693 s s 23882 5D4A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0694 s s 23881 5D49 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0701 s s 23874 5D42 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0704 s s 23871 5D3F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0705 s s 23870 5D3E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0708 s s 23867 5D3B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0709 s s 23866 5D3A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0710 s s 23865 5D39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0711 s s 23864 5D38 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−9

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0714 s s 23861 5D35 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0715 s s 23860 5D34 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0716 s s 23859 5D33 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0719 s s 23856 5D30 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0723 s s 23852 5D2C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0724 s s 23851 5D2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0725 s s 23850 5D2A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0726 s s 23849 5D29 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0729 s s 23846 5D26 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0730 s s 23845 5D25 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0731 s s 23844 5D24 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0732 s s 23843 5D23 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0734 s s 23841 5D21 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0735 s s 23840 5D20 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0740 s s 23835 5D1B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0741 s s 23834 5D1A A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0742 s s 23833 5D19 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0743 s s 23832 5D18 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0744 s s 23831 5D17 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0749 s s 23826 5D12 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0750 s s 23825 5D11 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0751 s s 23824 5D10 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0754 s s 23821 5D0D E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0756 s s 23819 5D0B E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0757 s s 23818 5D0A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0764 s s 23811 5D03 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0765 s s 23810 5D02 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0770 s s 23805 5CFD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0771 s s 23804 5CFC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.7−10 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0772 s s 23803 5CFB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0773 s s 23802 5CFA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0775 s s 23800 5CF8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0778 s s 23797 5CF5 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0784 s s 23791 5CEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0785 s s 23790 5CEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0786 s s 23789 5CED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0787 s s 23788 5CEC A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0788 s s 23787 5CEB A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0789 s s 23786 5CEA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0790 s s 23785 5CE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0798 s s 23777 5CE1 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0799 s s 23776 5CE0 A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0800 s s 23775 5CDF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0801 s s 23774 5CDE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0802 s s 23773 5CDD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0803 s s 23772 5CDC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0804 s s 23771 5CDB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0805 s s 23770 5CDA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0808 s s 23767 5CD7 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0809 s s 23766 5CD6 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0810 s s 23765 5CD5 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0811 s s 23764 5CD4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0812 s s 23763 5CD3 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0813 s s 23762 5CD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0815 s s 23760 5CD0 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0816 s s 23759 5CCF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0817 s s 23758 5CCE A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0818 s s 23757 5CCD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0820 s s 23755 5CCB A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0821 s s 23754 5CCA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0822 s s 23753 5CC9 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0823 s s 23752 5CC8 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0825 s s 23750 5CC6 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0827 s s 23748 5CC4 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0829 s s 23746 5CC2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−11

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0831 s s 23744 5CC0 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0832 s s 23743 5CBF A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0833 s s 23742 5CBE A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0834 s s 23741 5CBD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0835 s s 23740 5CBC A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0836 s s 23739 5CBB A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0837 s s 23738 5CBA A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0838 s s 23737 5CB9 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0839 s s 23736 5CB8 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0840 s s 23735 5CB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0841 s s 23734 5CB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0843 s s 23732 5CB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0845 s s 23730 5CB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0847 s s 23728 5CB0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0848 s s 23727 5CAF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0849 s s 23726 5CAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0850 s s 23725 5CAD A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0851 s s 23724 5CAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0852 s s 23723 5CAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0853 s s 23722 5CAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0855 s s 23720 5CA8 A 2 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0856 s s 23719 5CA7 A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0857 s s 23718 5CA6 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0858 s s 23717 5CA5 A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0859 s s 23716 5CA4 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0860 s s 23715 5CA3 A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0861 s s 23714 5CA2 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0863 s s 23712 5CA0 A 6 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0864 s s 23711 5C9F A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0865 s s 23710 5C9E A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0866 s s 23709 5C9D A 11 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0867 s s 23708 5C9C A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0868 s s 23707 5C9B A 11 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0869 s s 23706 5C9A A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0870 s s 23705 5C99 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0871 s s 23704 5C98 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0878 s s 23697 5C91 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0879 s s 23696 5C90 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0880 s s 23695 5C8F A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0881 s s 23694 5C8E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.7−12 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0884 s s 23691 5C8B A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0885 s s 23690 5C8A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0889 s s 23686 5C86 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0899 s s 23676 5C7C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0900 s s 23675 5C7B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0901 s s 23674 5C7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0905 s s 23670 5C76 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0906 s s 23669 5C75 A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0907 s s 23668 5C74 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0909 s s 23666 5C72 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0911 s s 23664 5C70 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0912 s s 23663 5C6F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0913 s 23662 5C6E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0940 s s 23635 5C53 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0941 s s 23634 5C52 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0943 s s 23632 5C50 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0945 s s 23630 5C4E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0946 s s 23629 5C4D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0947 s s 23628 5C4C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0948 s s 23627 5C4B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0950 s s 23625 5C49 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0951 s s 23624 5C48 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0953 s s 23622 5C46 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0955 s s 23620 5C44 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0956 s s 23619 5C43 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0958 s s 23617 5C41 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0960 s s 23615 5C3F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0961 s s 23614 5C3E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0962 s s 23613 5C3D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0963 s s 23612 5C3C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0964 s s 23611 5C3B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0965 s s 23610 5C3A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0966 s s 23609 5C39 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−13

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0968 s s 23607 5C37 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0976 s s 23599 5C2F E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0977 s s 23598 5C2E E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0978 s s 23597 5C2D E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0980 s s 23595 5C2B E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0981 s s 23594 5C2A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0982 s s 23593 5C29 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0983 s s 23592 5C28 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0988 s s 23587 5C23 A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0989 s s 23586 5C22 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1000 s s 23575 5C17 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1002 s s 23573 5C15 E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1040 s s 23535 5BEF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1041 s s 23534 5BEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1042 s s 23533 5BED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1043 s s 23532 5BEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1044 s s 23531 5BEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1045 s s 23530 5BEA A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1046 s s 23529 5BE9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1090 s s 23485 5BBD E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1091 s s 23484 5BBC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1092 s s 23483 5BBB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1093 s s 23482 5BBA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1094 s s 23481 5BB9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1096 s s 23479 5BB7 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1097 s s 23478 5BB6 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1098 s s 23477 5BB5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1099 s s 23476 5BB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1101 s s 23474 5BB2 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1102 s s 23473 5BB1 A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1103 s s 23472 5BB0 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1104 s s 23471 5BAF A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1160 s s 23418 5B7A E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1161 s s 23417 5B79 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1162 s s 23416 5B78 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.7−14 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C1163 s s 23415 5B77 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1190 s s 23388 5B5C E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1191 s s 23387 5B5B A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1192 s s 23386 5B5A A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1300 s s 23278 5AEE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1301 s s 23277 5AED E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1302 s s 23276 5AEC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1303 s s 23275 5AEB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1304 s s 23274 5AEA E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C1305 s s 23273 5AE9 E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C1306 s s 23272 5AE8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1320 s s 23258 5ADA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1321 s s 23257 5AD9 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1322 s s 23256 5AD8 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1325 s s 23253 5AD5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1326 s s 23252 5AD4 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1327 s s 23251 5AD3 A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1328 s s 23250 5AD2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1330 s s 23248 5AD0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1331 s s 23247 5ACF E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1332 s s 23246 5ACE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1333 s s 23245 5ACD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1334 s s 23244 5ACC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1335 s s 23243 5ACB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1336 s s 23242 5ACA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1337 s s 23241 5AC9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1340 s s 23238 5AC6 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1341 s s 23237 5AC5 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1344 s s 23234 5AC2 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1345 s s 23233 5AC1 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1350 s s 23228 5ABC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1351 s s 23227 5ABB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1354 s s 23224 5AB8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1357 s s 23221 5AB5 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1358 s s 23220 5AB4 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1359 s s 23219 5AB3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1360 s s 23218 5AB2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1361 s s 23217 5AB1 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 8.7−15

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C1364 s s 23214 5AAE E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1365 s s 23213 5AAD E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1366 s s 23212 5AAC E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1367 s s 23211 5AAB E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1368 s s 23210 5AAA E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1369 s s 23209 5AA9 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1370 s s 23208 5AA8 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1375 s s 23203 5AA3 E 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1376 s s 23202 5AA2 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1377 s s 23201 5AA1 A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1378 s s 23200 5AA0 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1583 s s 22995 59D3 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1751 s s 22827 592B A 17 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1753 s s 22825 5929 E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.7−16 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Troubleshooting and fault elimination 9

Contents
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination
Contents
9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−1

9.1.1 Display of operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−1
9.1.2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1−2
9.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.1 Status display via LEDs at the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2−1
9.3 Drive behaviour in the event of faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3−1
9.4 Fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−1
9.4.1 Drive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−1
9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−2
9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus
(OU message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4−3
9.5 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5−1
9.5.1 General error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5−1
9.5.2 Resetting system error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5−5
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9−1


Display of operating data, diagnostics 9.1
Display of operating data 9.1.1
9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics
9.1.1 Display of operating data
Description Important operating parameters are measured by the controller. They can
be displayed with the keypad or PC.
Some operating data can be calibrated to be displayed or selected directly
with the unit of the process quantity (e.g. pressure, temperature, speed).
Note!
The calibration always affects all specified codes simultaneously.

MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−VACT = 100 % = C0090 8.2−40
MCTRL 8.2−25
l Read only
l MCTRL−DCVOLT = 100 % = 8.2−40
1000 V
l Read only
l MCTRL−IACT = 100 % = C0022 8.2−40
C0061 Heatsink temp 0 {1 °C} 100 Heatsink temperature See System
Manual
l Read only (extension)
l If the temperature of the
heatsink > 85 °C, the controller
sets TRIP OH
l Early warning is possible via
C0122
activated.
C0121
warning OH8
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.1−1


9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics
9.1.2 Diagnostics

warning OC5
in C0022
C0150 Status word Bit00 — Bit08 Status code Read only See System
Manual
Bit01 IMP Bit09 Status code Decimal status word for (extension)
networking via automation
Bit02 — Bit10 Status code interface (AIF)
Bit03 — Bit11 Status code l Binary interpretation indicates
Bit04 — Bit12 Warning the bit states
Bit05 — Bit13 Message
Bit06 n=0 Bit14 —
9.1.2 Diagnostics
Description Display codes for diagnostics

l Read only
... ...
20 9383VC 400V
21 9334VC 500V
... ...
28 9383VC 500V
9321 9321 VC
... ...
9333 9333VC
C0099 S/W version x.y Software version
x Main version l Read only
y Subversion
9.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Troubleshooting 9.2
Status display via LEDs at the controller 9.2.1
9.2 Troubleshooting
Detecting breakdowns A breakdown can be detected quickly via the LEDs at the controller or via the
status information at the keypad.
Analysing errors Analyse the error using the history buffer. The list of fault messages gives
you advice how to remove the fault. ( 9.5−1)
9.2.1 Status display via LEDs at the controller
During operation the operating status of the controller is shown by 2 LEDs.

LED Operating status
Red Green
Off On Controller is enabled
On On Mains is switched on and automatic
start is inhibited
Off Blinking Controller is inhibited
slowly
Off On Motor data identification is being
performed
Blinking Off Undervoltage
quickly
Blinking Off Active fault
slowly
9.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer
Retracing faults Faults can be retraced via the history buffer. Fault messages are stored in the
8 memory locations in the order of their appearance.
The memory locations can be retrieved via codes.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.2−1


9.2 Troubleshooting
9.2.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer
Structure of the history buffer
Code Memory location Entry Note

C0168/1 C0169/1 C0170/1 Memory location 1 Active fault If the fault is no longer pending or has been
C0168/2 C0169/2 C0170/2 Memory location 2 Last fault acknowledged:
l The contents of the memory locations
C0168/3 C0169/3 C0170/3 Memory location 3 Last but one fault 1 ... 7 are shifted "up" to the next memory
C0168/4 C0169/4 C0170/4 Memory location 4 Last but two fault location.
l The content of memory location 8 is
C0168/5 C0169/5 C0170/5 Memory location 5 Last but three fault
deleted from the history buffer and cannot
C0168/6 C0169/6 C0170/6 Memory location 6 Last but four fault be retrieved anymore.
C0168/7 C0169/7 C0170/7 Memory location 7 Last but five fault l Memory location 1 is deleted (= no active
fault).
C0168/8 C0169/8 C0170/8 Memory location 8 Last but six fault
Explanations regarding the codes

C0168 Fault indication and response
l The entry is effected as a LECOM error number
l If several faults with different responses occur at the same time:
– Only the fault with the highest priority response is entered (1. TRIP,
2. message, 3. warning).
l If several faults with the same response (e.g. 2 messages) occur at the
same time:
– Only the fault which occurred first is entered.
C0169 Time of fault occurence
l The reference time is provided by the power−on time meter (C0179).
l If the same fault occurs several times in succession, only the time of the
last occurrence is stored.
C0170 Fault frequency
l Only the time of the last occurrence is stored.
Clear history buffer Set C0167=1 to clear the history buffer.
9.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Drive behaviour in the event of faults 9.3
9.3 Drive behaviour in the event of faults
The controller responds differently to the three possible fault types TRIP,
message, or warning:
TRIP TRIP (display in keypad XT: &)

ƒ Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high−resistance state until
TRIP reset is executed.
ƒ The fault indication is entered into the history buffer as "current fault"
in C0168/1.
ƒ The drive coasts without any control!
ƒ After TRIP reset ( 9.5−5):
– The drive travels along the ramps to its setpoint.
– The fault indication is moved to C0168/2 as "last fault".
Messages Message (display in keypad XT: &)
ƒ Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high−resistance state.
in C0168/1.
ƒ In case of a fault £5 s:
– The drive coasts without any control as long as the message is active!
– If the message is not active anymore, the drive travels to its setpoint
with maximum torque.
ƒ In case of a fault > 5 s:
– The drive coasts without any control as long as the message is active!
– If the message is not active anymore, the drive travels to its setpoint
along the adjusted ramps.
ƒ If the message is not active anymore, the fault indication is moved to
C0168/2 as "last fault".
Warnings "Heatsink overtemperature" (keypad XT:OH &)
ƒ The drive continues to travel in a controlled way!
ƒ The warning signal goes off when the fault is not active anymore.
"Error in motor phase" (keypad XT:LP1)
"PTC monitoring" (keypad XT:OH51)
ƒ The drive continues to travel in a controlled way!
in C0168/1.
ƒ After TRIP reset, the fault indication is moved to C0168/2 as "last
fault".
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.3−1


Fault elimination 9.4
Drive errors 9.4.1
9.4 Fault elimination
9.4.1 Drive errors
Malfunction Cause Remedy

An asynchronous motor The motor phases are reversed so that the rotating field l Check motor cable for correct phase
with feedback rotates in an of the motor is not identical with the rotating field of relation.
uncontrolled manner and the feedback system. The drive shows the following l If possible, operate the motor with
with low speed behaviour: deactivated feedback (C0025 = 1) and
l V/f characteristic control (C0006 = 5) check the direction of rotation of the
– The motor rotates faster than the speed setpoint motor.
by the value set in C0074 (influence of the speed
controller, Lenze setting 10 % of nmax). After the
controller is enabled, it does not stop at zero speed
setpoint or quick stop (QSP).
– The final motor current depends, among other
things, on the set value of the Vmin boost (C0016)
and can rise to Imax (C0022). This may activate the
fault message OC5.
l Vector control (C0006 = 1)
– The motor rotates slowly with maximum slip
speed (depending on motor data and maximum
current) and does not react to a speed setpoint. The
direction of rotation, however, is determined by
the sign of the speed setpoint.
– The motor current rises up to Imax (C0022). This
may activate the fault message OC5 with a time
delay.
Motor does not rotate The two terminal strips X5 are reversed. Since X5/A1 and Check the position of the terminal strips:
although the controller is X5/28 face each other, the controller can be enabled if l If you look at the connection unit in
enabled ( is off) and a the control terminals are internally supplied. All other reading direction, the left terminal
speed setpoint has been connections, however, are assigned incorrectly so that strip X5 must be connected with the
specified. the motor cannot start. input signals and the right terminal
strip X5 must be connected with the
output signals.
The monitoring of the The function block MLP1 is not entered into the Enter the function block MLP1 into the
motor phases (LP1) does processing table. processing table. The function block MLP1
not respond if a motor requires 30 ms of calculating time.
phase is interrupted,
although C0597 = 0 or 2
If during high speeds During DC−injection braking the controller sets pulse Prolong the duration of the pulse inhibit:
DC−injection braking (GSB) inhibit for a short time (DCTRL−IMP) to reduce the l Connect the output signal DCTRL−IMP
is activated, the fault OC1 magnetisation in the motor before a DC voltage is to the function block TRANSx and
(TRIP) or OU (TRIP) occurs injected into the motor. At high speeds (e. g. in case of adjust the desired switch−off time
mid−frequency motors) the residual voltage which there (usually 500 ms). If
develops from the residual magnetism and high speed DCTRL−CINH1 is set to HIGH, the
can generate such a high motor current that OC1 or OU duration of the pulse inhibit is
are activated. prolonged by the time adjusted.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.4−1


9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation
9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation
The clamp operation is a permissible operating mode. But since, however,

pulse inhibit is set again and again, the controller cannot provide the
optimum power.
If the output power is optimal, the output current mainly is right below the
clamp threshold.
9300vec110
Fig. 9.4−1 Output current when starting a motor with high load (shown with the
oscilloscope in GDC)
Clamp threshold
Output current
Function
1. When the output current reaches 2.25 × Ir, a software clamp is
activated.
2. The controller sets pulse inhibit for a short time. The motor current
decreases as a function of the inductance in the motor circuit.
– An internal counter is increased by the value one.
3. After max. 250 ms the pulse inhibit is deactivated.
4. If a software clamp reoccurs within 2 s, the internal counter is again
increased by the value one. Otherwise the counter is set to zero.
– If the counter reaches the value 4300, OC3 (TRIP) is activated.
9.4−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Fault elimination 9.4
Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message) 9.4.3
9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message)
Description If the DC−bus voltage (UDC) exceeds the switch−off threshold OU, pulse
inhibit will be set. At the same time, an internal timer for a delay time
(C0912) will be started.
Pulse inhibit will be reset, if the voltage falls below the switch−on threshold
OU and the delay time has elapsed.
Thresholds for DC−bus Types EVF93xx−EVV210, EVF93xx−EVV240, EVF93xx−EVV270 and EVF93xx−EVV300

overvoltage (OU)
Mains voltage range C0173 Switch−off threshold Switch−on threshold
OU OU
< 400 V Operation with or 0 770 V 755 V
without brake
transistor
400 V Operation with or 1* 770 V 755 V
without brake
transistor
460 V Operation with or 2 770 V 755 V
without brake
transistor
480 V Brake transistor 3 770 V 755 V
480 V Brake transistor 4 800 V 785 V
500 V Operation with or 5 900 V 885 V
without brake
transistor
* Lenze setting
Types EVF93xx−EV, EVF93xx−EVV060 and EVF93xx−EVV110

Mains voltage range C0173 Switch−off threshold Switch−on threshold
OU OU
400 V Operation with or Read only 700 V 685 V
without brake
transistor

C0912 OV delay time à − {1 ms} − Delay time of the pulse enable
after an OU message 8.2−25
à Depending on C0082, C0086,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, 8.2−40
C0091, C0092
A change of one of the codes 9.4−3
resets C0912 to the time of the
selected motor
l The time is derived from the
double rotor time constant
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.4−3


9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message)
Adjustment UDC 0 1

t < C0912
t ³ C0912 t = C0912
IMP
9300vec142
Fig. 9.4−2 Influence of the delay time (C0912)

Switch−off threshold OU
Switch−on threshold OU
The period of time between exceeding the switch−off threshold OU and
undershooting the switch−on threshold OU equals or is higher than the
delay time set in C0912.
After undershooting the switch−on threshold OU, the pulse inhibit is
deactivated.
The period of time between exceeding the switch−off threshold OU and
undershooting the switch−on threshold OU is lower than the delay time set
in C0912.
The pulse inhibit is deactivated after the delay time in C0912 has elapsed.
ƒ The delay time in [ms] is set under C0912. The Lenze setting can be
changed by the factor 0.5 ... 2.
9.4−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


System error messages 9.5
General error messages 9.5.1
9.5 System error messages
9.5.1 General error messages
Note!
If the system error is retrieved via the system bus (CAN), the error
messages are displayed as numbers (see column "Error message
˘ No." of the below table).
Fault message Description Cause Remedy

No. Display
−−− −−− No fault − −
0011 OC1 Overcurrent in motor cable In the event of a short circuit. l Search for the cause of the
(Ia > 2.25 x IN; Hardware short circuit.
monitoring) l Check the motor cable.
Capacitive charging current of the Use motor cable which is shorter
motor cable is too high. or of lower capacitance.
Too short acceleration or l Increase the gain (P
deceleration times in proportion component) of the Imax
to the load (C0012, C0013, controller (C0075).
C0105). l Reduce integral−action time
(integral action component) of
the Imax controller (C0076).
l Encoder error Check wiring of the encoder.
l Tracks during encoder
feedback of the motor speed
are interchanged.
DC−injection braking at high l See 9.4−1
speeds.
Missing mains phase. l Check the connections and the
supply cable of the device.
l Check mains voltage.
0012 OC2 Motor cable earth fault One of the motor phases has l Search for cause of short
earth contact. circuit.
l Check motor cable.
0013 OC3 Overload during acceleration. Too short acceleration or l Increase the gain (P
deceleration times in proportion component) of the current
to the load (C0012, C0013, controller (C0075).
C0105). l Reduce the reset time (integral
action component) of the Imax
controller (C0076).
l Increase ramp times.
l 9.4−2, "controller in clamp
operation (fault OC3)"
0015 OC5 I x t overload l Frequent and too long Check drive dimensioning.
acceleration with overcurrent
l Continuous overload with
Imotor > 1.05 x Irx.
2020 OU Overvoltage in the DC bus Braking energy is too high. l Use a braking unit or
(DC−bus voltage is higher than set regenerative module.
in C0173.) l Check dimensioning of the
brake resistor.
1030 LU Undervoltage in the DC bus DC bus voltage is lower than l Check mains voltage
specified in C0173. l Check supply cable
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.5−1



No. Display
x032 LP1 Motor phase failure A current−carrying motor phase l Check motor.
has failed. l Check motor cable.
l Switch off monitoring
(C0597 = 3).
The current limit value is set too l Set higher current limit value
low. via C0599.
0050 OH Heatsink temperature > +90 °C Ambient temperature l Allow module to cool and
Tu > +40 °C or > +50 °C ensure better ventilation.
l Check ambient temperature in
the control cabinet.
Heatsink is very dirty. Clean heatsink.
Wrong mounting position Change mounting position.
x053 OH3 Motor temperature Motor is thermally overloaded l Check drive dimensioning.
> +150 °C threshold due to: l Switch off monitoring
(temperature detection via l Impermissible continuous (C0583 = 3).
resolver or incremental value current
encoder) l Frequent or too long
acceleration processes
No PTC/temperature contact Correct wiring.
connected.
x054 OH4 Heatsink temperature > C0122 Ambient temperature Tu > +40 °C l Allow module to cool and
or > +50 °C ensure better ventilation.
l Check ambient temperature in
the control cabinet.
(C0582 = 3).
Heatsink is very dirty. Clean heatsink
Wrong mounting position Change mounting position.
The value specified under C0122 Enter a higher value under C0122.
is set too low.
x057 OH7 Motor temperature > C0121 Motor is thermally overloaded l Check drive dimensioning.
(temperature detection via due to: l Switch off monitoring
resolver or incremental value l Impermissible continuous (C0584 = 3).
encoder) current
l Frequent or too long
No PTC/temperature contact Correct wiring.
connected.
The value specified under C0121 Enter a higher value in C0121.
is set too low.
x058 OH8 Motor temperature via inputs T1 Motor is thermally overloaded l Check drive dimensioning.
and T2 is too high. due to: l Switch off monitoring
l Impermissible continuous (C0585 = 3).
current
l Frequent or too long
Terminals T1 and T2 are not Connect PTC/temperature
connected contact.
x061 CE0 Automation interface (AIF) Faulty transfer of control l Plug in the communication
communication error commands via AIF. module/keypad XT firmly,
screw down, if necessary.
(C0126 = 3).
9.5−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


General error messages 9.5.1

No. Display
x062 CE1 Communication error on the CAN1_IN object receives faulty l Check wiring at X4.
process data input object data or communication is l Check sender.
CAN1_IN interrupted. l Increase monitoring time
under C0357/1, if necessary.
(C0591 = 3).
(C0592 = 3).
(C0593 = 3).
x065 CE4 BUS−OFF state of system bus The controller has received too l Check wiring at X4: Is the bus
(CAN) many faulty telegrams via the correctly terminated?
system bus (CAN) and has l Check shield connection of the
disconnected from the bus. cables.
l Check PE connection.
l Check bus load, reduce the
baud rate if necessary.
(Observe the cable length!)
l Switch off the monitoring
(C0595 = 3).
0071 CCr System failure Strong interference injection on Screen control cables
the control cables
Ground or earth loops in the l Check wiring
wiring l Check PE connection
After troubleshooting: Deenergise
the device completely (disconnect
24 V supply, discharge DC bus)!
0072 PR1 Checksum error in parameter l Fault when loading a l Set the required parameters
set 1 parameter set. and store them under C0003 =
CAUTION: The Lenze setting is l Interruption while 1.
loaded automatically! transmitting the parameter set l As to PLC devices, check the
via keypad. use of pointers.
The stored parameters are Store the parameter set under
incompatible with the loaded C0003 = 1 first to allow for a
software version. faults reset.
0073 PR2 Checksum error in parameter l Fault while loading a l Set the required parameters
set 2 parameter set. and save them with C0003 = 2.
PLEASE NOTE: The Lenze setting is l Interruption during the
loaded automatically! transfer of the parameter set
via keypad.
The parameters saved do not In order to be able to
comply with the software version acknowledge the error, first save
loaded. the parameter set with C0003 = 2.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.5−3



No. Display
0074 PEr Program error Error in the program flow Send the parameter set (on floppy
disk/CD−ROM) with a detailed
description of the problem to
Lenze.
0075 PR0 Error in parameter set. The operating system software Storage of the Lenze setting
has been updated. C0003 = 1.
via keypad.
via keypad.
0079 PI Fault during parameter l An error has been detected l Correct parameter set.
initialisation during the parameter set l Send parameter set (on floppy
transfer between two devices. disk/CD−ROM) and a detailed
l The parameter set does not description of the problem to
match the controller, e.g. if Lenze.
data has been transferred from
a higher−power controller to a
lower−power controller.
x083 Sd3 Encoder error at X9 Cable interrupted. Check cable for open circuit.
Pin X9/8 not connected. Apply 5 V to pin X9/8 or switch off
monitoring (C0587 = 3).
x085 Sd5 Encoder error at X6/1 and X6/2 Current signal at X6/1 X6/2 < l Check cable for open circuit.
(C0034 = 1) 2mA. l Check current signal encoder.
(C0598 = 3).
x086 Sd6 Motor temperature sensor error Encoder for detecting the motor l Check cable for firm
(X7 or X8) temperature at X7 or X8 indicates connection.
undefined values. l Switch off the monitoring
(C0594 = 3).
x091 EEr External monitoring has been A digital signal assigned to the l Check external encoder.
triggered via DCTRL. TRIP−SET function has been l Switch off the monitoring
activated. (C0581 = 3).
0105 H05 Internal fault (memory) Contact Lenze.
0107 H07 Internal fault (power stage) During initialisation of the Contact Lenze.
controller, an incorrect power
stage was detected.
x110 H10 Heatsink temperature sensor Sensor for detecting the heatsink l Contact Lenze.
error temperature indicates undefined l Switch off the monitoring
values. (C0588 = 3).
x111 H11 Temperature sensor error: Sensor for detecting the internal l Contact Lenze.
Temperature inside the controller temperature indicates undefined l Switch off the monitoring
values. (C0588 = 3).
9.5−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009


Resetting system error messages 9.5.2

No. Display
0140 ID1 Error during motor data No motor connected. Check motor connection.
identification. Stator resistance too high. Check entered motor data.
Controller inhibited externally. Enable controller and repeat
motor data identification. The
controller enable must be
pending continuously until the
end of the identification process.
0141 ID2 Error during motor data Motor too small. l Check entered motor data. For
identification. parameterisation with Global
Drive Control, use the input
assistant for motor data.
l The measurements for the
inverter error characteristic
and the stator resistance are
correct (save measured values
in C0003). For the operating
mode V/f characteristic control
the motor data identification
can be completed.
Controller inhibited externally. Enable controller and repeat
motor data identification. The
controller enable must be
pending continuously until the
end of the identification process.
x200 NMAX Maximum system speed (C0596) l Active load (e.g. for hoists) is l Check drive dimensioning.
has been exceeded. too high. l Increase torque limit, if
l Drive is not speed−controlled, necessary.
torque is excessively limited. l Switch off monitoring
(C0607 = 3).
Representation of the error number:
x 0 = TRIP, 1 = message, 2 = warning
E. g. "2091": An external monitoring function has triggered EEr warning
9.5.2 Resetting system error messages
Response Measures for resetting the fault message

TRIP Note!
If a TRIP source is still active, the pending TRIP cannot be reset.
Resetting the TRIP can be effected by:
l Pressing the keypad XT EMZ9371 BC ð +. Then press to re−enable the controller.
l Setting code C0043 = 0.
l Control word C0135, bit 11
l Control word AIF
l Control word of system bus (CAN)
After resetting the TRIP, the drive remains at standstill.
Message Danger!
After elimination of the fault, the fault message is cancelled automatically and the drive restarts
automatically.
Warning After elimination of the fault, the fault message is cancelled automatically.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 9.5−5

DC−bus operation 10
Contents
10 DC−bus operation
Contents
10.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1−1

10.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2−1
10.2.1 Possible combinations of Lenze controllers in a network
of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2−1
10.3 Mains chokes for DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3−1
10.4.1 Mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4−1
10.4.2 DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4−2
10.5 Basic dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
10.5.1 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
10.5.2 Calculation of the additional DC supply input . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−1
10.5.3 Dimensioning examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5−2
10.6 Distributed supply (several supply points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10−1

Function 10.1
10.1 Function
ƒ DC−bus connections of drive systems enable the exchange of energy

between connected controllers.
ƒ If one or more controllers operate in generator mode (braking
operation), the energy will be fed into the shared DC−voltage bus. The
energy will then be available to the controllers which operate in motor
mode.
ƒ The use of braking units and supply units can be reduced.
ƒ The energy consumption from the three−phase AC mains can be
reduced.
ƒ The number of mains supplies and the related expenses (e.g. wiring)
can be perfectly adapted to your application.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.1−1

Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation 10.2
Possible combinations of Lenze controllers in a network of several drives 10.2.1
10.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation
Stop!
ƒ Only connect controllers with the same ranges for mains
voltage or DC−bus voltage.
ƒ Adapt switching threshold of braking unit or brake transistor.
ƒ Operate all input modules only with the mains choke specified
( 10.3−1)!
10.2.1 Possible combinations of Lenze controllers in a network of several drives
ƒ Use the controllers EVx9335 ... EVx9338 and EVx9381 ... EVx9383 in
variants V210, V240, V270 and V300. They are suitable for DC−bus
operation.
Note!
For the subject "DC−bus operation", read the documentations of
the other devices used within the interconnection.
Controller In DC−bus connection Important requirements

with
EVx9335 ... EVx9338 EVx9335 ... EVx9338 l Only supply the controller in a decentralised manner.
EVx9381 ... EVx9383 EVx9381 ... EVx9383 l Only operate the controller with the mains choke assigned.
l Set the mains voltage or DC−bus voltage in C0173.
l Adapt the switching thresholds of the brake transistors in C0174.
EVx9321 ... EVx9333 l Only central supply via EVx9335 ... EVx9338 or EVx9381 ... EVx9383
8200 permitted
8200 vector – A mains supply for EVx9321 ... EVx9333, 8200 and 8200 vector is not
ECSxA004C4B permitted.
ECSx064C4B – If required, use additional 9360 DC power supply units for a sufficient
DC power.
l Set the mains voltage or DC−bus voltage in C0173.
– For EVx9335 ... EVx9338 and EVx9381 ... EVx9383 never set C0173 = 5.
l Adapt the switching thresholds of the brake transistors in C0174.
9340 l The use of 9340 regenerative power supply modules is not possible.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.2−1

Mains chokes for DC−bus operation 10.3
10.3 Mains chokes for DC−bus operation
Note!
In DC−bus operation mains chokes in front of every input module
are a basic precondition for trouble−free operation.
Mains chokes specified for the input modules in DC−bus operation:
Controller Mains choke
Type Rated mains current Rated current Inductance Order No.
[A] [A] [mH]
EVx9335 200 200 0.14 ELN3−0014H200
EVx9336 238 270 0.11 ELN3−0011H270
EVx9337 285 300 0.09 ELN3−0009H300
EVx9338 356 370 0.09 ELN3−0009H370
EVx9381 475 2 × 270 2 × 0.11 2 × ELN3−0011H270
EVx9382 570 2 × 300 2 × 0.09 2 × ELN3−0009H300
EVx9383 713 2 × 370 2 × 0.09 2 × ELN3−0009H370
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.3−1

Mains supply 10.4.1
10.4.1 Mains supply
For fusing the mains supply you can use the following fuses (gRL) and cable
cross−sections:
L1, L2, L3 PE
EVF9335−EV 150
250 95
EVF9335−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9336−EV 150
315 95
EVF9336−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9337−EV 150
315 95
EVF9337−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1)
EVF9338−EV 240
400 150
EVF9338−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1)
EVF9381−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9381−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EV 150 150
315 315 95 95
EVF9382−EVVxxx 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9383−EV 240 240
400 400 150 150
EVF9383−EVVxxx 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
Note!
We recommend to use semiconductor fuses (gRL).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.4−1

10.4.2 DC supply
10.4.2 DC supply
A DC supply is only possible for the variants V210, V240, V270, V300.
Stop!
ƒ Only use semiconductor fuses (gRL).
ƒ On principle, fuse DC cables as 2−pole (+UG, −UG).

+UG, −UG PE
315 95
EVF9335−EVV300 2 × 50 1)
350 95
EVF9336−EVV300 2 × 50 1)
400 95
EVF9337−EVV300 2 × 95 1)
500 150
EVF9338−EVV300 2 × 95 1)
EVF9381−EVV2xx 150 150
350 350 95 95
EVF9381−EVV300 2 × 50 1) 2 × 50 1)
EVF9382−EVV2xx 240 240
400 400 95 95
EVF9382−EVV300 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
EVF9383−EVV2xx 240 240
500 500 150 150
EVF9383−EVV300 2 × 95 1) 2 × 95 1)
10.4−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Basic dimensioning 10.5
Conditions 10.5.1
10.5 Basic dimensioning
10.5.1 Conditions
The input powers specified in the tables are only valid if the following
requirements for DC−bus operation are observed:
ƒ Central supply only via EVx9335 EVx9338, EVx9381 EVx9383, or
9360 DC power supply unit.
ƒ Connection to the three−phase system only via mains chokes specified.
10.5.2 Calculation of the additional DC supply input
EVx9321 EVx9333, Required DC power depending on the rated motor power:

8200 vector
PV PDC PV PDC
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
0.37 0.7 15 18
0.55 0.9 18.5 21
0.75 1.1 22 25
1.1 1.6 30 33
1.5 2.1 37 41
2.2 3.1 45 50
3.0 4.1 55 61
4.0 5.0 75 82
5.5 6.7 90 98
7.5 9.0 110 120
11 12.5
PV Rated motor power
If the rated power of the motor used is settled between two values, the higher value is to be
adopted
PDC DC power required
ECSxAxxxC4Baxis modules Required DC power relating to the maximum current of the ECS axis
modules:
Type PDC Type PDC
[kW] [kW]
ECSxA004C4B 1.5 ECSxA032C4B 12
PDC DC power required
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.5−1

10.5 Basic dimensioning
10.5.3 Dimensioning examples
How to calculate the input 1. If devices EVx9321 EVx9333 or 8200 vector are used in the drive
power required:
system:
Look for the rated powers of the connected motors in the table and write
down the corresponding powers PDC.
2. If devices ECSxAxxxC4B are used in the drive system:
Look for the connected axis modules in the table and write down the
corresponding powers PDC.
3. If required, determine the power PDC additionally available for the
devices EVx9335 EVx9338, EVx9381 EVx9383 in the drive system
by means of a rough estimate:
Device power ˘ rated power of the motor connected
4. Add all powers PDC from steps 1. and 2. and subtract the power PDC
that is additionally available.
– The result is the input power required.
5. Select the 9360 DC power supply units to provide the input power.
10.5.3 Dimensioning examples
Drive data Detemined power PDC

Controller Motor
Drive Type Power
Drive 1 E82EV113K4C 11 kW 12.5 kW
Drive 2 E82EV453K4B 37 kW 41 kW
from table
Drive 3 EVS9332 75 kW 82 kW
Drive 4 ECSxA048C4B 18 kW
Drive 5 EVV9336 (132 kW) 110 kW −22 kW rough
(input module) estimate
1. Determine the required DC power:

P DC + 12.5kW ) 41kW ) 82kW ) 18kW * 22kW + 131.5kW
2. Determine the required 9360 DC power supply units:

If 1 × 9364 (50 kW) and 1 × 9365 (100 kW) are used, a sufficient DC power
is provided with 150 kW.
10.5−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Distributed supply (several supply points) 10.6
10.6 Distributed supply (several supply points)
Block diagram
K10
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3 F4 … F6
Z1 Z2
S2
F7, F8 F9, F10 F11, F12 F13, F14

S1
K10
PE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG PE L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG PE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
Z3
EVx9335 9360 EVx9321 … EVx9333 8200 vector
K10 PE U V W BR1 BR2 +UG -UG PE U V W PE U V W
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
9300VEC200
Fig. 10.6−1 Controller with decentralised supply in the drive system

F1...F6 Mains fuses ( 10.4−1)
F7 ... F14 Fuses on DC level ( 10.4−2)
Z1 Mains choke ( 10.3−1)
Z2 Mains choke for 9360 DC power supply units
9364: ELN3−0038H085
9365: ELN3−0017H170
Z3 DC choke
9364: 0.75 mH, 90 A
9365: 2 × 0.75 mH, 90 A (switched parallel)
K10 Mains contactor
S1 Mains "ON"
S2 Mains "OFF"
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.6−1

Braking operation in the network 10.7
10.7 Braking operation in the network
ƒ Controllers EVx9335 ... EVx9383 in variants V270 and V300 are

equipped with an integrated brake transistor.
ƒ Controllers EVx9381 ... EVx9383 in variants V270 and V300 consist of a
master and a slave. Both master and slave contain one brake transistor,
respectively. The braking energy is normally dissipated in equal shares
via master and slave.
ƒ In the DC−bus connection you have to set the switching thresholds of
the brake transistors for all controllers of variants V270 and V300 to
the same value (C0174).
ƒ When the braking energy is low (e. g. operation in generator mode),
you can also use 9352 brake choppers. A simultaneous braking
operation with a 9352 brake chopper and an integrated brake resistor
is not possible due to the different switching thresholds.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 10.7−1

Safety engineering 11
Contents
11 Safety engineering
Contents
11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1−1

11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2−1
11.3 Safety relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3−1
11.4 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−1
11.4.2 Manual safety function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−2
11.4.3 Monitoring the safety function with a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4−3
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11−1

Important notes 11.1
11.1 Important notes
Stop!
In the case of the devices EVF9335 ... EVF9383 of variants V060,
V110, V270, and V300, the integrated brake transistor is
deactivated if the "Safe torque off" function is active.
The controllers support the safety functions "Safe torque off" (former
designation "Safe standstill"), "Protection against unexpected start−up", in
accordance with the requirements of control category 3 of ISO 13849−1
(former EN 954−1). Depending on the external interconnection, a standard
up to "category 3" in accordance with ISO 13849−1 is achieved.
Note!
In order to comply with control category 3 in accordance with
ISO 13849−1 (former EN 954−1), the two methods "Pulse inhibit
via safety relay KSR" and "Controller inhibit", which are
independent of each other, have to be used.
ƒ Only qualified personnel may install and commission the Safe torque
off" function.
ƒ All control components (switches, relays, PLC, ...) and the control
cabinet must comply with the requirements of EN ISO 13849−1 and
EN ISO 13849−2. This includes among other things:
– Control cabinet, switches, relays in enclosure IP54!
– All other requirements can be found in EN ISO 13849−1 and
EN ISO 13849−2!
ƒ Wiring with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid cables is absolutely
required.
ƒ All safetyrelevant cables (e.g. control cable for the safety relay,
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, e.g.
by a cable duct. It must be ensured that short circuits between the
individual cables cannot occur!
ƒ With the Safe torque off" function no emergency stop can be effected
without additional measures:
– There is neither an electrical isolation between motor and controller
nor a service or repair switch!
– An "Emergency stop" requires the electrical isolation of the conductor
to the motor, e.g. by means of a central mains contactor with
emergency stop wiring.
ƒ If in the case of the "Safe torque off" a force effect is to be expected
from outside, (e.g. sagging of hanging loads), additional measures are
required (e.g. mechanical brakes).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11.1−1

11.1 Important notes
ƒ After the installation the operator has to check the function of the
"Safe torque off" circuit.
– The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals.
– Basically, the inspection intervals depend on the application, the
related risk analysis, and the overall system. The inspection intervals
must not be longer than 1 year.
11.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Operating mode 11.2
11.2 Operating mode
5V

X11/34
X11/33 K SR
X11/K32
X11/K31
-
~
V
X5/28 W
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec100
Fig. 11.2−1 Internal connection of the "Safe torque off" function with 3 electrically isolated
circuits
Area : Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR; forcibly guided feedback for
monitoring the safety relay
Area : Controller inhibit (X5/28), optional feedback via a digital output
(DIGOUT)
Area : Power output stage
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11.2−1

11.2 Operating mode
Activating "Safe torque off" The "Safe torque off" status is activated via two different disconnecting
paths which are independent of each other:
1. disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR (terminal X11/33,
X11/34)
ƒ In the case of LOW level at terminals X11/33, X11/34, the safety relay
KSR is deactivated.The driver supply of the power section drivers is
interrupted. The inverter no longer receives pulses.
ƒ The disconnection of the safety relay KSR has to be monitored
externally, so that a failure of this disconnecting path can be detected.
X11/K31, X11/K32 is a forcibly guided break contact, i. e. if the safety
relay KSR has been deactivated ("Safe torque off" activated), the
contact is closed.
2. disconnecting path: Controller inhibit by input signal at terminal X5/28
ƒ The input signal at X5/28 is fed to the microcontroller system and the
PWM unit. In the case of LOW level at terminal X5/28, the output of
pulses to the inverter is inhibited in the microcontroller system.
ƒ The disconnecting path "Controller inhibit" can be evaluated optionally
via a digital output. Further information can be gathered from the
chapter "Functional test" ( 11.4−1).
"Safe torque off" is activated if both disconnecting paths are on LOW level.
Deactivating "Safe torque An AND operation of the disconnecting paths prevents the drive from
off" restarting if only one disconnecting path is enabled.
"Safe torque off" is deactivated if both disconnecting paths are on HIGH
level.
11.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Safety relay KSR 11.3
Technical data
Terminal Description Field Values

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Coil voltage at +20 °C DC 24 V (20 ... 30 V)
X11/K31 1st disconnecting path Coil resistance at +20 °C 823 W ±10 %
X11/33
X11/34 Rated coil power Approx. 700 mW
Max. switching voltage AC 250 V, DC 250 V (0.45 A)
Max. AC switching capacity 1500 VA
Max. switching current (ohmic load) AC 6 A (250 V), DC 6 A (50 V)
Recommended minimum load > 50 mW
Max. switching rate 6 switchings per minute
Mechanical service life 107 switching cycles
Electrical service life
at 250 V AC 105 switching cycles at 6 A
at 24 V DC 6 × 103 switching cycles at 6 A
1.5 × 106 switching cycles at 1 A
Terminal data Regulation for wiring of the terminals X11/34, X11/33, X11/K32, X11/K31,
X5/28:
Cable type Wire end ferrule Cable Tightening Stripping
cross−section torque length
2.5 mm2
Rigid —
(AWG 14) 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
5 mm
With plastic 2.5 mm2 (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
Flexible
sleeve (AWG 14)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11.3−1

Wiring
Danger!
Faulty operation in case of earth faults possible
The correct functioning of the safety function is not ensured if an
earth fault occurs.
ƒ A failure of the safety function can lead to death, severe
injuries or damage to material.
The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR
must be connected to the PE conductor system (EN 60204−1,
paragraph 9.4.3)!
Terminal strip X11 Internal wiring / wiring of terminal strip X11

+5 V X11
3 4
3 4
K SR + 34 +
3 3
K 3 1 K 3 2 3 3
33 –
K 3 2 DC 24 V
K32
K 3 1
K31
9300vec103
Fig. 11.3−1 Safety relay KSR
Terminal Function Level / state Electrical data

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Feedback − pulse inhibit Open contact: Pulse inhibit is See technical data of the
X11/K31 1st disconnecting inactive (operation) safety relay KSR
path Closed contact: Pulse inhibit is
active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying any current:
pulse inhibit is active
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying current: pulse
inhibit is inactive (operation)
X5/28 Controller inhibit Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller inhibited LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL−CINH) HIGH: Controller enabled HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd Input current at +24 V:
disconnecting 8 mA
path
Reading and processing
the input signals − 1/ms
(mean value)
11.3−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Functional test 11.4
11.4 Functional test
Danger!
Unexpected start−up of the machine possible
The "Safe torque off" safety function provides protection against
an unexpected start−up of the drive and therefore is an
important item within the safety concept for a machine. It has to
be ensured that this function works correctly.
ƒ Death, severe injury, or damage to material assets, when the
safety function fails.
After the installation and at regular intervals, the operator has to
check the function of the "Safe torque off" circuit.
ƒ When doing this, check both disconnecting paths separately
with regard to their disconnection capability.
ƒ The functional test can be carried out manually or
automatically via the PLC.
ƒ Basically the inspection interval depends on the application
and the corresponding risk analysis, as well as on the system
as a whole. It should not exceed 1 year.
ƒ If the functional test shows impermissible states,
– the drive or the machine has to be shut down immediately.
– commissioning is not permitted until the safety function
operates correctly.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11.4−1

11.4.2 Manual safety function check
11.4.2 Manual safety function check
For the functional test, check both disconnecting paths separately.

1. disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR
How to proceed during the test:
1. Alternately apply LOW and HIGH level to input X11/34 and check the
states given in the table below.
Specification Correct status
Individual test Input relay activation (X11/34) Output feedback (X11/K31)
Pulse inhibit LOW HIGH
Pulse enable HIGH LOW
The individual tests are passed if the correct states given in the table result.
2. disconnecting path: Controller inihibit

Requirement for the test:
ƒ "Quickstop" (QSP) function deactivated
ƒ "Automatic DC injection brake" deactivated (C0019 = 0)
ƒ Pulses enabled by the safety relay KSR (X11/34 = HIGH)
How to proceed during the test:

1. Set controller inhibit (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Define a setpoint nset > 0.
3. Check that the motor is not rotating.
The individual test is passed if the motor does not rotate.
Functional test not passed

If an individual test results in an impermissible status, the functional test is
not passed.
ƒ The drive or machine has to be shut down immediately.
ƒ Commissioning is not permitted until the safety function operates
correctly.
11.4−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Monitoring the safety function with a PLC 11.4.3
11.4.3 Monitoring the safety function with a PLC
DC 24 V
9300
Z1 S2 S1
IN 1 X11/34
IN 2 X11/33 K SR
IN 3 X11/K32
IN 4 X11/K31
RFR
X5/28
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec104
Fig. 11.4−1 Circuit diagram for monitoring the safety function with a PLC
S1, S2 Separate disconnection options of the two disconnecting paths
KSR Safety relay
X11/34 Safety relay control
X11/33 Safety relay control (GND)
X11/K32 Forcibly guided feedback contact (24 V)
X11/K31 Forcibly guided feedback contact
DIGOUT Digital output for evaluating the motor current
X5/28 Controller inhibit
IN 1 − 4 Digital inputs
Requirements The following conditions must be met:

ƒ The PLC must be programmed such that the complete system is set to a
safe state immediately when the function check leads to an
impermissible state.
ƒ The parameter setting of a digital output must be such that you can
conclude to the output current Imotor of the drive (see parameterisation
example).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11.4−3

11.4.3 Monitoring the safety function with a PLC
Example: Parameterising a In the following we will show you a possibility of parameterising a digital
digital output
output, so that a conclusion with regard to the motor current is provided.
Sequence Parameter Note
1. Configure function block CMP3
(comparator)
l Connect CMP3−IN1 to C0693/1 = 5004
MCTRL−IACT
l Connect CMP3−IN2 to C0693/2 = 19521
FCODE−472/1
l Configure the function IN1 < IN2 C0690 = 3
2. Configure output signal of CMP3 C0117/4 = 10660
l Connect DIGOUT4 to CMP3−OUT
3. Enter function block CMP3 in the
processing table
l Select a free space in the C0465/2 = 10660
processing table
In the Lenze setting, for instance
space 2 of the processing table is
free
4. Set the current threshold C0472/1 = 2.00 IMotor = 0 ® DIGOUT4 = HIGH
l Set the current threshold for IMotor ¹ 0 ® DIGOUT4 = LOW
Irated_FI to 2 %
11.4−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Monitoring the safety function with a PLC 11.4.3
Functional test within the For the functional test, check both disconnecting paths separately.
inspection interval
1. disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit via safety relay KSR
Individual test Input relay activation (X11/34) Output feedback (X11/K31)
Pulse inhibit LOW HIGH
Pulse enable HIGH LOW
2. disconnecting path: Controller inihibit

Requirement for the test:
ƒ "Quickstop" (QSP) function deactivated
ƒ "Automatic DC injection brake" deactivated (C0019 = 0)
ƒ Pulses enabled by the safety relay KSR (X11/34 = HIGH)
Individual test X5/28 Setpoint Output DIGOUT
Controller inhibit LOW nset > 0 HIGH
Controller enable HIGH LOW
Functional test not passed

If an individual test results in an impermissible status, the functional test is
not passed.
ƒ The drive or machine has to be shut down immediately.
ƒ Commissioning is not permitted until the safety function operates
correctly.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 11.4−5

Braking operation 12
Contents
12 Braking operation
Contents
12.1 Brake operation with external brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1−1

12.1.1 Selection of the brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1−1
12.2 Lenze brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−1
12.2.1 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−1
12.2.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−1
12.2.3 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−2
12.2.4 Connection of external brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2−2
12.3 Rated data of the integrated brake transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3−1
12.4.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4−2
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12−1

Brake operation with external brake resistor 12.1
Selection of the brake resistors 12.1.1
12.1 Brake operation with external brake resistor
Larger moments of inertia or longer generator−mode operation require an

external brake resistor. It converts mechanical brake energy into heat.
The brake transistor integrated into the controller switches the external
brake resistor in addition when the DC−bus voltage exceeds a threshold. It
can thus be avoided that the controller sets pulse inhibit in the event of an
"overvoltage" and forces the drive to coast to standstill. External brake
resistors ensure braking operation at any time.
12.1.1 Selection of the brake resistors
The suitable brake resistor must meet the following criteria:

Brake resistor Application
Criteria with active load with passive load
Continuous braking power t1 P max @ h e @ h m t 1
[W] w P max @ h e @ h m @ w @
t zykl 2 t zykl
Thermal capacity [Ws]

P max @ h e @ h m
w P max @ h e @ h m @ t 1 w @ t1
2
Resistance [W] 2
U DC
R min v R v
P max @ h e @ h m
Field Description
Active load Can move without being influenced by the controller (e.g.
unwinders)
Passive load Decelerates to standstill without influence of the controller
(e.g. horizontal traversing drives, centrifuges, fans)
VDC [V] Threshold for brake transistor
Pmax [W] Max. brake power determined by the application
IMPORTANT:
With EVF9381−EV, EVF9382−EV, EVF9383−EV only calculate
with Pmax/2 since these devices dissipate the brake energy
evenly via master and slave. If the brake power is lower, the
brake energy can also be dissipated via the master or the
slave; use Pmax for the calculation.
he Electrical efficiency (controller + motor)
Guide value: 0.94
hm Mechanical efficiency (gearbox, machine)
t1 [s] Braking time
tcycl [s] Cycle time = time between two braking processes
(= t1 + break)
Rmin [W] Lowest permissible brake resistance (see rated data for the
integrated brake transistor)
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12.1−1

Lenze brake resistors 12.2
Rated data 12.2.1
12.2 Lenze brake resistors
12.2.1 Rated data
Field Data
Resistance R 15 W
Continuous power 1) 4.0 kW
Thermal capacity 600.0 kWs
Switch−on cycle Braking for max. 19/15/14/11 s, then at least
131/135/136/139 s break 2)
Cable cross−section to be 6 mm2
connected AWG 10
Mass 12.5 kg
Order No. ERBD015R04K0
1) The continuous power is a reference value for the selection of brake resistors. Braking at peak
brake power (V2DC/R).
2) More information on the switching threshold V
DC (685 V, 755 V, 785 V, 885 V) of the brake
transistor can be found in chapter 12.1
Note!
As standard the brake resistor is equipped with a temperature
switch (NC contact max. AC 250 V, 0.5 A).
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12.2−1

12.2 Lenze brake resistors
12.2.2 Dimensions
12.2.2 Dimensions
b1
b
e1
e
a1
a
6.5 x 15.5 a4
a3
> 25 mm
Achtung!
Caution!
a2
> 100 mm
> 200 mm
c2 > 25 mm
c3 c1
c
9300VEC041
Fig. 12.2−1 Dimensions of the ERBD015R04K0 brake resistor
Type a a1 a2 a3 a4 b b1 c c1 c2 c3 e e1
ERBD015R04K0 273 266 240 152 64 233 229 640 550 526 66.5 51 53
All values in [mm]
12.2.3 Selection
Stop!
The value must not fall below the lowest permissible resistance.
Connect several brake resistors of type ERBD015R04K0 in parallel to get the
brake resistance that matches your application.
The number of resistors to be connected in parallel is calculated with 1/4 x
of the required continuous power (round the result).
12.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Lenze brake resistors 12.2
Connection of external brake resistor 12.2.4
12.2.4 Connection of external brake resistor
BR1 BR2
PES
Z1
RB J
RB
PES RB2 RB1 T1 T2
9300VEC033
Fig. 12.2−2 Brake resistor connection

RB1, RB2 Controller terminals for connecting the brake resistor
Z1 Brake resistor
PES HF−shield end by PE connection through shield bracket.
Important notes ƒ Brake resistors can get hot and under certain conditions a brake
resistor can even burn down. For this reason, the brake resistors must
be mounted so that the possibly high temperatures cannot cause any
damage.
ƒ Provide a safety shutdown in the event the brake resistor overheats.
ƒ Use the thermal contacts of the brake resistor (e.g. T1 / T2) as control
contacts to disconnect the controller from the cable!
ƒ Only use shielded brake resistor cables.
ƒ Connect the shield close to the controller and close to the brake resistor
with a surface as large as possible to the mounting plate by using a
shield clamp.
ƒ The shield of the control cables for digital signals (temperature
monitoring T1 / T2) must be connected at both sides (controller and
brake resistor).
ƒ Unshielded cables between shield clamp and connection terminals
must not be longer than 40 mm.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12.2−3

Rated data of the integrated brake transistor 12.3
12.3 Rated data of the integrated brake transistor
Rated data for types EVF93xx−EVV060 and EVF93xx−EVV110 at 400 V rated mains voltage
Brake transistor 9300 vector

EVF9335−EVV060 EVF9336−EVV060 EVF9337−EVV060 EVF9338−EVV060
Threshold VDC [V DC] 685
Peak brake current [A DC] 315 375 450 560
Max. continuous [A DC] 210 250 300 375
current
Lowest permissible [W] 2.2 1.8 1.5 1.2
brake resistance 1)
Current derating Derate the peak brake current by 2.5 %/°C above 40 °C
Derate the peak brake current by 5 %/1000 m above 1000 m a.m.s.l.
Switch−on cycle 3) max. 60 s braking at peak brake power, followed by min. 30 s break

EVF9381−EVV060 2) EVF9382−EVV060 2) EVF9383−EVV060 2)
Peak brake current [A DC] 2 × 375 2 × 450 2 × 560
Max. continuous [A DC] 2 × 250 2 × 300 2 × 375
current
Lowest permissible [W] 1.8 1.5 1.2
brake resistance 1)
1) Please consider the cable resistance if you use longer connection cables. The cable resistance must
be added to the brake resistance and has therefore a considerable influence on the total
resistance.
2) Device consists of master and slave connected in parallel. Usually, the brake energy is dissipated
evenly via master and slave.
3) Please see the switch−on cycle of the brake resistor used.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12.3−1

Rated data for types EVF93xx−EVV270 and EVF93xx−EVV300 at 400 V or 460 V rated mains voltage

current
brake resistance 1)

current
brake resistance 1)
resistance.
12.3−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Rated data of the integrated brake transistor 12.3

current
brake resistance 1)

current
brake resistance 1)
resistance.
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12.3−3


current
brake resistance 1)

current
brake resistance 1)
resistance.
12.3−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Braking operation in the network 12.4
Basic circuit diagram K10

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3 F4 … F6
Z1 Z2
S2
F7, F8 F9, F10

S1
K10
PE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG PE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
EVx9335 EVx9335
K10 PE U V W BR1 BR2 PE U V W BR1 BR2
RB2 RB1
M M
JRB
3~ 3~ RB
Z3
9300VEC034
Fig. 12.4−1 Controller with decentralised supply in DC−bus operation and with brake resistor
F1...F6 Mains fuses ( 3.7−1)
F7 ... F14 Fuses on DC level ( 3.7−2)
Z1, Z2 Mains choke ( 10.3−1)
Z3 Brake resistor
K10 Mains contactor
S1 Mains "ON"
S2 Mains "OFF"
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 12.4−1

12.4.1 Selection
12.4.1 Selection
Stop!
ƒ Set the DC−bus voltage thresholds of the controllers to the
same value under C0173.
ƒ Set the brake transistor thresholds for the controllers under
C0174.

C0173 UG limit 1 Check during commissioning and 12−1
adapt, if necessary! See System
All controllers in the system must Manual
(extension)
have the same threshold!
l Adaptation of UG thresholds
l Only display in case of the
(EVF93xx−EV, EVF93xx−EVV030,
EVF93xx−EVV060,
EVF93xx−EVV110):
– C0173 = 1
– OU = 700 ... 685 V
Mains LU OU
0 < 400 V 285 V 770 ... 755 V Device with or without brake
1 400 V 285 V 770 ... 755 V transistor
2 460 V 328 V 770 ... 755 V
3 480 V 342 V 770 ... 755 V Device without brake transistor
4 480 V 342 V 800 ... 785 V Device with brake transistor
5 500 V 342 V 900 ... 885 V
C0174 BR Limit 3 Display of the brake transistor 12−1
thresholds See System
Manual
Check during commissioning and (extension)
adapt, if necessary!
All controllers connected to the
bus must have the same
threshold!
Mains UBR OU
0 400 V 685 V 700 V Only display in case of the variants
for 400 V mains (EVF93xx−EV,
EVF93xx−EVV030,
EVF93xx−EVV060,
EVF93xx−EVV110)
1 400 V / 460 V 755 V 770 V Only in case of the variants for
400 V/500 V mains
2 480 V 785 V 800 V (EVF93xx−EVV210,
EVF93xx−EVV240,
3 500 V 885 V 900 V EVF93xx−EVV270,
EVF93xx−EVV300)
Important notes Provide a safety switch−off in the event of overheating if you use a brake
resistor. Use the temperature switches of the brake resistor to
ƒ disconnect all controllers from the mains.
ƒ set controller inhibit in all controllers (terminal X528 = LOW).
12.4−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Accessories (overview) 13
Contents
13 Accessories (overview)
Contents
13.1 General accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1−1

13.2 Type−specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 13−1

General accessories 13.1
13.1 General accessories
Accessories Designation Order number

Communication LECOM−LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBCV003
modules LECOM−B (RS485) EMF2102IBCV002
LECOM−A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBCV001
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS−Loop EMF2112IB
PROFIBUS−DP EMF2133IB
DeviceNet/CANopen EMF2175IB
Operating module keypad XT EMZ9371BC
Diagnosis terminal (keypad XT in handheld design, IP20) 1) E82ZBBXC
Other Connecting cable 2.5 m E82ZWL025
5m E82ZWL050
10 m E82ZWL100
Parameterisation/operating software »Global Drive Control« ESP−GDC2
(GDC)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB
(Voltage supply via DIN connection)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB−V002
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB−V003
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection, electrical isolation)
PC system bus adapter USB EMF2177IB
CAN repeater EMF2176IB
PC system cable RS232 5m EWL0020
10 m EWL0021
Optical fibre adapter (standard output power) EMF2125IB
Optical fibre adapter (increased output power) EMF2126IB
Power supply unit for optical fibre adapter EJ0013
Optical fibre, single−core, black PE sheath (basic protection), EWZ0007
sold by the meter
Optical fibre, single−core, red PUR sheath (reinforced EWZ0006
protection), sold by the meter
Setpoint potentiometer ERPD0010k0001W
Rotary knob for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0001
Scale for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0002
Digital display EPD203
Encoder cable 2.5 m EWLE002GX−T
5.0 m EWLE005GX−T
10.0 m EWLE010GX−T
Connecting cable for digital frequency coupling 2.5 m EWLD002GGBS93
1) Additional connecting cable required
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 13.1−1

13 Accessories (overview)
13.1 General accessories
Tip!
Documentation and software updates for further Lenze products
can be found on the Internet in the "Services & Downloads" area
under
http://www.Lenze.com
13.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Type−specific accessories 13.2
13.2 Type−specific accessories
Accessories 9300 vector

EVF9335 EVF9336 EVF9337 EVF9338
Motor choke ELM3−003H275 ELM3−003H275 ELM3−002H320 ELM3−002H410
Air lock E93ZWL
Brake resistor ERBD015R04K0
Accessories 9300 vector

EVF9381 EVF9382 EVF9383
Motor choke 2 × ELM3−003H275 2 × ELM3−002H320 2 × ELM3−002H410
Air lock E93ZWL2
Brake resistor ERBD015R04K0
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 13.2−1

Appendix 14
Contents
14 Appendix
Contents
14.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1−1

14.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1−1
14.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 14−1

Appendix 14
Glossary 14.1
Terminology and abbreviations used 14.1.1
14.1 Glossary
14.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used
Cross−reference to a chapter with the corresponding

page number
AC AC current or AC voltage
AIF Automation interface

AIF interface, interface for communication modules
CE Communauté Européene
Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter, or DC speed

controller
Cxxxx/y Subcode y of code Cxxxx

(e. g. C0404/2 = subcode 2 of code C0404)
DC DC current or DC voltage
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung(German Institute

for Standardization)
Drive Lenze controller in combination with a geared

motor, a three−phase AC motor, and other Lenze
drive components
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN European standard
fr [Hz] Rated motor frequency
Ia [A] Current output current
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
Imains [A] Mains current
Imax [A] Maximum output current
IP International Protection Code
IPC Industrial PC
IPE [mA] Discharge current
Ir [A] Rated output current
L [mH] Inductance
Mr [Nm] Rated motor torque
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PDC [kW] Power that can be additionally taken from the DC

bus if a power−adapted motor is used for operation
PLC Programmable control system
Ploss [W] Power loss of inverter
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 14.1−1

14 Appendix
14.1 Glossary
14.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used
Pr [kW] Rated motor power
R [W] Resistance
SN [kVA] Controller output power
UDC [V] DC supply voltage
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UM [V] Output voltage
Umains [V] Mains voltage
VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of

German Electrical Engineers)
Xk/y Terminal y on terminal strip Xk (e. g. X5/28 =

terminal 28 on terminal strip X5)
14.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Appendix 14
Index 14.2
14.2 Index
A B
Acceleration, 6.10−1 Basic function, 8.5−2
Brake operation, with external brake resistor, 12.1−1
Acceleration time Tir, additional setpoint of NSET, 8.5−19
Brake resistors, Selection, 12.1−1
Accessories, 13−1
Brake transistor, 12.3−1
− external brake resistor, 12.1−1
Braking, 6.10−1 , 12−1
− General, 13.1−1
Braking operation, 12−1
− Type−specific, 13.2−1 − in the network, 10.7−1 , 12.4−1
Activating the incremental encoder, 6.7−1 Bus off, 8.3−2
Actual motor current, 8.2−27 , 8.2−42 , 8.5−7 , 9.1−1
C
Actual motor voltage, 8.2−27 , 8.2−42 , 8.5−6 , 9.1−1 Cable
Actual speed value, 8.2−27 , 8.2−42 , 8.5−6 , 9.1−1 − For control connections, 5.2−3
− For motor connection, 5.2−2
Additional setpoint, 8.5−6
Cable cross−sections, 3.7−1
Ambient conditions
Calibration, Application datum, 9.1−1
− climatic, 3.1−2
CAN bus identifier, 8.5−23
− electrical, 3.1−2
CE conformity, 1.2−1
− mechanical, 3.1−2
CE−typical drive system, 5.3−1 , 5.4−1
Analog inputs Changing parameters
− setting input range with jumper X3, 5.5−9 − EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−7 , 7.2−8
− Signals, 6.5−4 − Keypad EMZ9371BC, 7.2−4 , 7.2−6 , 7.2−9
− terminal assignment, 5.5−9 Changing the direction of rotation, 6.10−5
Analog outputs Clamp operation, 9.4−2
− Configuration, 6.5−6 Code, 7.1−1
− Signals, 6.5−6 Code table, 8.5−1
− terminal assignment, 5.5−9 Commissioning, 6−1
− before switching on, 6.1−1
Application, as directed, 1.2−1
− Entry of motor data, 6.6−1
Application as directed, 1.2−1 Communication modules, 5.9−1
Application datum, Display, 9.1−1 Compensation equipment, Interaction with, 5.1−4
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 14.2−1

14 Appendix
14.2 Index
Configuration, 8−1 D
− Analog input signals, 6.5−4
DC bus
− Analog output signals, 6.5−6
− Cable cross−sections for the, 5.3−5 , 5.4−9
− Analog outputs, 6.5−6
− Cable selection, 3.7−3
− changing the direction of rotation, 6.10−5
− connection to the, 5.3−5 , 5.4−9
− Code table, 8.5−1
− Fuses for the, 5.3−5 , 5.4−9
− Controller inhibit (DCTRL1−CINH), 6.4−1
DC busbars, installation between master and slave, 5.4−4
− Current limits, 6.6−15
− Digital input signals, 6.5−1 DC injection braking (GSB)
− Digital output signals, 6.5−3 − automatic, 8.2−35 , 8.2−57
− Digital outputs, 6.5−3 − manual, 8.2−33 , 8.2−55
− Display functions, 9.1−1 DC supply, 5.2−1
− Maximum field frequency, 6.10−1 DC−bus cable, shielding, 5.3−5 , 5.4−9
− Minimum field frequency, 6.10−1
DC−bus connection
− Monitoring
Current load of controller (Ixt monitoring), 8.3−4 − Distributed supply, 10.6−1
Heatsink temperature, 8.3−6 − Possible combinations, 10.2−1
Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.3−2
DC−bus operation, 10−1
− monitoring, 8.3−1
bus off, 8.3−2 − Braking operation in, 10.7−1 , 12.4−1
DC−bus voltage, 8.3−7 − Conditions, 10.2−1
motor temperature, 8.3−5 − Several drives, 10−1
reset node, 8.3−2
DC−bus voltage, 8.2−27 , 8.2−42 , 8.3−7 , 8.5−6 , 9.1−1
− monitoring functions
overview, 8.4−1 − monitoring, 8.3−7
responses, 8.3−1 − overvoltage, 8.3−7
− motor data collection, 6.6−16 − Undervoltage, 8.3−7
− Oscillation damping, 6.11−3 Deceleration, 6.10−1
− Quick stop (QSP), 6.10−4
Deceleration time Tif, additional setpoint of NSET, 8.5−19
− Relay output, 6.5−3
− Slip compensation, 6.11−1 Definition of notes used, 1.4−1
− switching frequency of inverter, 6.9−1 Definitions, Terms, 14.1−1
− Table of attributes, 8.7−1 Derating, 6.6−16 , 6.9−1 , 6.11−3 , 8.2−38 , 8.2−60
− Umin boost, 6.8−6
device control, 8.5−2
Conformity, 1.2−1
Device protection, 2.3−1
Control cable, 5.2−3
Diagnostics, 7.2−10 , 9.1−1 , 9.1−2
Control cables, connection between master and
Diameter calculator (DCALC1), 8.2−1
slave, 5.4−5
Digital frequency input, connection to X9, 5.8−1
Control terminals, 5.5−1
− Changing the assignment of X5, 6.5−1 Digital frequency output, connection to X10, 5.8−1
− Changing the assignment of X6, 6.5−1 Digital input signals, 6.5−1
Control word (AIF), 8.5−13 Digital inputs, Terminal assignment, 5.5−9
Controller Digital inputs/outputs, Terminal assignment, 11.3−2
− application as directed, 1.2−1 Digital output signals, 6.5−3
− in clamp operation, 9.4−2
Digital outputs
− labelling, 1.2−1
− Configuration, 6.5−3
Controller inhibit, Drive behaviour, 6.4−1 − terminal assignment, 5.5−9
Current limits, 6.6−15 Dimensions, 3.1−2 , 4.2−1 , 4.3−1 , 12.2−2
Current load of controller, Ixt monitoring, 8.3−4 Direction of rotation, inhibiting, 8.2−39 , 8.2−61
14.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Appendix 14
Index 14.2
Display Feedback system, wiring, 5.7−1

− Application datum, 9.1−1 Field controller, 6.8−8 , 8.5−8
− operating status, 9.2−1
Field frequency
Display functions, 9.1−1 − maximum, 6.10−1
− Possible values, 9.1−1 − Minimum, 6.10−1
Display of operating data, 9.1−1 Free mounting spaces, 4.1−1
Display values, 9.1−1 Free spaces, 3.1−2
− Calibration, 9.1−1
Function blocks, 8.2−1
Disposal, 2.1−3
− diameter calculator (DCALC1), 8.2−1
Distributed supply, 10.6−1 − internal motor control, vector control (MCTRL2), 8.2−40
Drive behaviour − master frequency input (DFIN), 8.2−5
− Controller inhibit, 6.4−1 − master frequency output (DFOUT), 8.2−8
− in the event of faults, 9.3−1 − master frequency processing (DFSET), 8.2−18
− master frequency ramp−function generator
Drive errors, 9.4−1
(DFRFG1), 8.2−13
Functional test, safety function, 11.4−2 , 11.4−5
E
Earth fault in motor cable (OC2), 8.3−3
G
Electrical installation, system bus (CAN), 5.6−1
gases, aggressive, 4.1−1
EMC, what to do in case of interferences, 5.2−6
General accessories, 13.1−1
Emergency−off, Controller inhibit, 6.4−1
General data, 3.1−1 , 7.2−1
EMZ9371BC keypad, changing parameters, 7.2−7 , 7.2−8
Entry of motor data, 6.6−1 H
Error analysis, Via history buffer, 9.2−1 Heatsink temperature, monitoring, 8.3−6
Error messages, 9.5−1 History buffer, 9.2−1
− causes and remedies, 9.5−1 − Assembly, 9.2−2
− configuration, 8.4−1 − clear, 9.2−2
− General, 9.5−1
− Resetting, 9.5−5
I
Exceeding of the maximum speed (NMAX), 8.3−3
Imax limit in generator mode, in generator mode, 6.6−15 ,
Explanations, Code table, 8.5−1 8.2−27 , 8.2−42 , 8.5−4
External brake resistors, 12.2−1 Imax limit in motor mode, 6.6−15 , 8.2−27 , 8.2−42 , 8.5−4
External error (EEr), 8.3−7 Incremental encoder
− At X8, 5.7−2 , 6.7−2
F − at X9, 5.7−3 , 6.7−3
− operation with, 8.2−48
Failure of a motor phase, 8.3−4
− with HTL level, 5.7−3 , 6.7−3
Fan connection EVx9335 ... EVx9383 − With TTL level, 5.7−2 , 6.7−2
− Controller is supplied via the DC bus, 5.3−6 , 5.4−10
Input signals
− controller is supplied with mains voltage, 5.3−5 , 5.4−10
− Analog, Configuration, 6.5−4
Fault analysis, Via history buffer, 9.2−1 − Digital, Configuration, 6.5−1
Fault elimination, 9.4−1 Inputs
Fault messages − Digital, Response times, 6.5−1
− causes and remedies, 9.5−1 − KTY, 6.6−11
− OC3 in clamp operation, 9.4−2 − PTC, 6.6−9
Fault responses, 8.3−1 Interaction with compensation equipment, 5.1−4
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 14.2−3

14 Appendix
14.2 Index
Interferences, eliminating EMC interferences, 5.2−6 Master/slave

Internal motor control − Connecting control cables between the devices, 5.4−5
− V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1), setting of V/f − installing the DC busbars, 5.4−4
characteristic, 8.2−31 Maximum speed, 6.10−1 , 8.2−26 , 8.2−41 , 8.5−3
− with vector control (MCTRL2)
torque control with speed limitation, 8.2−53 Menu structure, XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2−11
torque limitation, 8.2−50 Message, 8.3−1
Internal motor control (MCTRL) Minimum speed, 6.10−1 , 8.2−26 , 8.2−41 , 8.5−3
− inhibiting the direction of rotation, 8.2−39 , 8.2−61
Monitoring, 8.3−1
− limiting output current, 8.2−52
− bus off, 8.3−2
− limiting the output current, 8.2−32
− configuring, 8.4−1
− limiting the speed setpoint, 8.2−31 , 8.2−47
− Current load of controller, Ixt monitoring, 8.3−4
− quick stop (QSP), 8.2−33 , 8.2−54
− DC−bus voltage, 8.3−7
− speed control, 8.2−31 , 8.2−48
− Earth fault in motor cable (OC2), 8.3−3
− speed setpoint selection, 8.2−31 , 8.2−47
− Exceeding of the maximum speed (NMAX), 8.3−3
− with vector control (MCTRL2), 8.2−40
− External error (EEr), 8.3−7
− Failure of a motor phase (LP1), 8.3−4
J − Heatsink temperature, 8.3−6
JOG setpoint, 8.5−6 − Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.3−2
Jumper X3, for input range of analog setpoint selection, − motor cable overcurrent (OC1), 8.3−3
5.5−9 − motor temperature, 8.3−5
− overload acceleration, deceleration (OC3), 8.3−3
K − possible responses, 8.4−1
− reset node, 8.3−2
Keypad EMZ9371BC, Changing parameters, 7.2−4 , 7.2−6 ,
7.2−9 − responses, 8.3−1
message, 8.3−1
KTY motor monitoring, 6.6−11 TRIP, 8.3−1
warning, 8.3−1
L Monitoring functions
− Overview, 8.4−1
Labelling, controller, 1.2−1
− responses, 8.3−1
LED display, 9.2−1
Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.3−2
Legal regulations, 1.2−1
Motor, thermal monitoring, with PTC thermistor, 6.6−9 ,
Liability, 1.2−2 6.6−11
Light−emitting diodes, 9.2−1 Motor cable, 5.2−2
− length, 3.1−2
M − Selection of, 3.7−3
Mains cable, Selection of, 3.7−3 − shielding, 5.3−7 , 5.4−12
Mains connection, 5.2−1 Motor cable overcurrent (OC1), 8.3−3

− fuses for the, 5.3−3 , 5.3−4 , 5.4−7 , 5.4−8 Motor connection, 5.4−13
mains connection, cable cross−sections for the, 5.3−3 , Motor cos phi, 6.6−2 , 6.6−17 , 6.8−9 , 8.2−44 , 8.5−10
5.3−4 , 5.4−7 , 5.4−8
Motor data, identification, 6.6−16
Mains supply, 3.7−1 , 10.4−1
Motor data collection, 6.6−16
Manufacturer, 1.2−1
Motor leakage inductance, 8.5−9
Master frequency input (DFIN), 8.2−5
Motor magnetising current, optimising in case of vector
Master frequency output (DFOUT), 8.2−8 control, 6.11−9
Master frequency processing (DFSET), 8.2−18 Motor potentiometer
Master frequency ramp−function generator − acceleration time Tir, 8.5−21
(DFRFG1), 8.2−13 − deceleration time Tif, 8.5−21
14.2−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Appendix 14
Index 14.2
Motor protection, 2.3−1 Oscillation damping, 6.11−3 , 8.2−38 , 8.2−60

Motor rotor resistance, 8.2−43 , 8.5−9 − Reduction of speed oscillations, 6.11−3
Motor stator inductance, 6.6−17 , 6.8−9 , 8.2−44 , 8.5−10 Output current, limiting, 8.2−32 , 8.2−52
Motor stator resistance, 6.6−17 , 8.2−44 , 8.5−9 Output signals

− Analog, Configuration, 6.5−6
Motor temperature, monitoring, 8.3−5
− Digital, Configuration, 6.5−3
Motor temperature monitoring, connection, 5.3−8 ,
5.4−14 Outputs
− Analog, 6.5−6
Mounting conditions
− Digital, 6.5−3
− Dimensions, 3.1−2
− Free spaces, 3.1−2 Overload acceleration, deceleration (OC3), 8.3−3
− Mounting place, 3.1−2 Overspeeds, 2.3−1
− Mounting position, 3.1−2 Overview, Accessories, 13−1
− Weights, 3.1−2
Overvoltage threshold, DC−bus voltage, 8.3−7
Mounting place, 3.1−2
Mounting position, 3.1−2
P
Parameter setting, 7−1
N − code, 7.1−1
Nameplate, 1.1−3 , 1.1−4 − with bus system, 7.1−2
Network of several drives − With XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 6.3−1 , 7.2−1
− Basic dimensioning, 10.5−1 Password, 8.2−45 , 8.5−10
− Function, 10.1−1
Pollution, 3.1−2
Noise optimised operation, 6.9−1
Power system, 3.1−2
Notes, definition, 1.4−1
Protection against unexpected start−up, 11.1−1
− operating mode, 11.2−2
O − safety relay, 3.4−1 , 11.3−1
Operating behaviour Protection of persons, 2.3−1
− Optimise, 6.8−1
PTC motor monitoring, 6.6−9
− Optimising, 6.11−1
Operating conditions, 3.1−2 , 7.2−1
− ambient conditions
Q
climatic, 3.1−2 QSP (quick stop), 8.2−33 , 8.2−54
electrical, 3.1−2
mechanical, 3.1−2 Quick stop, 6.10−4
− Mounting conditions Quick stop (QSP), 8.2−33 , 8.2−54
Dimensions, 3.1−2
Free space, 3.1−2 Quick stop deceleration time, 6.10−4 , 8.2−29 , 8.2−45 ,
Mounting place, 3.1−2 8.5−11
Mounting position, 3.1−2
Weight, 3.1−2
R
Operating mode
Rated data, 12.2−1
− for standard applications, 6.1−2 , 6.8−3
− for 400 V mains voltage, 3.6−1
− Select, 6.8−1
− for 500 V mains voltage, 3.6−2
− select, 6.1−1 , 6.8−1
− integrated brake transistor, 12.3−1
− V/f characteristic control, 6.8−4
commissioning example, 6.3−1 Rated motor current, 6.6−1 , 6.6−17 , 6.8−9 , 8.2−44 ,
− vector control, 6.8−8 8.5−9
commissioning example, 6.3−5
Rated motor frequency, 6.6−1 , 6.6−17 , 6.8−9 , 8.2−29 ,
Operating status, display, 9.2−1 8.2−44 , 8.5−9
Operation, noise optimised, 6.9−1 Rated motor power, 6.6−1 , 6.8−8 , 8.5−9
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 14.2−5

14 Appendix
14.2 Index
Rated motor speed, 6.6−1 , 6.6−17 , 6.8−9 , 8.2−29 , Shielding

8.2−44 , 8.5−9 − DC−bus cable, 5.3−5 , 5.4−9
Rated motor voltage, 6.6−2 , 6.6−17 , 6.8−5 , 6.8−9 , − motor cable, 5.3−7 , 5.4−12
8.2−29 , 8.2−44 , 8.5−9
Site altitude, 3.1−2
Reaction times of digital inputs, 6.5−1 Slip compensation, 6.11−1 , 8.2−39 , 8.2−61
Relay output, Configuration, 6.5−3 Speed control, 8.2−31 , 8.2−48
Residual hazards, 2.3−1 − adapting the speed controller, 8.2−48
Responses, 8.3−1 − at vector control (MCTRL2), adapting the speed
controller, 8.2−31
− message, 8.3−1
− with vector control (MCTRL2)
− TRIP, 8.3−1 setting integral action component, 8.2−49
− warning, 8.3−1 speed feedback, 8.2−48
temperature detection, 8.2−49
Running optimisation, 6.11−1
Speed feedback, 8.2−48
Speed mode, setting acceleration and deceleration
S times, 6.10−3
Safe standstill, 11.1−1 Speed oscillations, 6.11−3
Safe torque off, 11.1−1 Speed setpoint limitation, 8.2−31 , 8.2−47
− Function deactivated, 5.5−7
Speed setpoint selection, 8.2−31 , 8.2−47
− functional test, 11.4−2 , 11.4−5
− operating mode, 11.2−2 Stability, of the motor, 8.2−50
− safety relay, 3.4−1 , 11.3−1 Status word AIF, 8.5−14 , 9.1−2
Safe torque offt, Function active, 5.5−4 Stopping, 6.10−1
Safety, safety engineering, 11−1 Supply forms / electrical supply conditions, 5.1−4
Safety engineering, 11−1 Switching frequency, automatic current−dependent
change−over, 6.9−2 , 8.2−27 , 8.2−41 , 8.5−4
Safety function
Switching frequency of inverter, 6.9−1
− functional test, 11.4−2 , 11.4−5
− noise optimised, 6.9−1
− Safe torque off, 11.1−1
Switching frequency reduction, 6.9−2
Safety instructions, 2−1
− definition, 1.4−1 switching on, check before switching on, 6.1−1
− layout, 1.4−1 System bus (CAN), wiring, 5.6−1
Safety relay, 3.4−1 , 11.3−1 System error messages, 9.5−1
− Connector X11 − configuration, 8.4−1
Terminal assignment, 11.3−2 − General, 9.5−1
Wiring, 11.3−2
− Resetting, 9.5−5
Safety relay KSR, Terminal assignment, 5.5−9 , 11.3−2
Selecting the operating mode, speed mode, setting T
acceleration and deceleration times, 6.10−3
Table of attributes, 8.7−1
Selection, operating mode, 6.1−1 , 6.8−1
Technical data, 3−1
Selection of motor type, 6.6−1 , 8.2−29 , 8.2−44 , 8.5−9
Temperature detection, 8.2−49
Selection of the feedback system, 6.7−1 , 8.2−42 , 8.5−4
Terminal assignment
Setting integral action component, 8.2−49 − analog inputs, 5.5−9
Setting the acceleration time, 6.10−3 − analog outputs, 5.5−9
− digital inputs, 5.5−9
Setting the deceleration time, 6.10−3
− Digital inputs/outputs, 11.3−2
Setting the feedback system, 6.7−1 − digital outputs, 5.5−9
Setting the speed feedback, 6.7−1 − Safety relay KSR, 5.5−9 , 11.3−2
14.2−6 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Appendix 14
Index 14.2
Terminal data, 5.5−2 , 11.3−1 U

Terms Umin boost, 6.8−6
− controller, 14.1−1 Undervoltage threshold, DC−bus voltage, 8.3−7
− Definitions, 14.1−1
− drive, 14.1−1 V
V/f characteristic, setting of, 8.2−31
Thermal monitoring, motor, with PTC thermistor, 6.6−9 ,
6.6−11 V/f characteristic control, 6.8−4
− boost correction, 6.11−5
Tn current controller, 6.8−8 , 8.2−28 , 8.2−43 , 8.5−8 − commissioning example, 6.3−1
Tn slip controller, 6.11−1 , 8.2−29 , 8.5−8 Vector control, 6.8−8
Tn speed controller, 8.2−28 , 8.2−43 , 8.5−8 − commissioning example, 6.3−5
− optimising motor magnetising current, 6.11−9
Torque control with speed limitation, in case of vector Voltage boost, optimising via boost correction, 6.11−5
control (MCTRL2), 8.2−53
Voltage drop, 3.7−1
Torque limitation in the field weakening range, with Voltage supply, Via internal voltage source, 5.5−5 , 5.5−7
vector control (MCTRL2), 8.2−50
Preface, 1−1
TRIP, 8.3−1 Vp current controller, 6.8−8 , 8.2−28 , 8.2−43 , 8.5−8
Troubleshhoting and fault elimination, monitoring, VP field precontrol, 6.11−5 , 6.11−10 , 8.5−8
DC−bus voltage, 8.3−7 Vp speed controller, 8.2−28 , 8.2−43 , 8.5−8
Troubleshooting, 9.2−1
− Drive behaviour in the event of faults, 9.3−1 W
− Drive errors, 9.4−1 Warning, 8.3−1
Warranty, 1.2−2
Troubleshooting and fault elimination, 9−1
Weights, 3.1−2
− Monitoring, 8.3−1
Current load of controller (Ixt monitoring), 8.3−4 Wiring
DC−bus voltage, 8.3−7 − digital frequency input to X9, 5.8−1
Heatsink temperature, 8.3−6 − digital frequency output to X10, 5.8−1
Monitoring times for process data input objects, 8.3−2 − system bus (CAN), 5.6−1
− monitoring Wiring according to EMC, 5.3−1 , 5.4−1
bus off, 8.3−2
motor temperature, 8.3−5
reset node, 8.3−2
X
responses, 8.3−1 XT EMZ9371BC keypad, Menu structure, 7.2−11
Type−specific accessories, 13.2−1
EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 14.2−7

/
© 12/2009
F Lenze Automation GmbH Service Lenze Service GmbH
Grünstraße 36 Breslauer Straße 3
D−40667 Meerbusch D−32699 Extertal
Germany Germany
( +49(0)21 32 /99 04−0 ( 008000/ 2446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +49(0)21 32 /7 21 90 Ê +49(0)5154/ 82−11 12
Lenze@Lenze.de Service@Lenze.de
ü www.Lenze.com
EDSVF9383V § .A># § EN § 6.0−11/2009 § TD19

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

9300 Vector..

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

9300 Vector..

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9300 Vector..

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

efesotomasyon.

9300 vector 110 ... 400 kW

EVF9335 ... EVF9338, EVF9381 ... EVF9383

2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1

3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1

4 Installation of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

5 Wiring of the standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1

5.8 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output . . . . . . . 5.8−1

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 iii

7 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1

8.6 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6−1

9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9−1

10 DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10−1

11 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−1

12 Braking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12−1

13 Accessories (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13−1

Preface and general information 1

1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1−1

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1−1

Preface and general information 1

1.1 How to use this System Manual

1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.1−1

1 Preface and general information

1.1.2 Document history

What is new / what has Material number Version Description

1.1−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Preface and general information 1

1.1.3 Products to which the System Manual applies

This documentation applies to 9300 frequency inverters as of version:

Type no. / power

V Vector−controlled frequency inverter 33.9335VE.1A.70

Variant Integrated RFI filter A

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.1−3

1 Preface and general information

Type no. / power

1.1−4 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Preface and general information 1

1.2 Legal regulations

Labelling Lenze controllers are unambiguously designated by the contents of the

Manufacturer Lenze Automation GmbH, Grünstraße 36, D−40667 Meerbusch, Germany

CE conformity Conforms to the EC Low−Voltage Directive

Application as directed 9300 vector frequency inverter and accessories

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.2−1

1 Preface and general information

1.2−2 EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009

Preface and general information 1

1.3 Conventions used

This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between

EDSVF9383V EN 6.0−11/2009 1.3−1

Preface and general information 1

1.4 Notes used

Safety instructions Structure of safety instructions:

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Application notes Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

Tip! Useful tip for simple handling